Home

Alphanumeric Keyboard (continued)

1. VAAN UMA IATA 2 OF 5 AAI 120F5 VAAN Code 93 ANU UPC A TAA UPC E UI EAN 8 UU l EAN 13 Advanced Data Formatting 16 13 Code Types continued KANAAN MSI NA GS1 128 d Tut UPC E1 d Idi Bookland EAN d 04 Trioptic Code 39 PTA A Code 11 LA Code 32 ode 16 14 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Code Types continued ISBT 128 TLC 39 GS1 DataBar and EAN128 Composites Coupon Code UPC EAN Composites PDF417 Advanced Data Formatting 16 15 Code Types continued MicroQR Aztec USPS 4CB One Code Intelligent Mail UPU FICS Postal lt J NOTE When selecting composite bar codes enable AIM IDs if parsing UPC or EAN composite data or data from an application that uses symbol separators 16 16 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Code Lengths Scan these bar codes to define the number of characters the selected code type must contain Select one length per rule only Do not select any code length to select code types of any length 1 Character 2 Characters
2. Code Type Option Value Option Code 39 0 No check character or Full ASCII processing 1 Reader has checked one check character 3 Reader has checked and stripped check character 4 Reader has performed Full ASCII character conversion 5 Reader has performed Full ASCII character conversion and checked one check character 7 Reader has performed Full ASCII character conversion and checked and stripped check character Example A Full ASCII bar code with check character W A I MI DW is transmitted as JA7AIMID where 7 3 4 Trioptic Code 39 0 No option specified at this time Always transmit 0 Example A Trioptic bar code 412356 is transmitted as X0412356 Code 128 0 Standard data packet no Function code 1 in first symbol position 1 Function code 1 in first symbol character position 2 Function code 1 in second symbol character position Example A Code EAN 128 bar code with Function 1 character FNC1 in the first position AIMID is transmitted as C1AIMID 12o0f5 0 No check digit processing 1 Reader has validated check digit 3 Reader has validated and stripped check digit Example An 2 of 5 bar code without check digit 4123 is transmitted as 104123 Codabar 0 No check digit processing 1 Reader has checked check digit 3 Reader has stripped check digit before transmission Example A Codabar bar code without check digit 4123 is transmitted as F04123 Code 93 0 N
3. Send Next 13 Characters Send Next 14 Characters Send Next 15 Characters Send Next 16 Characters Send Next 17 Characters Send Next 18 Characters 16 28 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Send Data continued Send Next 19 Characters Send Next 20 Characters Table 16 2 Setup Field s Definitions Advanced Data Formatting 16 29 Setup Field s Parameter Description Page Move Cursor Move Cursor To a Character Scan the Move Cursor To Character on page 16 30 then any 16 30 printable ASCII character from the Alphanumeric Keyboard on page 16 90 This moves the cursor to the position after the matching character If the character is not there the rule fails and ADF tries the next rule Move Cursor to Start of Data Scan this bar code to move the cursor to the beginning of the data 16 30 Move Cursor Past a Character This action moves the cursor past all sequential occurrences o
4. Simulated Caps Lock When enabled the digital scanner inverts upper and lower case characters on the digital scanner bar code as if the Caps Lock state is enabled on the keyboard This inversion is done regardless of the current state of the keyboard s Caps Lock state Disable Simulated Caps Lock Enable Simulated Caps Lock 7 16 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Convert Case When enabled the digital scanner converts all bar code data to the selected case No Case Conversion Convert All to Upper Case Convert All to Lower Case USB Interface 7 17 Optional USB Parameters If you configure the digital scanner and find the settings were not saved or changed when the system is restarted scan the bar codes that follow to override USB interface defaults Scan a bar code below after setting defaults and before configuring the digital scanner Ignore Beep The host can send a beep request to the digital scanner When this parameter is enabled the request is not sent to the attached digital scanner All directives are still acknowledged to the USB host as if it were processed Disable Enable Ignore Ba
5. TIFF Signature Format 04h Imaging Preferences 6 19 Signature Capture Bits Per Pixel Parameter FO0h 3Ah Select the number of significant bits per pixel BPP to use when capturing a signature Select 1 BPP for a black and white image 4 BPP to assign 1 of 16 levels of grey to each pixel or 8 BPP to assign 1 of 256 levels of grey to each pixel J NOTE The digital scanner ignores these settings for JPEG file formats which only support 8 BPP 1 BPP 00h 4 BPP 01h 3 BPP 02h 6 20 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Signature Capture Width Parameter F4h FOh 6Eh The aspect ratio of the Signature Capture Width and Signature Capture Height parameters must match that of the signature capture area For example a 4 x 1 inch signature capture area would require a 4 to 1 aspect ratio of width to height To set the width of the signature capture box scan the Signature Capture Width bar code followed by 3 bar codes from Appendix D Numeric Bar Codes corresponding to a value in the range of 001 to 752 decimal Signature Capture Width Default 400 001 752 Decimal Signature Capture Height Parameter F4h FOh 6Fh To set the height of the signature capture box scan the Signature Capture Height bar code followed by 3 bar codes from Appendix D
6. Skip Ahead 7 Characters Advanced Data Formatting 16 33 Skip Ahead continued Skip Ahead 8 Characters Skip Ahead 9 Characters Skip Back Skip Ahead 10 Characters Use the following bar codes to skip back characters Skip Back 1 Character Skip Back 2 Characters Skip Back 3 Characters 16 34 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Skip Back continued Skip Back 4 Characters Skip Back 5 Characters Skip Back 6 Characters Skip Back 7 Characters Skip Back 8 Characters Skip Back 9 Characters Skip Back 10 Characters Advanced Data Formatting 16 35 Send Preset Valu
7. UA WH Send F15 Key A MA Send F16 Key du Wl Send F17 Key VTL Send F18 Key du WA Send F19 Key A MAN Send F20 Key du Wl Send F21 Key 16 78 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Send Function Key continued A MA Send F22 Key TL Send F23 Key A MAI Send F24 Key III Send PF1 Key AAA Send PF2 Key du Wu Send PF3 Key A A0 Send PF4 Key Advanced Data Formatting 16 79 Send Function Key continued VATA Send PF5 Key AAT Send PF6 Key du WT Send PF7 Key III Send PF8 Key du Win Send PF9 Key VAN Send PF10 Key VATA Send PF11 Key 16 80 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Send Function Key continued AAT Send PF12 Key VATA Send PF13 Key VAN Send PF14 Key VATICAN Send PF15 Key A A0 Send PF16
8. Do Not Convert UPC E1 to UPC A Disable 00h Symbologies 15 21 EAN 8 JAN 8 Extend Parameter 27h Enable this parameter to add five leading zeros to decoded EAN 8 symbols to make them compatible in format to EAN 13 symbols Disable this to transmit EAN 8 symbols as is Enable EAN JAN Zero Extend 01h Disable EAN JAN Zero Extend 00h 15 22 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Bookland ISBN Format Parameter F1h 40h If you enabled Bookland EAN using Enable Disable Bookland EAN on page 15 10 select one of the following formats for Bookland data e Bookland ISBN 10 The digital scanner reports Bookland data starting with 978 in traditional 10 digit format with the special Bookland check digit for backward compatibility Data starting with 979 is not considered Bookland in this mode e Bookland ISBN 13 The digital scanner reports Bookland data starting with either 978 or 979 as EAN 13 in 13 digit format to meet the 2007 ISBN 13 protocol Bookland ISBN 10 00h Bookland ISBN 13 01h J NOTE For Bookland EAN to function properly first enable Bookland EAN using Enable Disable Bookland EAN on page 15 10 then select either Decode UPC EAN Supplementals Autodiscriminate UPC EAN Supplementals or Enab
9. Height Centimeters Weight Pounds Weight Kilograms Eye Color Hair Color License Expiration Date Driver s License Set Up DS6878 DL 17 11 AAMVA Parse Field Bar Codes continued Birth Date Gender License Issue Date License Issue State Social Security Number Permit Class Permit Expiration Date 17 12 DS6878 Product Reference Guide AAMVA Parse Field Bar Codes continued Permit ID Number Permit Issue Date Permit Restrictions Permit Endorsements AKA Social Security Name AKA Full Name AKA Last Name AKA First Name Driver s License Set Up DS6878 DL 17 13 AAMVA Parse Field Bar Codes continued AKA Middle Name Initial AKA Name Suffix AKA Name Prefix AKA Birth Date Issue Timestamp Number of Duplicates Medical Codes 17 14 DS6878 Product Reference Guide AAMVA Parse Field Bar Codes continued Organ Donor Nonresident Customer ID Weight Range Document Discriminator Country Federal Commission Codes Driver s License Set Up DS6878 DL 17 15 AAMVA Parse Field Bar Codes continued Place of Birth Audit Information
10. Pad Spaces To Length 17 Pad Spaces To Length 18 Pad Spaces To Length 19 Pad Spaces To Length 20 Pad Spaces To Length 21 16 40 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Pad Data with Spaces continued Pad Spaces To Length 22 Pad Spaces To Length 23 Pad Spaces To Length 24 Pad Spaces To Length 25 Pad Spaces To Length 26 Pad Spaces To Length 27 Pad Spaces To Length 28 Advanced Data Formatting 16 41 Pad Data with Spaces continued Pad Spaces To Length 29 Pad Spaces To Length 30 Pad Data with Zeros Stop Pad Spaces To pad data to the left scan the bar code containing the desired number of zeros Use S
11. Caps Lock On When enabled the digital scanner emulates keystrokes as if the Caps Lock key is always pressed Note that if both Caps Lock On and Caps Lock Override are enabled Caps Lock Override takes precedence Enable Caps Lock On Disable Caps Lock On 9 10 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Caps Lock Override When enabled on AT or AT Notebook hosts the keyboard ignores the state of the Caps Lock key Therefore an A in the bar code is sent as an A no matter what the state of the keyboard s Caps Lock key Note that if both Caps Lock On and Caps Lock Override are enabled Caps Lock Override takes precedence Enable Caps Lock Override Disable Caps Lock Override Convert Wedge Data When enabled the digital scanner converts all bar code data to the selected case Convert to Upper Case Convert to Lower Case No Convert Keyboard Wedge Interface 9 11 Function Key Mapping ASCII values under 32 are normally sent as control key sequences see Table 9 2 on page 9 14 When this parameter is enabled the keys in bold are sent in place of the standard key mapping Table entries that do not have a bold entry remain t
12. Matrix 2 of 5 Length Within Range Matrix 2 of 5 Any Length Symbologies 15 59 Transmit Matrix 2 of 5 Check Digit Scan a bar code below to transmit Matrix 2 of 5 data with or without the check digit Transmit Matrix 2 of 5 Check Digit 01h Do Not Transmit Matrix 2 of 5 Check Digit 00h Korean 3 of 5 Enable Disable Korean 3 of 5 To enable or disable Korean 3 of 5 scan the appropriate bar code below J NOTE The length for Korean 3 of 5 is fixed at 6 Enable Korean 3 of 5 01h Disable Korean 3 of 5 00h 15 60 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Inverse 1D This parameter sets the 1D inverse decoder setting Options are Regular Only the digital scanner decodes regular 1D bar codes only e Inverse Only the digital scanner decodes inverse 1D bar codes only e Inverse Autodetect the digital scanner decodes both regular and inverse 1D bar codes Regular 00h Inverse Only 01h Inverse Autodetect 02h Symbologies 15 61 Postal Codes US Postnet To enable or disable US Postnet scan the appropriate bar code below Enable US Postnet 01h
13. 3054 GUI 6 3055 GUI 7 3056 GUI 8 3057 GUI 9 3065 GUI A 3066 GUI B 3067 GUI C 3068 GUI D 3069 GUIE 3070 GUI F 3071 GUI G 3072 GUI H 3073 GUI 3074 GUI J 3075 GUI K 3076 GUIL 3077 GUI M 3078 GUI N 3079 GUI O 3080 GUI P 3081 GUI Q 3082 GUI R 3083 GUIS 3084 GUI T 3085 GUI U 3086 GUI V 3087 GUI W 3088 GUI X 3089 GUI Y 3090 GUI Z Keyboard Wedge Interface 9 21 Table 9 5 Keyboard Wedge F Key Character Set F Keys Keystroke 5001 F1 5002 F2 5003 F3 5004 F4 5005 F5 5006 F6 5007 F7 5008 F8 5009 F9 5010 F10 5011 F11 5012 F12 5013 F13 5014 F14 5015 F15 5016 F16 5017 F17 5018 F18 5019 F19 5020 F20 5021 F21 5022 F22 5023 F23 5024 F24 9 22 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Table 9 6 Keyboard Wedge Numeric Keypad Character Set Numeric Keypad Keystroke 6042 6043 6044 undefined 6045 6046 6047 6048 0 6049 1 6050 2 6051 3 6052 4 6053 5 6054 6 6055 7 6056 8 6057 9 6058 Enter 6059 Num Lock Keyboard Wedge Interface 9 23 Table 9 7 Keyboard Wedge Extended Keypad Character Set Extended Keypad Keystroke 7001 Break 7002 Delete 7003 Pg Up 7004 End 7005 Pg Dn 7006 Pause 7007 Scroll Lock 7008 Backspace 7009 Tab 7010 Print Screen 7011 Insert 7012 H
14. Redundancy Level 3 03h Redundancy Level 4 04h 15 86 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Security Level The digital scanner offers four levels of decode security for delta bar codes which include the Code 128 family UPC EAN and Code 93 Select increasing levels of security for decreasing levels of bar code quality There is an inverse relationship between security and digital scanner aggressiveness so choose only that level of security necessary for any given application e Security Level 0 This setting allows the digital scanner to operate in its most aggressive state while providing sufficient security in decoding most in spec bar codes e Security Level 1 This default setting eliminates most misdecodes e Security Level 2 Select this option if Security level 1 fails to eliminate misdecodes e Security Level 3 If you selected Security Level 2 and misdecodes still occur select this security level Be advised selecting this option is an extreme measure against mis decoding severely out of spec bar codes Selecting this level of security significantly impairs the decoding ability of the digital scanner If you need this level of security try to improve the quality of the bar codes Security Level 0 00h Security Level 1 01h Security Level 2 02h Security Level 3 03h Symbologies 15 87 Int
15. High 7 5 sec Maximum 9 9 sec RS 232 Interface 8 17 RTS Line State This parameter sets the idle state of the Serial Host RTS line Scan a bar code below to select Low RTS or High RTS line state Host Low RTS Host High RTS Beep on lt BEL gt Point to Point Mode Only When this parameter is enabled the digital scanner issues a beep when a lt BEL gt character is detected on the RS 232 serial line lt BEL gt is issued to gain a user s attention to an illegal entry or other important event J NOTE This parameter is not supported in Multipoint to Point mode Beep On lt BEL gt Character Enable Do Not Beep On lt BEL gt Character Disable 8 18 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Intercharacter Delay This parameter specifies the intercharacter delay inserted between character transmissions Minimum 0 msec Low 25 msec Medium 50 msec High 75 msec Maximum 99 msec RS 232 Interface 8 19 Nixdorf Beep LED Options When Nixdorf Mode B is selected this indicates when the digital scanner should beep and turn on it
16. Code 39 Any Length 15 34 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Code 39 Check Digit Verification Parameter 30h Enable this feature to check the integrity of all Code 39 symbols to verify that the data complies with specified check digit algorithm Only Code 39 symbols which include a modulo 43 check digit are decoded Enable this feature if the Code 39 symbols contain a Modulo 43 check digit Enable Code 39 Check Digit 01h Disable Code 39 Check Digit 00h Transmit Code 39 Check Digit Parameter 2Bh Scan a bar code below to transmit Code 39 data with or without the check digit Transmit Code 39 Check Digit Enable 01h Do Not Transmit Code 39 Check Digit Disable 00h J NOTE Code 39 Check Digit Verification must be enabled for this parameter to function Symbologies 15 35 Code 39 Full ASCII Conversion Parameter 11h Code 39 Full ASCII is a variant of Code 39 which pairs characters to encode the full ASCII character set To enable or disable Code 39 Full ASCII scan the appropriate bar code below Enable Code 39 Full ASCII 01h Disable Code 39 Full ASCII 00h J NOTE You cannot enable Trioptic Code
17. Page Parameter Default Number US Planet Disable 15 61 Transmit US Postal Check Digit Enable 15 62 UK Postal Disable 15 62 Transmit UK Postal Check Digit Enable 15 63 Japan Postal Disable 15 63 Australian Postal Disable 15 64 Australian Post Format Autodiscriminate 15 65 Netherlands KIX Code Disable 15 66 USPS 4CB One Code Intelligent Mail Disable 15 66 UPU FICS Postal Disable 15 67 GS1 DataBar GS1 DataBar 14 Enable 15 68 GS1 DataBar Limited 15 68 Non Healthcare Configurations Disable Healthcare Configurations Enable GS1 DataBar Expanded Enable 15 69 GS1 DataBar Limited Security Level Level 3 15 69 Convert GS1 DataBar to UPC EAN Disable 15 71 Composite Composite CC C 15 72 Non Healthcare Configurations Disable Healthcare Configurations Enable Composite CC A B 15 72 Non Healthcare Configurations Disable Healthcare Configurations Enable Composite TLC 39 Disable 15 73 UPC Composite Mode Never Linked 15 74 Composite Beep Mode 15 75 Non Healthcare Configurations Beep As Each Code Type is Decoded Healthcare Configurations Single Beep GS1 128 Emulation Mode for UCC EAN Composite Codes Disable 15 75 1User selection is required to configure this interface and this is the most common selection A 12 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Table A 1 Standard Default Parameters Table Continued Parameter Default Br Bs lel 2D Symbologies PDF417 Enable 1
18. 27 Characters 16 20 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Code Lengths continued 28 Characters 29 Characters 30 Characters Message Containing A Specific Data String Use this feature to select whether the formatting affects data that begins with a specific character or data string or contains a specific character or data string There are 4 features e Specific String at Start e Specific String Any Location e Any Message OK e Rule Belongs to Set Specific String at Start 1 Scan the following bar code 2 Scan the bar codes representing the desired character or characters up to a total of 8 using the Alphanumeric 3 Scan End of Message bar code on page 16 99 Keyboard on page 16 90 Specific String At Start Advanced Data Formatting 16 21 Specific String Any Location 1 Scan the following bar code 2 Enter a location by scanning a two digit number representing the position use a leading zero if necessary using the Numeric Keypad on page 16 22 3 Scan the bar codes representing the desired character or characters up to a total of 8 using the Alphanumeric 4 Scan End of Message bar code on page 16 99 Keyboard on page 16 90 Specific String Any Location Specific String Search 1
19. Disable US Postnet 00h US Planet To enable or disable US Planet scan the appropriate bar code below Enable US Planet 01h Disable US Planet 00h 15 62 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Transmit US Postal Check Digit Select whether to transmit US Postal data which includes both US Postnet and US Planet with or without the check digit Transmit US Postal Check Digit 01h Do Not Transmit US Postal Check Digit 00h UK Postal To enable or disable UK Postal scan the appropriate bar code below Enable UK Postal 01h Disable UK Postal 00h Symbologies 15 63 Transmit UK Postal Check Digit Select whether to transmit UK Postal data with or without the check digit Transmit UK Postal Check Digit 01h Do Not Transmit UK Postal Check Digit 00h Japan Postal To enable or disable Japan Postal scan the appropriate bar code below Enable Japan Postal 01h Disable Japa
20. MI A TU B IAM C Ou D Ou E F Alphanumeric Bar Codes E 9 Alphanumeric Keyboard continued G H l J K L E 10 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Alphanumeric Keyboard continued IL M PAN N PAAL o PAA P OI Q R Alphanumeric Bar Codes E 11 Alphanumeric Keyboard continued OI S A T OI U N Vv OI W X E 12 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Alphanumeric Keyboard continued OI Y OO Z Ou a OM b AN c d Alphanumeric Bar Codes E 13 Alphanumeric Keyboard continued MMT e IMAI f Oh g IMAM h MMI i j E 14 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Alphanumeric Keyboard continued k l m n o p Alphanumeric Bar Codes E 15 Alphanumeric Keyboard continued UL q NM r Odin s Oh t MIM u v E 16 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Alphanumeric Keyboard continued On WwW MM x TIL y IMM Z DI Alphanumeric Bar Codes E 17 Alphanumeric Keyboard continued E 18 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Appendix F ASCII Character Sets Table F 1 ASCII Value Standard Default Parameters Table Full ASCII ASCII Value Code 39 Encode Character EE 1000 U CTRL 2 1001 A CTRLA 1002 B CTRL B 1003 C CTRLC 1004 D CTRL D 1
21. Medium 2 High 3 6 14 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Image File Format Selector Parameter FOh 30h Select an image format appropriate for the system BMP TIFF or JPEG The digital scanner stores captured images in the selected format BMP File Format 03h JPEG File Format 01h TIFF File Format 04h Imaging Preferences 6 15 Image Rotation Parameter Eih 99h This parameter controls the rotation of the image by 0 90 180 or 270 degrees Rotate 0 00h Rotate 90 01h Rotate 180 02h Rotate 270 03h 6 16 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Bits Per Pixel Parameter FOh 2Fh Select the number of significant bits per pixel BPP to use when capturing an image Select 1 BPP for a black and white image 4 BPP to assign 1 of 16 levels of grey to each pixel or 8 BPP to assign 1 of 256 levels of grey to each pixel J NOTE The digital scanner ignores these settings for JPEG file formats which only support 8 BPP The digital scanner ignores 1 BPP for TIFF file formats which only support 4 BPP and 8 BPP 1 BPP is coerced to 4 BPP for TIFF file formats 1 BPP 00h 4 BPP 01h 3 BPP 02h
22. 15 52 codabar lengths 15 50 codabar NOTIS editing 15 52 ele TC EE 15 40 code 11 lengths 004 15 40 code 128 ENEE 15 26 code 128 emulation 04 15 78 code 128 lengths 15 26 ele E WEEN 15 31 transmit butter 15 37 code 39 check digit verification 15 34 code 39 full ASCII 0 000 15 35 code 39 lengths 000 eae 15 33 code 39 transmit check digit 15 34 ele CR E a bade yd aaa ach Pan dhe wae bared 15 38 code 93 lengths 20 0 eae 15 38 composite CC A B 00000 eae 15 72 composite CC 15 72 composite TLC30 cca 15 73 continuous bar code read 5 29 convert GS1 databar to UPC EAN 15 71 convert UPC E to UPC A 15 20 convert UPC E1 to UPC A 15 20 crop to address 6 9 data mai 15 79 data matrix inverse 15 80 data options pause duration 16 8 decode session timeout 5 30 digital imager scanner default table 6 2 discoverable mode 0 0 eee eee 4 7 discrete 20f5 020 eee 15 47 ie EE 15 49 driver s license date format 17 18 no separator 17 19 driver s license gender format 17 17 driver s license parsing 17 2 send control characters 17 20 send keyboard characters 17 26 set defaults 17 17 SQUUP ves vam Ne
23. 00 005 6 18 DEE erbei Ser eet does tet e ee ak coe 6 20 JPEG quality 6 20 Te ME 6 20 EVER 3 5 4 4 4 6 snapshot mode timeout 6 7 specifications 3 9 EEN 4 6 SPP master et SE EINEN ENN Ce 4 4 4 14 4 19 SPP slav tchieeeda eawad ewe tend need weet 4 4 standard default parameters F 1 stored data batch mode 5 11 symbology default parameters 15 2 T technical specifications 3 9 troubleshooting 3 4 U unlocked pairing mode 4 20 UNPACKING e dE E BER AEN Re REES NEE A 1 2 unpairing Dar Code v2 3 es cide EE eke eee eee a de 4 21 UPC EAN bar codes bookland EAN 00002 eee aee 15 10 bookland ISBN 000 cence eee 15 22 check digit 15 15 15 16 convert UPC E to UPC A 15 20 convert UPC E1 to UPC A 15 20 EAN zero extend 15 21 EAN 13 JAN 13 2 0 0 0 c cee ee 15 10 EAN GAN 15 9 ISSNUBAWN gcse sae SNN Hee oe buck iere a H 15 25 supplementals 15 11 UCC coupon extended code 15 23 UP CPA esis ce derer WEE ee peed eee 15 8 UPC A preamble 0000000 eee 15 17 UPCE fees san ENN A eens a Pedal Ae 15 8 UPC E preamble 15 18 UPCI Nd span a EE Ee e aie 15 9 USB connection 7 2 USB defaults 7 4 USB parameters 7 5 user preferences bar codes batch mode 5 11 5 12 beep on insertion 0 eee ee 5 10 set defaults 5 5 time delay to reduced power mod
24. Disable SNAPI Status Handshaking 7 8 DS6878 Product Reference Guide USB Country Keyboard Types Country Codes Scan the bar code corresponding to the keyboard type This setting applies only to the USB HID Keyboard Emulation device J NOTE When changing USB country keyboard types the digital scanner automatically resets The digital scanner issues the standard startup beep sequences North American Standard USB Keyboard G erman Windows French Windows French Canadian Windows 95 98 French Canadian Windows 2000 XP French International USB Interface 7 9 USB Country Keyboard Types Country Codes continued KAAU Spanish Windows d in A Italian Windows Aal Swedish Windows din atb UK English Windows VAM Japanese Windows ASCII d in adi Portuguese Brazilian Windows 7 10 DS6878 Product Reference Guide USB Keystroke Delay This parameter sets the delay in milliseconds between emulated keystrokes Scan a bar code below to increase the delay
25. 16 74 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Send Keypad Characters continued Send Home Key Send Enter Key Send Escape Key Send Up Arrow Key Send Down Arrow Key Send Left Arrow Key Send Right Arrow Key Advanced Data Formatting 16 75 Send Function Key VARTA Send F1 Key A Ma Send F2 Key du WA Send F3 Key IDN Send F4 Key du MA Send F5 Key A Mul Send F6 Key du Wi Send F7 Key 16 76 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Send Function Key continued Send F9 Key Send F11 Key Send F13 Key Send F8 Key Send F10 Key Send F12 Key Send F14 Key Advanced Data Formatting 16 77 Send Function Key continued
26. Last Name 3 Send 4 Send Space 5 First Name 6 Save Driver s Licence Parse Rule 17 46 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Then in order to limit the full name to 15 characters create the following ADF rule 1 Begin New Rule 2 Criterion Parsed Driver s License 3 Action Send Next 15 Characters 4 Save Rule For a license belonging to Michael Williams the parsed data is Williams Michael and Williams Micha after applying the previous ADF rule Appendix A Standard Default Parameters Table A 1 Standard Default Parameters Table Parameter Default Page Number Radio Communications Radio Communications Host Type Cradle Host 4 4 Discoverable Mode General 4 7 Country Keyboard Types Country Code North American 4 8 HID Keyboard Keystroke Delay No Delay 0 msec 4 10 CAPS Lock Override Disable 4 10 Ignore Unknown Characters Enable 4 11 Emulate Keypad Disable 4 11 Keyboard FN1 Substitution Disable 4 12 Function Key Mapping Disable 4 12 Simulated Caps Lock Disable 4 13 Convert Case No Case Conversion 4 13 Beep on Reconnect Attempt Disable 4 15 Reconnect Attempt Interval 30 sec 4 16 Auto reconnect in Bluetooth Keyboard Emulation On Bar Code Data 4 17 HID Slave
27. Send Drivers License Set Up DS6878 DL 17 27 Keyboard Characters continued du Wil Send AA Send VATA Send amp ID Send df Send AAT Send UA WU Send 17 28 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Keyboard Characters continued Send Send Send 0 Send Send Send Send 1 Driver s License Set Up DS6878 DL 17 29 Keyboard Characters continued du d Send 2 UAT Send 3 VATA Send 4 IDN A Send 5 VARTA Send 6 UMVIM Send 7 d A Send 8 17 30 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Keyboard Characters continued Send Send lt Send gt Send 9 Send Send Send Driver s License Set Up DS6878 DL 17 31 Keyboard Characters continued du WT Send e AA Send A du W Send B IAU Send C du Wad Send D IM Send E VARTA Send F 17 32 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Keyboard Characters continued Send H Send J
28. Send 7 Advanced Data Formatting 16 55 Keyboard Characters continued UAT Send 9 VARTA Send VAN Send d Al Send lt VAN Send VARTA Send gt An AN Send 3 16 56 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Keyboard Characters continued Send Send B Send D Send F SendA Send C Send E Advanced Data Formatting 16 57 Keyboard Characters continued VATA A SendG du ul Send H III Send VATICAN Send J VAN Send K VATA Send L VAN Send M 16 58 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Keyboard Characters continued UA WAT Send N VAN Send O DAIN Send P VTL Send Q du MT Send R VATA Send S du Il Send T Advanced Data Formatting 16 59 Keyboard Characters continued AA Send U VARTA Send V UAT LI Send W VIII Send X III Send Y VATA Send Z AA Mul Send 16 60 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Keyboard Characters continue
29. Send GUI 3 Send GUI 4 Send GUI 5 16 84 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Send Graphic User Interface GUI Characters continued Send GUI6 Send GUI 8 Send GUI A Send GUI C Send GUI 7 Send GUI 9 Send GUI B Advanced Data Formatting 16 85 Send Graphic User Interface GUI Characters continued IAU Send GUI D ANANA Send GUI E KAANAAN Send GUI F VICI Send GUIG VIIA Send GUI H TC Send GUI I AANA Send GUI J 16 86 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Send Graphic User Interface GUI Characters continued Send GUI K Send GUI M Send GUI O Send GUIQ Send GUI L Send GUI N Send GUI P Advanced Data Formatting 16 87 Send Graphic User Interface GUI Characters continued IAU Send GUIR 0 Send GUIS IAU Send GUI T INARA Send GUI U VMN Send GUI V IO Send GUI W IAM Send GUI X 16 88
30. 3 Characters 4 Characters 5 Characters 6 Characters Advanced Data Formatting 16 17 Code Lengths continued VAN 7 Characters III 8 Characters UMM 9 Characters ANM 10 Characters d n Wi 11 Characters VAM 12 Characters dn Wil 13 Characters 16 18 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Code Lengths continued VAN 14 Characters db Wl 15 Characters VMI 16 Characters VANTIN 17 Characters AUT 18 Characters VAAN 19 Characters AUT 20 Characters Advanced Data Formatting 16 19 Code Lengths continued MAAT 21 Characters UMMM 22 Characters VMTN 23 Characters Au 24 Characters VANTIN 25 Characters VAM MA 26 Characters dn WAT
31. Signature Capture Code G 3 Table G 2 lists selectable parameters used to generate the image of the captured signature Table G 2 User Defined CapCode Parameters Parameter Defined Width Number of pixels Height Number of pixels Format JPEG BMP TIFF JPEG quality 1 most compression to 100 best quality Bits Per Pixel 1 2 levels not applicable to JPEG format 4 16 levels 8 256 levels BMP format does not use compression JPEG and TIFF formats do Dimensions The size of the signature capture box is determined by the height and separation of the start and stop patterns The line width of the signature capture box is insignificant The thinnest element width referred to here as X is nominally 10 mils 1 mil 0 0254 mm Select this as an exact multiple of the pixel pitch of the printer used For example when using a 203 DPI dots per inch printer and printing 2 dots per module the resulting X dimension is 9 85 mils Data Format The scanner output is formatted according to Table G 3 Symbol scanners allow different user options to output or inhibit bar code type Selecting Symbol ID as the bar code type for output identifies the CapCode with letter i Table G 3 Data Format File Format Image Size 1 byte E 4 bytes BIG Endian Image Data JPEG 1 See Table G 1 last Same bytes as in a data BMP 3 column file TIFF 4 G A DS6878 Product Reference Guide Ad
32. 0 4 3 parameter defaults AUN aea aca lee oe ewe ake eet de E A 1 IBM Zeene eege Se Bae 10 3 keyboard wedge 9 3 radio Communication 4 2 PAS 202 een niet baton Ee dr erent 8 3 scanner emulation 0000000 12 3 RE 7 4 user preferences 00 00 eee eee 5 2 wand emulation 000000005 11 4 parameters batch mode 5 11 5 12 battery reconditioning 1 16 1 17 beep on insertion 5 10 Bluetooth technology support 4 8 IBM 468X 469X 0 ee 10 4 keyboard wedge 9 4 radio communication 4 4 4 5 auto reconnect interval 4 14 batch mode 5 11 5 12 connection maintenance interval 4 23 host types 4 4 4 5 PAN EE 4 19 parameter broadcast 4 19 reconnect attempt beep 4 15 reconnect attempt interval 4 16 RS 282 Age PGs ER EE EE 8 4 scanner to cradle support 4 18 setdefaulis 5 5 time delay to reduced power mode 5 17 UNPall ENEE dE oe ies ve nies 4 21 USB css heed ents nee eee ee sd 7 5 wand emulation 11 5 parser version D 17 16 parsing driver s license data 17 1 parts crade et isani eA ioe ee eR Gey ae SA 1 4 1 5 SCANNET ee wake ete we OR EEE EIERE 1 3 PDF417 bar codes 15 76 PDF prioritization 00055 5 27 PIN code BIS ge BEES E ER 4 27 VaNable sers devia EIST Ee EE ere d
33. Multicode Mode Parameter F1h A5h Enable this parameter to allow multiple bar codes to decode upon one trigger event based on the programmed multicode expression The digital scanner reports a successful decode and provides user indication only if it decodes all bar codes indicated by the multicode expression otherwise the decode fails Bar codes are transmitted in the order defined in the multicode expression Disable this to operate in normal decode mode When using this mode disable Continuous Bar Code Read on page 5 29 and always orient the digital scanner at the same distance and angle perpendicular Disable Multicode Mode 00h Enable Multicode Mode 01h User Preferences amp Miscellaneous Digital Scanner Options 5 37 Multicode Expression Parameter F1h 95h Use this feature to program a multicode expression for Multicode Mode grid method The default is 1 which indicates any bar code To set the multicode expression 1 Scan the bar code below 2 Scan bar codes from the alphanumeric keyboard in Chapter 16 Advanced Data Formatting to define the expression 3 Scan the End of Message bar code from Chapter 16 Advanced Data Formatting Multicode Expression Multicode Expression Syntax n Element 1 Element 2 Element n Where e nis the number of elements in the overall expression The multicode expression describes the bar code s that the digit
34. NOTEDo not confuse the numeric bar codes below with those on the numeric keypad v 0 1 2 3 4 5 Advanced Data Formatting 16 95 Alphanumeric Keyboard continued DI 6 DIN 7 DI 8 LU 9 UT A AWU c 16 96 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Alphanumeric Keyboard continued dn D VA E UKM F IDN G d t H III J Advanced Data Formatting 16 97 Alphanumeric Keyboard continued UT K DAN L DIN M MUNANI N ANANN 0 AONAN P Q 16 98 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Alphanumeric Keyboard continued Du H DIN S DIN T MMI U DI V DIN W X Advanced Data Formatting 16 99 Alphanumeric Keyboard continued VAN Y UT Z AN Cancel HNA End of Message IA a UN b c 16 100 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Alphanumeric Keyboard continued KAA d UH e Ue f INN g TL h VAI i j Advanced Data Formatting 16 101 Alphanumeric Keyboard continued k m n o p q 16 102 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Alphanumeric Keyboard continued DIN r DIN sS MAA t DIN u DIN v DIN w x Advanced Data Formatting 16 103 Alphanumeric Keyboard conti
35. Advanced Data Formatting 16 9 Erase Use these bar codes to erase criteria actions or rules Erase Criteria And Start Again Erase Actions And Start Again Erase Previously Saved Rule Erase All Rules Quit Entering Rules Scan the bar code below to quit entering rules Quit Entering Rules 16 10 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Disable Rule Set Use these bar codes to disable rule sets Disable Rule Set 1 Disable Rule Set 2 Disable Rule Set 3 Disable Rule Set 4 Disable All Rule Sets Advanced Data Formatting 16 11 Criteria Code Types Scan the bar codes for all code to be affected by the rule Scan the codes in succession prior to selecting other criteria To select all code types do not scan any code type Code 39 Codabar GS1 DataBar 14 GS1 DataBar Limited GS1 DataBar Expanded Code 128 D20F5 16 12 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Code Types continued
36. Beep as Each Code Type is Decoded 01h Double Beep after Both are Decoded 02h Z NOTE For HC configurations the default is Enable Single Beep After Both are Decoded GS1 128 Emulation Mode for UCC EAN Composite Codes Select whether to enable or disable this mode Enable GS1 128 Emulation Mode for UCC EAN Composite Codes 01h Disable GS1 128 Emulation Mode for UCC EAN Composite Codes 00h 15 76 DS6878 Product Reference Guide 2D Symbologies Enable Disable PDF417 To enable or disable PDF417 scan the appropriate bar code below Enable PDF417 01h Disable PDF417 00h Symbologies 15 77 Enable Disable MicroPDF417 To enable or disable MicroPDF417 scan the appropriate bar code below Enable MicroPDF417 01h Disable MicroPDF417 00h 15 78 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Code 128 Emulation Enable this parameter to transmit data from certain MicroPDF417 symbols as Code 128 UPC EAN JAN Supplemental AIM ID Format on page 15 15 must be enabled for this parameter to work Enable Code 128 Emulation to transmit these MicroPDF417 symbols with one of the following prefixes ICH if the first codeword is 903 905 C2 if the first codeword is 908 or 909 CO if the first codeword is 910 or 911 Disable Cod
37. Imaging Preferences 6 17 Signature Capture Parameter 5Dh A signature capture bar code is a special purpose symbology which delineates a signature capture area ina document with a machine readable format The recognition pattern is variable so it can optionally provide an index to various signatures The region inside the bar code pattern is considered the signature capture area See Appendix G Signature Capture Code for more information Output File Format Decoding a signature capture bar code de skews the signature image and converts the image to a BMP JPEG or TIFF file format The output data includes the file descriptor followed by the formatted signature image File Descriptor Output Format Signature Type 1 See Size Signature Image WEG Evia BIG Endian JPEG 1 1 8 0x00000400 0x00010203 BMP 3 TIFF 4 To enable or disable Signature Capture scan the appropriate bar code below Enable Signature Capture 01h Disable Signature Capture 00h 6 18 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Signature Capture File Format Selector Parameter F0h 39h Select a signature file format appropriate for the system BMP TIFF or JPEG The digital scanner stores captured signatures in the selected format BMP Signature Format 03h JPEG Signature Format 01h
38. 8 6 8 7 ignore unkown characters 8 19 intercharacter delay 8 18 Nixdorf Beep LED options 8 19 RTS line state 0 0 00000005 8 17 RS 232 parameters Pally EE EE dade oes hdd Sek 8 10 scan data options 00 0 05 5 49 scanner to cradle support 4 18 setdefaulis 5 5 signature capture 6 17 signature capture height 6 20 signature capture JPEG quality 6 20 signature capture width 6 20 snapshot aiming pattern 6 7 snapshot mode timeout 6 7 supplementals 15 11 symbologies default table 15 2 GS1 DataBar limited 15 70 time delay to presentation idle mode 5 19 5 20 time delay to presentation sleep mode 5 21 5 22 time delay to reduced power mode 5 17 timeout between decodes different SyMDO S 88 A8 Cees Ree SIN A RES 5 31 timeout between decodes same symbol 5 31 transmit code ID character 5 47 transmit matrix 2 of 5 check digit 15 59 transmit no read message 5 51 transmit UK postal check digit 15 63 transmit US postal check digit 15 62 trigger modes 5 13 5 14 5 23 UCC coupon extended code 15 23 UK postal 254 ences RE eed Wine de we tans 15 62 unique bar code reporting 5 29 U
39. Enable Disable Discrete 2 of 5 To enable or disable Discrete 2 of 5 scan the appropriate bar code below Enable Discrete 2 of 5 01h Disable Discrete 2 of 5 00h 15 48 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Set Len gths for Discrete 2 of 5 The length of a code refers to the number of characters i e human readable characters including check digit s the code contains Set lengths for D 2 of 5 to any length one or two discrete lengths or lengths within a specific range v The range for Discrete 2 of 5 lengths is 0 55 One Discrete Length Select this option to decode only D 2 of 5 symbols containing a selected length Select the length using the numeric bar codes in Appendix D Numeric Bar Codes For example to decode only D 2 of 5 symbols with 14 characters scan D 2 of 5 One Discrete Length then scan 1 followed by 4 To correct an error or to change the selection scan Cancel on page D 3 Two Discrete Lengths Select this option to decode only D 2 of 5 symbols containing either of two selected lengths Select lengths using the numeric bar codes in Appendix D Numeric Bar Codes For example to decode only D 2 of 5 symbols containing either 2 or 14 characters select D 2 of 5 Two Discrete Lengths then scan 0 2 1 and then 4 To correct an error or to change the selection scan Cancel on page D 3 Length Within Range Select thi
40. Send L Send G Send Send K Send M Driver s License Set Up DS6878 DL 17 33 Keyboard Characters continued UA WAT Send N VAN Send O DAIN Send P VTL Send Q du MT Send R VATA Send S du Il Send T 17 34 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Keyboard Characters continued Send V Send X Send Z Send U Send W Send Y Send Driver s License Set Up DS6878 DL 17 35 Keyboard Characters continued UA WI Send AM Send VARTA Send A WHO Send du E Send AA Senda du d Send b 17 36 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Keyboard Characters continued VAAN Send c DA Send d AA Send e NEO Send f AAT Send g du W Send h Arial Send i Driver s License Set Up DS6878 DL 17 37 Keyboard Characters continued VARTA Send j AA Mil Send k UA WU Send A UA Send m UA Wl Send n AAN Send o VARTA Send p
41. User Preferences Miscellaneous Option Parameter Defaults Table 5 1 lists the defaults for preferences parameters To change the default values e Scan the appropriate bar codes in this guide These new values replace the standard default values in memory To recall the default parameter values scan the Default Parameters on page 5 5 e Configure the digital scanner using the 123Scan configuration program see 123Scan2 on page 13 1 J NOTE See Appendix A Standard Default Parameters for all user preferences hosts symbologies and miscellaneous default parameters Table 5 1 User Preferences Parameter Defaults Parameter om Default Bifo ol User Preferences Set Default Parameter Set Defaults 5 5 Parameter Bar Code Scanning ECh Enable 5 6 Beep After Good Decode 38h Enable 5 6 Suppress Power Up Beeps Fih Dih Do Not Suppress 5 7 Beeper Tone 91ih Medium 5 8 Beeper Volume 8Ch High 5 9 Beeper Duration F1 74h Medium 5 10 Beep on Insertion FOh 20h Enabled 5 10 Batch Mode F1h 20h Normal Do Not Batch 5 11 Data Hand Held Trigger Mode 8Ah Level 5 13 Hands Free Mode Fih 76h Enable 5 14 Presentation Performance Mode Fih 8Ah Standard 5 15 User Preferences amp Miscellaneous Digital Scanner Options 5 3 Parameter ee Default Mel ae Low Power Mode 80h Enabled 5 16 Time Delay to Reduced Power Mode 92h 100 msec
42. 1 2 Resolution 01h 1 4 Resolution 03h Imaging Preferences 6 11 Image Brightness Target White Parameter FO0h 86h Type Byte Range 1 240 This parameter sets the Target White value used in Snapshot and Video Viewfinder mode when using auto exposure White and black are defined as 240 decimal and 1 respectively Setting the value to the factory default of 180 sets the white level of the image to 180 To set the Image Brightness parameter scan Image Brightness below followed by three numeric bar codes representing the value Leading zeros are required For example to set an Image Brightness value of 99 scan 0 9 9 See Appendix Numeric Bar Codes for numeric bar codes 180 Image Brightness 3 digits JPEG Image Options Parameter FOh 2Bh Select an option to optimize JPEG images for either size or for quality Scan the JPEG Quality Selector bar code to enter a quality value the digital scanner then selects the corresponding image size Scan the JPEG Size Selector bar code to enter a size value the digital scanner then selects the best image quality JPEG Quality Selector 01h JPEG Size Selector 00h 6 12 DS6878 Product Reference Guide JPEG Target File Size Parameter F4h F1h 31h Type Word Range 5 350 This parameter defines the target JPEG file si
43. 17 38 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Keyboard Characters continued AAA Send o du N Send r AA Send s NIE Sendt AA Send u du ul Send v VAAN A Send w Driver s License Set Up DS6878 DL 17 39 Keyboard Characters continued VARTA Send x UNNI Send y VATA Send z A HI Send VATA Send AA MN Send VARTA Send 17 40 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Keyboard Characters continued Send Tab Key Send Enter Key Driver s License Set Up DS6878 DL 17 41 Parsing Rule Example Scan the following bar codes in sequence to program the digital scanner to extract and transmit first middle and last names mailing address line 1 mailing address line 2 mailing address city mailing address state mailing address postal code and date of birth Then scan a driver s license bar code J NOTE This example applies to RS 232 To use this example with a USB interface scan Enable Function Key Mapping on page 5 14 in place of the Send Control M Carriage Return bar codes 1 Embedded Driver s License Parsing 2 Begin New Driver s License Parse Rule 3 First Name 4 Send Space 5 Middle Name Initial 6 Sen
44. 3057 GUI 9 3065 GUIA 3066 GUIB 3067 GUI C 3068 GUI D 3069 GUIE 3070 GUI F 3071 GUI G 3072 GUI H 3073 GUI 3074 GUI J 3075 GUI K 3076 GUIL 3077 GUI M 3078 GUI N 3079 GUI O 3080 GUI P 3081 GUI Q 3082 GUI R 3083 GUIS 3084 GUI T 3085 GUI U 3086 GUI V 3087 GUI W 3088 GUI X 3089 GUI Y 3090 GUI Z The Apple iMac keyboard has an apple key on either side of the space bar Windows based systems have a GUI key to the left of the left ALT key and to the right of the right ALT key ASCII Character Sets F 9 Table F 5 PF Key Standard Default Table PF Keys Keystroke 4001 PF 1 4002 PF 2 4003 PF 3 4004 PF A 4005 PF5 4006 PF6 4007 PF7 4008 PF 8 4009 PF 9 4010 PF 10 4011 PF 11 4012 PF 12 4013 PF 13 4014 PF 14 4015 PF 15 4016 PF 16 Table F 6 F key Standard Default Table F Keys Keystroke 5001 F1 5002 F2 5003 F3 5004 F4 5005 F5 5006 F6 5007 F7 5008 F8 5009 F9 F 10 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Table F 6 F key Standard Default Table Continued F Keys Keystroke 5010 F 10 5011 F11 5012 F12 5013 F13 5014 F14 5015 F15 5016 F16 5017 F17 5018 F18 5019 F19 5020 F 20 5021 F21 5022 F 22 5023 F 23 5024 F 24 Table F 7 Numeric Key Standard Default Table Numeric Keypad Keystroke 6042 J 6043 6044 Undefined 6045 S 6046 604
45. Inventory Control Race Ethnicity Std Vehicle Class Std Endorsements Std Restrictions 17 16 DS6878 Product Reference Guide AAMVA Parse Field Bar Codes continued Class Description Endorsement Description Restrictions Description Height in Inches Height in Centimeters Parser Version ID Bar Codes Include this field to emit embedded parser software version identification Parser Version ID Driver s License Set Up DS6878 DL 17 17 User Preferences Set Default Parameter Scan this bar code to return all parameters to the default values listed in Table A 1 on page A 1 Set All Defaults Output Gender as M or F Scan this bar code to report the gender as M or F instead of a numeric value Output gender as M or F 17 18 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Date Format Use these bar codes to select the date format that is displayed Date fields include the following e CCYY 4 digit year CC 2 digit century 00 99 YY 2 digit year in the century 00 99 e MM 2 digit month 01 12 e DD 2 digit day of the month 00 31 The default is Date Format CCYYMMDD J NOTE To specify a date separator i e a character separating each field of the date scan the Send lt character gt bar code that corresponds to the alphanumeric character to use as the date separator immedia
46. are doubled Reader set for Basic Channel operation no escape character transmission protocol Data characters 92pec are not doubled Note When decoders are set to this mode unbuffered Macro symbols and symbols requiring the decoder to convey ECI escape sequences cannot be transmitted The bar code contains a GS1 128 symbol and the first codeword is 903 907 912 914 915 The bar code contains a GS1 128 symbol and the first codeword is in the range 908 909 The bar code contains a GS1 128 symbol and the first codeword is in the range 910 911 Example A PDF417 bar code ABCD with no transmission protocol enabled is transmitted as JL2ABCD Programming Reference B 7 Table B 3 Modifier Characters Continued Code Type Option Value Option Data Matrix 0 ECC 000 140 not supported 1 ECC 200 2 ECC 200 FNC1 in first or fifth position 3 ECC 200 FNC1 in second or sixth position 4 ECC 200 ECI protocol implemented 5 ECC 200 FNC1 in first or fifth position ECI protocol implemented 6 ECC 200 FNC1 in second or sixth position ECI protocol implemented MaxiCode 0 Symbol in Mode 4 or 5 1 Symbol in Mode 2 or 3 2 Symbol in Mode 4 or 5 ECI protocol implemented 3 Symbol in Mode 2 or 3 ECI protocol implemented in secondary message QR Code 0 Model 1 symbol 1 Model 2 MicroQR symbol ECI protocol not implemented 2 Model 2 symbol ECI protocol imple
47. 1062 l gt 1063 J 1064 V 1065 A A 1066 B B 1067 C C 1068 D D 1069 E E 1070 F F 1071 G G The keystroke in bold is sent only if the Function Key Mapping is enabled Otherwise the unbolded keystroke is sent F 4 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Table F 1 ASCII Value Standard Default Parameters Table Continued Full ASCII ee Code 39 Encode Character one 1072 H H 1073 l l 1074 J J 1075 K K 1076 L L 1077 M M 1078 N N 1079 O O 1080 P P 1081 Q Q 1082 R R 1083 S S 1084 T T 1085 U U 1086 V V 1087 W W 1088 X X 1089 Y Y 1090 Z Z 1091 oK 1092 L 1093 M 1094 N We 1095 O 1096 W 1097 A a 1098 B b 1099 C c The keystroke in bold is sent only if the Function Key Mapping is enabled Otherwise the unbolded keystroke is sent ASCII Character Sets F 5 Table F 1 ASCII Value Standard Default Parameters Table Continued Full ASCII GE Code 39 Encode Character ee 1100 D d 1101 E e 1102 F f 1103 G g 1104 H 1105 l i 1106 J j 1107 K k 1108 L 1109 M m 1110 N n 1111 O o 1112 P p 1113 Q q 1114 R r 1115 S s 1116 T t 1117 U u 1118 V v 1119 W w 1120 X x 1121 Y y 1122 Z Zz 1123 P 1124 Q l 1125 R 1126 S The keystroke in bold is sent only if the Function
48. A parity check bit is the most significant bit of each ASCII coded character Select the parity type according to host device requirements e Select Odd parity and the parity bit value is set to O or 1 based on data to ensure that an odd number of 1 bits are contained in the coded character e Select Even parity and the parity bit value is set to 0 or 1 based on data to ensure that an even number of 1 bits are contained in the coded character e Select None when no parity bit is required Odd Even None RS 232 Interface 8 11 Data Bits ASCII Format This parameter allows the digital scanner to interface with devices requiring a 7 bit or 8 bit ASCII protocol 7 Bit 8 Bit Check Receive Errors Select whether or not the parity framing and overrun of received characters are checked The parity value of received characters is verified against the parity parameter selected above Check For Received Errors Enable Do Not Check For Received Errors Disable 8 12 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Hardware Handshaking The data interface consists of an RS 232 port designed to operate either with or without the hardware handshaking lines Request to Send RTS and Clear to Send CTS If Standard RTS CTS handshaking is not selected scan data is transmitted as it becomes
49. Parameter Default Bt Es lel Emulate Keypad Disable 7 12 Emulate Keypad with Leading Zero Disable 7 12 Quick Keypad Emulation Disable 7 13 USB FN1 Substitution Disable 7 14 USB Static CDC Enable 7 14 Function Key Mapping Disable 7 15 Simulated Caps Lock Disable 7 15 Convert Case No Case Conversion 7 16 Ignore Beep Disable 7 17 Ignore Bar Code Configuration Disable 7 17 USB Polling Interval 8 msec 7 18 RS 232 Host Parameters RS 232 Host Types Standard 8 6 Baud Rate 9600 8 8 Parity Type None 8 10 Data Bits ASCII Format 8 Bit 8 11 Check Receive Errors Enable 8 11 Hardware Handshaking None 8 12 Software Handshaking None 8 14 Host Serial Response Time out 2 sec 8 16 RTS Line State Low RTS 8 17 Beep on lt BEL gt Disable 8 17 Intercharacter Delay 0 msec 8 18 Nixdorf Beep LED Options Normal Operation 8 19 Ignore Unknown Characters Send Bar Code 8 19 Keyboard Wedge Host Parameters Keyboard Wedge Host Type IBM PC AT amp IBM PC 9 4 1User selection is required to configure this interface and this is the most common selection Compatibles A 5 A 6 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Table A 1 Standard Default Parameters Table Continued Parameter Default ers A Country Types Country Codes North American 9 5 Ignore Unknown Characters Send 9 7 Keystroke Delay No Delay 9 8 Intra Keystroke Delay Disable 9 8 Alternate Numeric Keypad Emulation
50. s settings For a USB HID keyboard or Keyboard Wedge configuration ensure the system is programmed for the correct keyboard type and language and turn off the CAPS LOCK key Ensure editing options e g ADF UPC E to UPC A Conversion are properly programmed Check the digital scanner s host type parameters or editing options 3 7 3 8 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Table 3 1 Troubleshooting Continued Problem Possible Causes Possible Solutions Trigger Nothing happens when the trigger is No power to the digital scanner Check the system power If the pulled configuration requires a power supply re connect the power supply Check the battery Ensure that end cap to battery chamber is secured Interface power cables are loose Check for loose cable connections and re connect cables Digital Scanner is disabled For Synapse or IBM 468x mode enable the digital scanner via the host interface The laser aiming or illumination does No power to the digital scanner Check battery and charging contacts not appear when the trigger is ensure that end cap to battery chamber pulled is secured ensure all power and cable connections to cradle are secure Interface power cables are loose Check battery and charging contacts ensure power and cable connections to cradle are secure J NOTE f after performing these checks the symbol still does not scan contact the distribu
51. xvi DS6878 Product Reference Guide Special COMMANA E 16 8 Pause D uratiOM WEE 16 8 Begin New Rule ssiri Geesse E ee Tee aes 16 8 Save RUE esini E E 16 8 Erase ege 16 9 Quit Entering Rules eege 16 9 Disable Rule Set eege eege EE 16 10 EE ere ee Ee 16 11 C de EE 16 11 Code Ee A EE 16 16 Message Containing A Specific Data String cceceeeeeeceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeesaeeees 16 20 Specific SUING EE 16 20 Specific String Any Location sxcseteceesseecctrs a cecisics SeeinenedieMensensiageecter tive een 16 21 Specific String Search ensisi en RaRa EE EEEE 16 21 AAGE Te cE O te 16 21 Numere e E 16 22 Pless bone erect eege ee 16 24 Let EE 16 25 EE ee 16 25 Setup PS WEE 16 29 Moye XC URGON Steeg 16 30 Send PA SE eevee rer ert tre eer eee reer eee reer rere ee eer eee are eee 16 31 le 16 32 le E 16 33 Send Preset TE 16 35 Le ere 16 35 Remove E 16 35 Crunch EE 16 35 Stop Space Removal gehier ee 16 35 Remove Leading Zeros EE 16 36 Stop Zero Removal geseis Eege 16 36 Pac Date MEET E 16 37 Pad Data WU e E 16 41 BEEPS ee EE EE 16 46 Send Keystroke Control Characters and Keyboard Characters eceeeeee 16 46 Control Etage EE 16 46 Keyboard Kern 16 51 Send DN gen EE 16 65 Send Keypad ern EE 16 70 Send Tee ut 16 75 Send Right Control Key gege EEN 16 82 Send Graphic User Interface GUI Characters cceceeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeteeeeeeeeeees 16 83 Turn On Off Rule eene EE 16 88 eu lee EE 16 90 Chapter 17 Dri
52. 01 C 02 00 08 End Of Message To program the expression via host command SSI SNAPI the sequence is 0x01 0x43 0x02 0x00 0x08 Ox3b J NOTE The CROO78 S cradle supports SSI The CR0078 P cradle supports SNAPI 0 50 100 PDF417 Code l mR TH 0 Code 128 Code 50 UPC A Code 0 lll 67890 5 100 Figure 5 2 Multicode Expression Example 1 5 40 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Example 2a To decode a Code128 Code Type 8 on the top half of the image and a PDF417 Code Type 15 on the bottom half of the image as in Figure 5 3 program the expression as follows The expression in decimal is formatted for readability 2C208R400 100 50 C 2015 R40 50 100 100 To program the expression via scanning parameters the sequence is MultiCode Expression 02 C 02 00 08 R 04 00 00 64 32 C 02 00 OF R 04 00 32 64 64 End Of Message To program the expression via host command SSI SNAPI the sequence is 0x02 0x43 0x02 0x00 0x08 0x52 0x04 0x00 0x00 0x64 0x32 0x3B 0x43 0x02 0x00 OxOF 0x52 0x04 0x00 0x32 0x64 0x64 0x3B J NOTE The CROO78 S cradle supports SSI The CR0078 P cradle supports SNAPI Example 2b In Figure 5 3 if the bottom PDF417 bar code must transmit first reverse the sequence of the two bar codes The expression in decimal is formatted for readability 2C2015R4050 100 100 C208R400 10050 To program the expression via scanning parameters the sequence is MultiCode Expressio
53. 5 50 Transmit No Read Message 5Eh Disable 5 51 User Preferences amp Miscellaneous Digital Scanner Options 5 5 User Preferences Default Parameters The scanner can be reset to two types of defaults factory defaults or custom defaults Scan the appropriate bar code below to reset the scanner to its default settings and or set the scanner s current settings as the custom default e Restore Defaults Resets all default parameters as follows e f custom default values were configured see Write to Custom Defaults the custom default values are set for all parameters each time the Restore Defaults bar code below is scanned e f no custom default values were configured the factory default values are set for all parameters each time the Restore Defaults bar code below is scanned For factory default values see Chapter A Standard Default Parameters beginning on page A 1 e Set Factory Defaults Scan the Set Factory Defaults bar code below to eliminate all custom default values and set the scanner to factory default values For factory default values see Chapter A Standard Default Parameters beginning on page A 1 e Write to Custom Defaults Custom default parameters can be configured to set unique default values for all parameters After changing all parameters to the desired default values scan the Write to Custom Defaults bar code below to configure custom defaults Restore Defaults Set Factory Defa
54. 6 11 JPEG quality and size 6 12 JPEG target file size 6 12 keyboard wedge alternate numeric keypad emulation 9 9 caps lock on 9 9 capsl ock override 00 9 10 country keyboard types country codes 9 5 host typeS 9 4 ignore unknown characters 9 7 intra keystroke delay 0 9 8 keystroke deg 9 8 Korean 2oip eee ee 15 59 korean 30f5 2 1 ee ee 15 59 lock override 4 20 low exposure priority for snapshot mode 6 6 low gain priority for snapshot mode 6 6 low power mode 000 nanara 5 16 Et 2 OF E EE 15 57 matrix 2 of 5lengths 15 58 MAXICOdG osecao saaana aeriana ee a 15 81 MICIOPDF4AT et scent det eg os 15 77 MICMOOR vet wesc cen a a chan dda ies 15 82 mobile phone display mode 5 25 MSI aerer Eer dE hed owes tees PES 15 53 MSI check digit algorithm 15 56 MSI check digits 15 55 MSI lengths 15 53 MSI transmit check digit 15 55 multicode concatenation symbology 5 44 multicode mode 5 36 5 37 multicode mode concatenation 5 43 multicode troubleshooting 5 45 Netherlands KIX code 15 66 numeric bar codes D 3 OCR bright illumination 14 15 check don 14 25 check digit multiplier 14 26 check digit validation 14 27 default table naana 14 2 IN
55. Hardware RTS CTS None RTS CTS RTS CTS None None None Handshaking Option 3 Option 3 Option 3 Software None None None None ACK NAK None None Handshaking Serial Response 9 9 Sec 2 Sec 9 9 Sec 9 9 Sec 9 9 Sec 9 9 Sec 9 9 Sec Time out Stop Bit Select One One One One One One One ASCII Format 8 Bit 8 Bit 8 Bit 8 Bit 7 Bit 8 Bit 7 Bit Beep On lt BEL gt Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable RTS Line State High Low Low Low No data to Low High High send Prefix None None None None STX 1003 None STX 1002 In the Nixdorf Mode B if CTS is low scanning is disabled When CTS is high scanning is enabled If you scan Nixdorf Mode B without connecting the digital scanner to the proper host it may appear unable to scan If this happens scan a different RS 232 host type within 5 seconds of cycling power to the digital scanner The CUTE host disables all parameter scanning including Set Defaults If you inadvertently select CUTE scan Enable Parameter Bar Code Scanning 01h on page 5 6 then change the host selection RS 232 Interface 8 5 RS 232 Host Parameters continued Selecting the ICL Fujitsu Wincor Nixdorf Mode A Wincor Nixdorf Mode B OPOS terminal enables the transmission of code ID characters listed in Table 8 3 below These code ID characters are not programmable and are separate from the Transmit Code ID feature The Transmit Code ID feature should not be enabled for these te
56. The digital scanner supports three versions of batch mode When the digital scanner is configured for any of the batch modes it attempts to store bar code data not parameter bar codes until transmission is initialized or the maximum number of bar codes are stored When a bar code is saved successfully a good decode beep sounds and the LED flashes green If the digital scanner is unable to store a new bar code a low high low high out of memory beep sounds See pages 2 1 2 3 and 4 3 for all beeper and LED definitions In all modes calculate the amount of data number of bar codes the digital scanner can store as follows Number of storable bar codes 30 720 bytes of memory number of characters in the bar code 3 J NOTE f the batch mode selection is changed while there is batched data the new batch mode will take effect only after all the previously batched data is sent Modes of Operation e Normal default Do not batch data The digital scanner attempts to transmit every scanned bar code Out of Range Batch Mode The digital scanner starts storing bar code data when it loses its connection to a remote device for example when a user holding the digital scanner walks out of range Data transmission is triggered by reestablishing the connection with the remote device for example when a user holding the digital scanner walks back into range e Standard Batch Mode The digital scanner starts storing bar code data after Enter
57. The digital scanner wakes upon presentation of a bar code or a trigger pull Disable 00h 1 Second 01h 10 Seconds 0Ah 1 Minute 11h 5 Minutes 15h 15 Minutes 1Bh 5 20 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Time Delay to Presentation Idle Mode continued 30 Minutes 1Dh 45 Minutes 1Eh 1 Hour 21h 3 Hours 23h 6 Hours 26h 9 Hours 29h User Preferences amp Miscellaneous Digital Scanner Options 5 21 Time Delay to Presentation Sleep Mode Parameter F1h 96h In Presentation Mode this parameter sets the time the digital scanner remains active before entering sleep mode with no illumination The digital scanner wakes when it senses motion upon presentation of a bar code or a trigger pull g NOTE Digital scanner performance is not guaranteed in dim conditions Disable 00h 1 Second 01h 10 Seconds 0Ah 1 Minute 11h 5 Minutes 15h 5 22 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Time Delay to Presentation Sleep Mode continued 15 Minutes 1Bh 30 Minutes 1Dh 45 Minutes 1Eh 1 Hour 21h 3 Hours 23h 6 Hours 26h 9 Hours 29h User Preferences amp Miscellaneous Digital Scanner Options 5 23 Timeout to Low Power Mode from Auto
58. To enable or disable ISSN EAN scan the appropriate bar code below Enable ISSN EAN 01h Disable ISSN EAN 00h 15 26 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Code 128 Enable Disable Code 128 Parameter 08h To enable or disable Code 128 scan the appropriate bar code below Enable Code 128 01h Disable Code 128 00h Set Lengths for Code 128 Parameter L1 D1h L2 D2h The length of a code refers to the number of characters i e human readable characters including check digit s the code contains Set lengths for Code 128 to any length one or two discrete lengths or lengths within a specific range J NOTE When setting lengths for different bar code types enter a leading zero for single digit numbers e One Discrete Length Select this option to decode only Code 128 symbols containing a selected length Select the length using the numeric bar codes in Appendix D Numeric Bar Codes For example to decode only Code 128 symbols with 14 characters scan Code 128 One Discrete Length then scan 1 followed by 4 To correct an error or change the selection scan Cancel on page D 3 e Two Discrete Lengths Select this option to decode only Code 128 symbols containing either of two selected lengths Select lengths using the numeric bar codes in Appendix D Numeric Bar Codes For example to
59. To pad data to the left scan the bar code containing the desired number of spaces Use Send commands to activate this parameter Pad Spaces To Length 1 Pad Spaces To Length 2 Pad Spaces To Length 3 Pad Spaces To Length 4 Pad Spaces To Length 5 Pad Spaces To Length 6 Pad Spaces To Length 7 16 38 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Pad Data with Spaces continued Pad Spaces To Length 8 Pad Spaces To Length 9 Pad Spaces To Length 10 Pad Spaces To Length 11 Pad Spaces To Length 12 Pad Spaces To Length 13 Pad Spaces To Length 14 Advanced Data Formatting 16 39 Pad Data with Spaces continued Pad Spaces To Length 15 Pad Spaces To Length 16
60. between when the trigger is pulled and the image is captured as the digital scanner adjusts to the lighting conditions Hold the digital scanner steady until the image is captured denoted by a single beep If you do not press the trigger within the Snapshot Mode Timeout period the digital scanner returns to Decode Mode Use Snapshot Mode Timeout on page 6 7 to adjust this timeout period The default timeout period is 30 seconds To disable the laser aiming pattern during Snapshot Mode see Snapshot Aiming Pattern on page 6 7 Snapshot Mode Imaging Preferences 6 5 Image Capture Illumination Parameter FOh 69h Selecting Enable Image Capture Illumination causes illumination to turn on during every image capture Disable illumination to prevent the digital scanner from using illumination Enabling illumination usually results in superior images The effectiveness of illumination decreases as the distance to the target increases Enable Image Capture Illumination 01h Disable Image Capture Illumination 00h 6 6 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Gain Exposure Priority for Snapshot Mode Parameter F1h 32h This parameter alters the digital scanner s gain exposure priority when it acquires an image in Snapshot Mode in auto exposure mode e Scan Low Exposure Priority to set a mode in which the digital scanner favors higher gain over exposure to capture an image This results in an im
61. ele CEET C 2 code S39 e ake dle als NEE dae ei C 1 GS1 Databar 0 0 0 eee C 3 interleaved 2 ob C 2 UPC EAN icii exceed Ee EEN SC be eed C 1 scanner emulation defaults 12 3 scanner Date 0 0 ccc eke ne cee eee eee nee ee EE 1 3 scanner to cradle support 4 18 scanner s to cradle support 4 18 SCANNING eeke eeu de rs eGul owen ates eed de ee pee 2 6 GOIS ess Awan ee eee ea waa 5 2 6 2 7 11 craig TE tik tact th aioe dBA E tok 9 7 15 2 radio communications sequence OxamMple is sae eet eye ee eid bia eae 4 1 sequence example 5 2 6 2 15 1 scanning LED Ais Ee RENE ee EE NEES 2 3 Serial Port Profile 4 6 Serial Port Profile master 4 4 4 14 4 19 Serial Port Profile slave 4 4 service information xxii setup connecting a USB interface 7 2 connecting an RS 232 interface 8 2 connecting keyboard wedge interface 9 2 connecting to an IBM 468X 469X host 10 2 connecting using wand emulation 11 2 12 2 cradle tg ake ee ee eon Pe ard BRE Re 1 7 inserting scanner in cradle 1 13 installing the cable 1 8 1 10 mounting cradle 0 eee retiri 1 11 SCANNED wicca ries EE aa ee nae wee estes 3 1 7 supplying power 1 9 1 11 UNPACKING orres rores dEr EIERE 1 2 signal descriptions 3 12 signature Capture 6 17 bits per pixel 6 19 file format selector
62. multicode mode e When specifying Region ensure e Coordinates are within range the 0 100 decimal or 0x00 0x64 hexadecimal e Top Left is above Bottom Right Top Left is 0 0 0x00 0x00 hexadecimal and Bottom Right is 100 100 0x64 0x64 hexadecimal e Regions for two or more bar codes do not overlap e When specifying Code Type ensure the digital scanner supports the code type Try decoding a single bar code without using multicode If it does not decode try enabling the bar code type See Chapter 15 Symbologies e Experiment with simpler expressions then add to it until you discover the source of the error For example try the simplest expression see Examples of Simple Multicode Expressions and make sure you can scan a single bar code If so extend the expression by adding a second bar code specifying a region or specifying the code type Verify that the digital scanner can decode this new expression Continue adding to the expression until it fails to decode as expected indicating the source of the error e Review Defining Multicode Expression Notes on page 5 38 for additional hints 5 46 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Examples of Simple Multicode Expressions The simplest multicode expression is One bar code of any type anywhere in the image e To program this use MultiCode Expression 01 End Of Message Another simple multicode expression is e One Code 128 bar code anywhere in the image e To pr
63. 0 Digit Add Left to Right 04h OCR Programming 14 29 Digit Add Right to Left Each character in the scanned data is assigned a numeric value see OCR Check Digit Multiplier on page 14 26 The check digit multiplier is reversed in order Each value representing a character in the scanned data is multiplied by its corresponding digit in the reversed multiplier resulting in a product for each character in the scanned data The sum of each individual digit in all of the products is then calculated The check digit passes if this sum modulo Check Digit Modulus is zero Example Scanned data numeric value is 132456 check digit is 6 Check digit multiplier string is 123456 Digit 1 3 2 4 5 6 Multiplier 6 5 4 3 2 1 Product 6 15 8 12 10 6 Digit add 6 145 8 142 140 Ge 30 The Check Digit Modulus is 10 It passes because 30 is divisible by 10 the remainder is 0 Digit Add Right to Left 02h 14 30 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Product Add Right to Left Simple Remainder Each character in the scanned data is assigned a numeric value see OCR Check Digit Multiplier on page 14 26 The check digit multiplier is reversed in order Each value representing a character in the scanned data is multiplied by its corresponding digit in the reversed multiplier resulting in a product for each character in the scanned data The sum of these products e
64. 0123456784 UK Postal Jh A Ml Upel pey fy Mtl du ABCDLABY C 6 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Appendix D Numeric Bar Codes D 2 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Numeric Bar Codes For parameters requiring specific numeric values scan the appropriately numbered bar code s 0 1 2 3 4 5 Numeric Bar Codes D 3 6 7 8 9 Cancel To correct an error or change a selection scan the bar code below Cancel D 4 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Appendix E Alphanumeric Bar Codes Alphanumeric Keyboard Space E 2 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Alphanumeric Keyboard continued Alphanumeric Bar Codes E 3 Alphanumeric Keyboard continued DI amp E 4 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Alphanumeric Keyboard continued 3 lt gt Alphanumeric Bar Codes E 5 Alphanumeric Keyboard continued A E 6 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Alphanumeric Keyboard continued J NOTE The bar codes that follow should not be confused with those on the numeric keypad 0 1 2 3 4 5 Alphanumeric Bar Codes E 7 Alphanumeric Keyboard continued MI 6 MI 7 TI 8 IMI 9 Au End of Message Cancel E 8 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Alphanumeric Keyboard continued
65. 14 RS 232 a i aD ar cee be Pere hk eee bel eee 8 20 standard defaults F 1 USB uSestatdedopetecemaurieed meget teed 7 20 authentication 4 2 4 26 auto reconnect 4 4 4 14 4 19 4 23 B bar code defaults E UNE A 1 IBM ier oe oie dete Nee Yen een SE 10 3 keyboard wedge 9 3 radio communication 4 2 RS 292 an ohad dr BEE Hones oe ete a ee 8 3 scanner emulation 200 000 12 3 USB orei se React dhe deans deer ees 7 4 user preferences 5 2 wand emulation 2200000 eee 11 4 bar codes AAMVA field parsing 0 000 17 7 ADP SE ss 40s 2550 c00she4eheeueegbe ened 16 6 Australia post Tomat 15 65 Australian postal 15 64 auto reconnect in Bluetooth keyboard emulation HID slave mode 4 17 auto reconnect interval auaa 4 14 Ka 15 83 aztec inverse 20 eee eee eee 15 83 batch mode 5 11 5 12 battery reconditioning 1 16 1 17 beep after good decode 5 6 beep on insertion 00 5 10 beeper tone 5 8 beeper volume 000 00 5 9 5 10 bits per pixel 6 16 6 19 bluetooth friendly name 4 7 Bluetooth technology support 4 8 bookland EAN 0000 eee aee 15 10 bookland ISBN 000 eee eee eee 15 22 buffering 15 35 15 36 cancel NS eas wowed ewe dee enc ewe D 3 Chinese 20f5 ed ese See E en hen ws 15 56 ele EI EE 15 50 codabar CLSI editing
66. 15 1 Parameter Defaults Continued Parameter Hilal Default CN Matrix 2 of 5 Matrix 2 of 5 Fih 6Ah Disable 15 57 Matrix 2 of 5 Lengths Fih 6Bh 1 Length 14 15 58 Fih 6Ch Matrix 2 of 5 Check Digit Fih 6Eh Disable 15 59 Transmit Matrix 2 of 5 Check Digit Fih 6Fh Disable 15 59 Korean 3 of 5 Korean 3 of 5 Fih 45h Disable 15 59 Inverse 1D Inverse 1D Fih 4Ah Regular 15 60 Postal Codes US Postnet 59h Disable 15 61 US Planet 5Ah Disable 15 61 Transmit US Postal Check Digit 5Fh Enable 15 62 UK Postal 5Bh Disable 15 62 Transmit UK Postal Check Digit 60h Enable 15 63 Japan Postal FOh 22h Disable 15 63 Australian Postal FOh 23h Disable 15 64 Australia Post Format Fih CEh Autodiscriminate 15 65 Netherlands KIX Code FOh 46h Disable 15 66 USPS 4CB One Code Intelligent Mail Fih 50h Disable 15 66 UPU FICS Postal Fih 63h Disable 15 67 GS1 DataBar GS1 DataBar 14 FOh 52h Enable 15 68 GS1 DataBar Limited FOh 53h 15 68 Non Healthcare Configurations Disable Healthcare Configurations Enable GS1 DataBar Expanded FOh 54h Enable 15 69 GS1 DataBar Limited Security Level Fih D8h Level 3 15 70 Convert GS1 DataBar to UPC EAN FOh 8Dh Disable 15 71 Table 15 1 Parameter Defaults Continued 15 6 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Parameter e Default he Composite Composite CC C FOh 55h 15 72 Non
67. 1D bar code Code 128 by the value specified in PDF Prioritization Timeout During that time the digital scanner attempts to decode a PDF417 symbol e g on a US driver s license and if successful reports this only If it does not decode can not find a PDF417 symbol it reports the 1D symbol after the timeout The 1D symbol must be in the device s field of view for the digital scanner to report it This parameter does not affect decoding other symbologies J NOTE The 1D Code 128 bar code lengths include the following e 7 to 10 characters e 14 to 17 characters e 27 to 28 characters In addition a Code 39 bar code with the following lengths are considered to potentially be part of a US driver s license s 8 characters e 12 characters Disable PDF Prioritization 00h Enable PDF Prioritization 01h 5 28 DS6878 Product Reference Guide PDF Prioritization Timeout When PDF Prioritization is enabled this timeout specifies how long the digital scanner attempts to decode a PDF417 symbol before reporting the 1D bar code in the field of view Scan the following bar code then scan four digits from Numeric Bar Codes on page D 2 that specify the timeout in milliseconds For example to enter 400 ms scan the following bar code then scan 0400 The range is 0 to 5000 ms and the default is 200 ms PDF Prioritization Timeout User Preferences amp Miscellaneous Digital Scanner
68. 24 enabled the decode aiming pattern flashes even when the Decode Aim ing Pattern is disabled Enable Hands Free Decode Aiming Pattern 01h Disable Hands Free Decode Aiming Pattern 00h Enable Hands Free Decode Aiming Pattern on PDF 02h User Preferences amp Miscellaneous Digital Scanner Options 5 35 Presentation Mode Field of View Parameter F1h 61h In presentation mode by default the digital scanner searches the larger area of the aiming pattern Full Field of View To search for a bar code in a smaller region around the aiming pattern s center cross in order to speed search time select Small Field of View or Medium Field of View Small Field of View 00h Medium Field of View 01h Full Field of View 02h 5 36 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Decoding Illumination Parameter FOh 2Ah Selecting Enable Decoding Illumination causes the digital scanner to flash illumination to aid decoding Select Disable Decoding Illumination to prevent the digital scanner from using decoding illumination Enabling illumination usually results in superior images The effectiveness of the illumination decreases as the distance to the target increases Enable Decoding Illumination 01h Disable Decoding Illumination 00h
69. 25 Move CUrSOr 16 30 send data 16 25 setup fields 16 29 alphanumeric keyboard 16 90 alternate rule seis 16 3 bar code let 16 6 bar code menu example 16 2 DOOD aa pa eee Wer eae 16 46 code lengths 16 16 code typeS 6 eee ee 16 11 e ULT WEE 16 1 16 11 default rules nnana 0c ce ees 16 5 invalid rule 3 4 move cursor past acharacter 16 29 move cursor to acharacter 16 29 move cursor to startofdata 16 29 numeric keypad 16 22 16 23 pad Spaces 0 200 16 37 pad ZErOS 1 ee ee 16 41 HUE tee eg Deke EE eege EN 11 8 16 1 rules hierarchy 16 4 send control characters 16 46 send function key 16 75 send keyboard characters 16 51 send keypad characters 16 70 send preset value 2 20000 16 29 send value 16 35 skip ahead n characters 16 29 skip ahead characters 16 32 skip back n characters 16 29 skip back characters 000 16 33 space removal 0 0 eee eee eee 16 35 specialcommands 16 8 specific data string 16 20 specific string any location 16 21 any message Ok 16 21 atstart vias tea teeta ea tS 4 16 20 rule belongs to set 16 24 transmit error 2 2 2 0 cee eee 3 4 turn off rulesets 16 88 16 89 zero
70. 31 full E ege ee Eer ea Ee 15 35 Ee LEE 15 33 transmit check digit 15 34 code 93 bar codes ere E WEEN 15 38 Ee LEE 15 38 code ID character 5 47 code identifiers AIM codelDs ees B 3 modifier characters B 4 SYMBOL hese nde Ped Dig tel awek eed eset B 1 code types ADF sca cry thd ee bob bbe te bee alse Osea 6 abe 16 11 composite bar codes composite CC A B anuanua eee 15 72 composite CC 15 72 composite TLC30 0000 ee eae 15 73 UPC composite mode 15 74 configurations xix conventions notational 0 0 00000 E e eee xxi cradle oys iiaae ae n E e deat tony a a E ce 1 7 connecting aeaa anaana 1 8 1 10 diagram 1 4 1 5 inserting scanner 1 13 interfaces 1 2 MOUNINO EE 1 11 PNOUIS e ere d TE EEEE ENN 3 12 supply power 1 9 1 11 cradle parts 1 4 1 5 ChOPPING TEEN de hee a eee wes 6 8 6 9 D data matrix barcodes 00 00 15 79 decode zone 2 9 default parameters Allon oe A AOE A de dace et A A 1 IBM ib gg RE Gh AG esta d e each Ae 10 3 imaging preferences 6 2 keyboard wedge 9 3 OCR sian ik caw ates hed e AE E 14 2 radio communication 4 2 EE 8 3 scanner emulation 12 3 standard default table F 1 symbologieS 2 00 eee eee 15 2 US Bie ite panied ied dane che Aer dee De 7 4 user preferences 5 2 wand emulation 11 4 digital imager scanner defaults 2 cae Ye t EN dae et ele ei heed AR 6 2 discrete 2 of 5 bar codes di
71. 39 and Code 39 Full ASCII simultaneously Code 39 Full ASCII to Full ASCII Correlation is host dependent and is therefore described in the ASCII Character Set Table for the appropriate interface See the ASCII Character Set for USB on page 7 20 or the ASCII Character Set for RS 232 on page 8 20 Code 39 Buffering Scan amp Store Parameter 71h This feature allows the digital scanner to accumulate data from multiple Code 39 symbols Selecting the Scan and Store option Buffer Code 39 temporarily buffers all Code 39 symbols having a leading space as a first character for later transmission The leading space is not buffered Decoding a Code 39 symbol with no leading space transmits in sequence all buffered data in a first in first out format plus the triggering symbol See the following pages for further details Select Do Not Buffer Code 39 to transmit all decoded Code 39 symbols immediately without storing them in the buffer 15 36 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Code 39 Buffering Scan amp Store continued This feature affects Code 39 only If selecting Buffer Code 39 we recommend configuring the digital scanner to decode Code 39 symbology only Buffer Code 39 Enable 01h Do Not Buffer Code 39 Disable 00h While there is data in the transmission buffer you cannot select Do Not Buffer Code 39 T
72. 69 GS1 DataBar Expanded Parameter FOh 54h Enable GS1 DataBar Expanded 01h Disable GS1 DataBar Expanded 00h 15 70 DS6878 Product Reference Guide GS1 DataBar Limited Security Level Parameter F1h D8h The digital scanner offers four levels of decode security for GS1 DataBar Limited bar codes There is an inverse relationship between security and digital scanner aggressiveness Increasing the level of security may result in reduced aggressiveness in scanning so choose only that level of security necessary e Level 1 No clear margin required This complies with the original GS1 standard yet might result in erroneous decoding of the DataBar Limited bar code when scanning some UPC symbols that start with digits g and Se e Level 2 Automatic risk detection This level of security may result in erroneous decoding of DataBar Limited bar codes when scanning some UPC symbols The scanner defaults to Level 3 otherwise to Level 1 e Level 3 Security level reflects newly proposed GS1 standard that requires a 5 times trailing clear margin e Level 4 Security level extends beyond the standard required by GS1 This level of security requires a 5 times leading and trailing clear margin GS1 DataBar Limited Security Level 1 01h GS1 DataBar Limited Security Level 2 02h GS1 Da
73. Aim Parameter Eih D9h This parameter sets the time the digital scanner remains in auto aim before entering low power mode Disabled 5 secs 15 secs 30 secs 1 minute 5 24 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Picklist Mode Parameter FOh 92h Picklist mode enables the digital scanner to decode only bar codes that are aligned under the laser crosshair Select one of the following picklist modes for the digital scanner Disabled Always Picklist mode is always disabled Enabled in Hand Held Mode Picklist mode is enabled when the digital scanner is out of hands free mode and disabled when the digital scanner is in presentation mode Enabled in Hands Free Mode Picklist mode is enabled when the digital scanner is in hands free mode only Enabled Always Picklist mode is always enabled Disabled Always 00h Enabled in Hand Held Mode 01h Enabled in Hands Free Mode 03h Enabled Always 02h User Preferences amp Miscellaneous Digital Scanner Options 5 25 Mobile Phone Display Mode Parameter Eih CCh This mode improves bar code reading performance off mobile phones and electronic displays Enable this in hand held hands free or both modes or disable this
74. Batch Mode is scanned Data transmission is triggered by scanning Send Batch Data lt J NOTE Transmission is halted if the connection to the remote device is lost e Cradle Contact Batch Mode The digital scanner starts storing bar code data when Enter Batch Mode is scanned Data transmission is triggered by insertion of the digital scanner into the cradle J NOTE f the digital scanner is removed from the cradle during batch data transfer transmission halts until the digital scanner is re inserted in the cradle In all modes transmissions are halted if the digital scanner is moved out of range The digital scanner resumes when it is back in range If a bar code is scanned while batch data is transmitted it is appended to the end of the batched data parameter bar codes are not stored 5 12 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Batch Mode continued Normal 00h Out of Range Batch Mode 01h Standard Batch Mode 02h Cradle Contact Batch Mode 03h Enter Batch Mode Send Batch Data User Preferences amp Miscellaneous Digital Scanner Options 5 13 Hand Held Trigger Mode Parameter 8Ah Select one of the following trigger modes for the digital scanner e Standard Level A trigger pull activates decode processing Decode processing continues until the bar code decodes yo
75. Each pattern extends the full height of the signature capture box The box is optional so you can omit it replace it with a single baseline or print a baseline with an X on top of it towards the left as is customarily done in the US to indicate a request for signature However if an X or other markings are added in the signature box area these are captured with the signature Figure G 1 CapCode G 2 DS6878 Product Reference Guide CapCode Pattern Structure A CapCode pattern structure consists of a start pattern followed by a separator space a signature capture box a second separator space and then a stop pattern Assuming that X is the dimension of the thinnest element the start and stop patterns each contains 9X total width in 4 bars and 3 spaces A 7X quiet zone is required to the left and to the right of the CapCode pattern D eee Capture Box Kc H E E se E ae ey Figure G 2 CapCode Structure The separator spaces on either side of the signature capture box can be between 1X and 3X wide Start Stop Patterns Table G 1 lists the accepted start stop patterns The bar and space widths are expressed as multiples of X You must use the same pattern on either side of a signature capture box The type value is reported with the captured signature to indicate the purpose of the signature captured Table G 1 Start Stop Pattern Definitions Bar Space Patterns B S B
76. Emulate Keypad Disable 7 12 Emulate Keypad with Leading Zero Disable 7 12 Quick Keypad Emulation Disable 7 13 USB FN1 Substitution Disable 7 14 USB Static CDC Enable 7 14 Function Key Mapping Disable 7 15 Simulated Caps Lock Disable 7 15 Convert Case No Case Conversion 7 16 Ignore Beep Disable 7 17 Ignore Bar Code Configuration Disable 7 17 USB Polling Interval 8 msec 7 18 USB Interface 7 5 USB Host Parameters USB Device Type Select the desired USB device type J NOTE When changing USB Device Types the cradle automatically restarts The digital scanner issues a disconnect reconnect beep sequence HID Keyboard Emulation IBM Table Top USB IBM Hand Held USB USB OPOS Handheld Simple COM Port Emulation 7 6 DS6878 Product Reference Guide CDC COM Port Emulation Symbol Native API SNAPI with Imaging Interface Symbol Native API SNAPI without Imaging Interface USB Interface 7 7 Symbol Native API SNAPI Status Handshaking After selecting a SNAPI interface as the USB device type select whether to enable or disable status handshaking J NOTE The CR0078 P cradle is required for SNAPI Enable SNAPI Status Handshaking
77. For example to decode only Code 11 symbols containing either 2 or 14 characters select Code 11 Two Discrete Lengths then scan 0 2 1 and then 4 To correct an error or to change the selection scan Cancel on page D 3 e Length Within Range Select this option to decode a Code 11 symbol with a specific length range Select lengths using numeric bar codes in Appendix D Numeric Bar Codes For example to decode Code 11 symbols containing between 4 and 12 characters first scan Code 11 Length Within Range Then scan 0 4 1 and 2 enter a leading zero for single digit numbers To correct an error or change the selection scan Cancel on page D 3 e Any Length Scan this option to decode Code 11 symbols containing any number of characters within the digital scanner s capability Symbologies 15 41 Set Lengths for Code 11 continued Code 11 One Discrete Length Code 11 Two Discrete Lengths Code 11 Length Within Range Code 11 Any Length 15 42 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Code 11 Check Digit Verification This feature allows the digital scanner to check the integrity of all Code 11 symbols to verify that the data complies with the specified check digit algorithm This selects the check digit mechanism for the decoded Code 11 bar code The options are to check for one check digit check for two check digits or disable the feature To enable this feature scan the bar code below corresponding to the number of ch
78. Gain Exposure Priority for Snapshot Mode sssesssssseeeeseseersseresserrrnerernrerrnnnrsrerrseet 6 6 Snapshot Mode Timeout EE 6 7 Snapshot Aiming SE 6 7 Image eet le EE 6 8 Crop 10 EE 6 9 Image Size Number of Pixels AAA 6 10 Image Brightness Target White AAA 6 11 JPEG Image Options an na eee eee 6 11 JPEG Target E 6 12 JPEG Quality and Size Value E 6 12 Image Enhancement EE 6 13 Image File Format Selector AAA 6 14 Image Rotation EE 6 15 Bits Per e EE 6 16 Signature et E 6 17 Output File Format eee ener eee nee ee ee 6 17 Signature Capture File Format Selector cccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeneeeeeeseees 6 18 Signature Capture Bits Per Pixel ENEE 6 19 Signature Capture Width se cccessscsinencnts cand sateedeccacseaxeus Datclashciannisseseradtacectaxinanbeanevesades 6 20 Signature Capture Height EE 6 20 Signature Capture JPEG Quality eccecccsseeeeesssseeeesseeeeeesesaeeeeessaeeessseteeessssnees 6 20 Chapter 7 USB Interface INOdUCUOM isasi aa aa ara rer recat Or e ET er ee 7 1 Connecting a USB IMtenace sgeziergieageerie e Seege 7 2 USB Parameter Defaults eendeitege eerereteeebe ege eebeENete 7 4 USB THHOSt ParametelS Cadets deeg 7 5 USB Devic TYPE riai Seas acca tc ee eee ee 7 5 Symbol Native API SNAPI Status Handshaking ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeees 7 7 USB Country Keyboard Types Country Codes cccccceeeesseseneeeeeeeessssssaaeees 7 8 USB Keystroke RE 7 10 US
79. Hardware Handshaking takes precedence lt V NOTE The DTR signal is jumpered to the active state RS 232 Interface 8 13 Hardware Handshaking continued e None Scan the bar code below if no Hardware Handshaking is desired e Standard RTS CTS Scan the bar code below to select Standard RTS CTS Hardware Handshaking e RTS CTS Option 1 When RTS CTS Option 1 is selected the digital scanner asserts RTS before transmitting and ignores the state of CTS The digital scanner de asserts RTS when the transmission is complete e RTS CTS Option 2 When Option 2 is selected RTS is always high or low user programmed logic level However the digital scanner waits for CTS to be asserted before transmitting data If CTS is not asserted within Host Serial Response Time out the digital scanner issues an error indication and discards the data e RTS CTS Option 3 When Option 3 is selected the digital scanner asserts RTS prior to any data transmission regardless of the state of CTS The digital scanner waits up to Host Serial Response Time out for CTS to be asserted If CTS is not asserted during this time the digital scanner issues an error indication and discards the data The digital scanner de asserts RTS when transmission is complete None Standard RTS CTS RTS CTS Option 1 RTS CTS Option 2 RTS
80. Healthcare Configurations Disable Healthcare Configurations Enable Composite CC A B FOh 56h 15 72 Non Healthcare Configurations Disable Healthcare Configurations Enable Composite TLC 39 FOh 73h Disable 15 73 UPC Composite Mode FOh 58h Never Linked 15 74 Composite Beep Mode FOh 8Eh 15 75 Non Healthcare Configurations Beep As Each Code Type is Decoded Healthcare Configurations Single Beep GS1 128 Emulation Mode for UCC EAN Composite Codes FOh ABh Disable 15 75 2D Symbologies PDF417 OFh Enable 15 76 MicroPDF417 E3h Disable 15 77 Code 128 Emulation 7Bh Disable 15 78 Data Matrix FOh 24h Enable 15 79 Data Matrix Inverse Eih 4Ch 15 80 Non Healthcare Configurations Regular Healthcare Configurations Inverse Autodetect Maxicode FOh 26h Disable 15 81 QR Code FOh 25h Enable 15 81 QR Inverse Fih 4Bh Regular 15 82 MicroQR F1h 3Dh Enable 15 82 Aztec Fih 3Eh Enable 15 83 Aztec Inverse F1h 4Dh Regular 15 83 Symbology Specific Security Levels Redundancy Level 4Eh 1 15 84 Security Level 4Dh 0 15 86 Intercharacter Gap Size FOh 7Dh Normal 15 87 Report Version 15 87 Symbologies 15 7 Table 15 1 Parameter Defaults Continued Parameter Page Parameter Number Default Number Macro PDF Flush Macro PDF Buffer None None 15 88 Abort Macro PDF Entry None None 15 88 15 8 DS6878 Product Reference Guide UPC EAN Enable Disable UPC A Parameter 01h To enable or disable UPC A scan the appropriate bar code below Enable
81. Key VARTA Send PF17 Key AAA Send PF18 Key Advanced Data Formatting 16 81 Send Function Key continued TL Send PF19 Key AUT Send PF20 Key VATA Send PF21 Key III Send PF22 Key TT Send PF23 Key AAT Send PF24 Key du WM Send PF25 Key 16 82 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Send Function Key continued Send PF26 Key Send PF27 Key Send PF28 Key Send PF29 Key Send PF30 Key Send Right Control Key The Send Right Control Key action will send a tap press and release of the Right Control Key Send Right Control Key Advanced Data Formatting 16 83 Send Graphic User Interface GUI Characters The Send Graphic User Interface Character actions taps the specified key while holding the System Dependent Graphic User Interface GUI Key The definition of the Graphic User Interface key depends on the attached system Send GUI 0 Send GUI 1 Send GUI 2
82. Light source laser or photoelectric cell illuminates a bar code 2 Photodetector registers the difference in reflected light more light reflected from spaces 3 Signal conditioning circuit transforms optical detector output into a digitized bar pattern Scanning Mode The scanner is energized programmed and ready to read a bar code Scanning Sequence A method of programming or configuring parameters for a bar code reading system by scanning bar code menus Self Checking Code A symbology that uses a checking algorithm to detect encoding errors within the characters of a bar code symbol Space The lighter element of a bar code formed by the background between bars Specular Reflection The mirror like direct reflection of light from a surface which can cause difficulty decoding a bar code Glossary 7 SPP Serial Port Profile Start Stop Character A pattern of bars and spaces that provides the scanner with start and stop reading instructions and scanning direction The start and stop characters are normally to the left and right margins of a horizontal code Substrate A foundation material on which a substance or image is placed Symbol A scannable unit that encodes data within the conventions of a certain symbology usually including start stop characters quiet zones data characters and check characters Symbol Aspect Ratio The ratio of symbol height to symbol width Symbol Height The distance between the outsid
83. Net e E 12 5 Convert Newer Code Types ENEE 12 6 lee OU Ae EE 12 6 Convert All Bar Codes to Code 20 12 7 Code 39 Full ASCII Conversion cccccccccecseseececeeeeseeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeseseeesseeeeeeeeeeeetanea 12 7 Transmission Timeout ccc ccseccceeeccceeceeueeceuueceeueaceuuaueeuaaeeuuaueeuaaeeuuaeesuaeeuuaeeenaaees 12 8 Ignore Unknown Characters ccci iisoctccsesienencce cotassseeteecisesnasdeachsnnsaksteerntsasiaceeteetnerinde 12 9 Re e e fC e EE 12 9 Check For Decode LED oo iecc ccc cccccccceseeeeceeseeeesesseeaeeuseusuaeeseusueeuseseueaaeeeasaneeeenea 12 10 Chapter 13 123Scan2 lut ele Eer ele WEE 13 1 Communication With 123SCaN2 o e ccc cceccccceeeccsseeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeaueusesseueueeeeueaneeeeeueneueeeeeaes 13 1 123Scan2 Requirements ste dg es Ss een ans soca awe ea eee ees 13 1 xii DS6878 Product Reference Guide Chapter 14 OCR Programming Dutt MUU EE 14 1 OCR Parameter Defaults seetbeestz ees ierkgeiebeete dente EES 14 2 OCR Programming Men 14 3 Enable Disable OCR A E 14 3 OCRA AM AN EE 14 3 Enable Disable OCR B EE 14 5 1 2 cae de a E 14 6 Enable Disable MICR E13B ieccicteccnncsiceccsasszicdedenstntnaazccsaureiniedenienaeeeiieteumndiedincaa 14 9 Enable Disable US Currency Serial Number cc cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenneeeeeeee 14 10 OCR OrentatiON ica ences vases ses inaro enaa a a ee gE a TE EE REEERE ah 14 10 OCR LINES sepesma a a aE Ea a E EEEE 14 12 OCR Minimum Characters dccsicitensxeuteci
84. Options 5 29 Continuous Bar Code Read Enable this to report every bar code while the trigger is pressed J NOTE Motorola strongly recommends enabling Picklist Mode on page 5 24 with this feature Disabling Picklist Mode can cause accidental decodes when more than one bar code is in the imaging engine s field of view Disable Continuous Bar Code Read Oh Enable Continuous Bar Code Read 1h Unique Bar Code Reporting Enable this to report only unique bar codes while the trigger is pressed This option only applies when Continuous Bar Code Read is enabled Disable Continuous Bar Code Read Uniqueness 00h Enable Continuous Bar Code Read Uniqueness 01h 5 30 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Decode Session Timeout This parameter sets the maximum time decode processing continues during a scan attempt It is programmable in 0 1 second increments from 0 5 to 9 9 seconds The default timeout is 9 9 seconds To set a Decode Session Timeout scan the bar code below Next scan two numeric bar codes from Appendix D Numeric Bar Codes that correspond to the desired on time Enter a leading zero for single digit numbers For example to set a Decode Session Timeout of 0 5 seconds scan the bar code below then scan the 0 and 5 bar codes To correct an error or change the selection scan Cancel on page D 3 Decode Session Timeout User Preferences amp Miscellane
85. Parameters Port Address This parameter sets the IBM 468X 469X port used J NOTE Scanning one of these bar codes enables the RS 485 interface on the digital scanner None Selected Hand held Scanner Emulation Port 9B Non IBM Scanner Emulation Port 5B Table top Scanner Emulation Port 17 J NOTE User selection is required to configure this interface and this is the most common selection IBM Interface 10 5 Convert Unknown to Code 39 Scan a bar code below to enable or disable the conversion of unknown bar code type data to Code 39 Enable Convert Unknown to Code 39 Disable Convert Unknown to Code 39 Optional IBM Parameters If you configure the digital scanner and find the settings were not saved or changed when the system is restarted scan the bar codes that follow to override IBM interface defaults Scan a bar code below after setting defaults and before configuring the digital scanner Ignore Beep The host can send a beep request to the digital scanner When this parameter is enabled the request is not sent to the attached digital scanner All directives are still acknowledged to the IBM RS485 host as
86. Pixel BPP FOh 2Fh 8 BPP 6 16 Signature Capture 5Dh Disable 6 17 Signature Capture Image File Format FOh 39h JPEG 6 18 Selection Signature Capture Bits per Pixel BPP FOh 3Ah 8 BPP 6 19 Signature Capture Width F4h FOh 6Eh 400 6 20 Signature Capture Height F4h FOh 6Fh 100 6 20 Signature Capture JPEG Quality FOh A5h 65 6 20 6 4 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Imaging Preferences The parameters in this chapter control image capture characteristics Image capture occurs in all modes of operation including decode and snapshot Operational Modes The digital scanner has two modes of operation e Decode Mode e Snapshot Mode Decode Mode By default when you pull the trigger the digital scanner attempts to locate and decode enabled bar codes within its field of view The digital scanner remains in this mode until it decodes a bar code or you release the trigger Snapshot Mode Use Snapshot Mode to capture a high quality image and transmit it to the host To temporarily enter this mode scan the Snapshot Mode bar code While in this mode the digital scanner blinks the green LED at 1 second intervals to indicate it is not in standard operating decode mode In Snapshot Mode the digital scanner turns on its laser aiming pattern to highlight the area to capture in the image The next trigger pull instructs the digital scanner to capture a high quality image and transmit it to the host A short time may pass less than 2 seconds
87. Sequence Examples In most cases scanning one bar code sets the parameter value For example to transmit bar code data without the UPC A check digit simply scan the Do Not Transmit UPC A Check Digit bar code under Transmit UPC A Check Digit on page 15 15 The digital scanner issues a fast warble beep and the LED turns green signifying a successful parameter entry Other parameters such as Set Length s for D 2 of 5 require scanning several bar codes See the individual parameter such as Set Length s for D 2 of 5 for this procedure 15 2 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Errors While Scanning Unless otherwise specified to correct an error during a scanning sequence just re scan the correct parameter Symbology Parameter Defaults Table 15 1 lists the defaults for all symbologies parameters To change the default values scan the appropriate bar codes in this guide These new values replace the standard default values in memory To recall the default parameter values scan the Default Parameters on page 5 5 R NOTE See Appendix A Standard Default Parameters for all user preferences hosts and miscellaneous default parameters Table 15 1 Parameter Defaults Parameter Fanne Default ube e UPC EAN UPC A Oth Enable 15 8 UPC E 02h Enable 15 8 UPC E1 OCh Disable 15 9 EAN 8 JAN 8 04h Enable 15 9 EAN 13 JAN 13 03h Enable 15 10 Bookland EAN 53h Disable 15 10 Decode UPC EAN JAN Supplemen
88. UPC A 01h Disable UPC A 00h Enable Disable UPC E Parameter 02h To enable or disable UPC E scan the appropriate bar code below Enable UPC E 01h Disable UPC E 00h Symbologies 15 9 Enable Disable UPC E1 Parameter OCh UPC E1 is disabled by default To enable or disable UPC E1 scan the appropriate bar code below J NOTE UPC E1 is not a UCC Uniform Code Council approved symbology Enable UPC E1 01h Disable UPC E1 00h Enable Disable EAN 8 JAN 8 Parameter 04h To enable or disable EAN 8 JAN 8 scan the appropriate bar code below Enable EAN 8 JAN 8 01h Disable EAN 8 JAN 8 00h 15 10 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Enable Disable EAN 13 JAN 13 Parameter 03h To enable or disable EAN 13 JAN 13 scan the appropriate bar code below Enable EAN 13 JAN 13 01h Disable EAN 13 JAN 13 00h Enable Disable Bookland EAN Parameter 53h To enable or disable Bookland EAN scan the appropriate bar code below Enable Bookland EAN 01h Disable Bookland EAN 00h V NOTE f you enable Bookland EAN select a Bookland ISBN Format on page 15 22 Also select either Decode UPC EAN Supplementals Autodiscriminate UPC EAN Supplementals or Enabl
89. X 1089 Y Y 1090 Z Z 1091 K I 1092 L 1093 M 1094 N A 1095 0 S 1096 SON 1097 A a 1098 4B b 1099 C c 1100 D d 1101 E e 1102 F f 1103 G g 1104 H h 1105 4 i 1106 A j 1107 K k 1108 L l 1109 M m 1110 N n 1111 0 o 1112 P p 1113 Q q 1114 R r 1115 S s 1116 T t 8 24 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Table 8 4 ASCII Character Set for RS 232 Continued Full ASCII ASCII Value Code 39 Encode Character ASCII Character 1117 U u 1118 V v 1119 W w 1120 X x 1121 Y y 1122 Z H 1123 P 1124 Q 1125 R 1126 S 1127 Undefined 7013 ENTER Chapter 9 Keyboard Wedge Interface Introduction This chapter provides instructions for programming the cradle for keyboard wedge host interface used to connect the cradle between the keyboard and host computer The digital scanner translates the bar code data into keystrokes and transmits the information to the host computer via the cradle interface The host computer accepts the keystrokes as if they originated from the keyboard This interface adds bar code reading functionality to a system designed for manual keyboard input In this mode the keyboard keystrokes are simply passed through Throughout the programming bar code menus default values are indicated with asterisks wi Indicates Default North American Feature Option 9 2 DS6878 Produ
90. bat ean 17 4 17 5 17 6 EAN zero extend 00 eee 15 21 EAN 13 JAN 13 2 2 e eee eee 15 10 EAN 8 JAN 8 15 9 flush macro buffer abort macro PDF entry 15 88 ENT substitution values 5 50 fuzzy 1D processing 5 32 GS1 catabar limited 15 68 GS1 DataBar 000 cee eee 15 68 GS1 databar expanded 15 69 GS1 databar 14 00 0005 15 68 GS1 128 are ge ie Re Ve eae Dad ood 15 28 hand held decode aiming pattern 5 34 2 of 5 check digit verification 15 46 2 of 5 convert to EAN 13 15 47 2 of 5 transmit check digit 15 46 IBM 468X 469X convert unknown to code 39 10 5 convert unkown to code 39 10 5 ignore bar code configuration 10 6 ignore been 10 5 port address 10 4 illumination 5 36 6 5 image brightness target white 6 11 image cropping 6 8 image enhancement 6 13 image file format 005 6 14 6 18 image resolution 6 10 image rotation 6 15 interleaved 20f5 0 eee ee eee 15 44 convert to EAN 13 04 15 47 lengths Ae dE Ee EE EES 15 44 inverse TD EE Eeer Pens geass 15 60 ISBT 128 EE 15 28 ISBT concatenation 15 29 15 30 ISBT concatenation redundancy 15 30 ISSNIEAN at EEN ee dea eed 15 25 Japan postal 15 63 JPEG image options
91. change the selection scan Cancel on page D 3 e Any Length Scan this option to decode Codabar symbols containing any number of characters within the digital scanner s capability Symbologies 15 51 Set Lengths for Codabar continued Codabar One Discrete Length Codabar Two Discrete Lengths Codabar Length Within Range Codabar Any Length 15 52 DS6878 Product Reference Guide CLSI Editing Enable this parameter to strip the start and stop characters and insert a space after the first fifth and tenth characters of a 14 character Codabar symbol Enable this feature if the host system requires this data format J NOTE Symbol length does not include start and stop characters Enable CLSI Editing 01h Disable CLSI Editing 00h NOTIS Editing Enable this parameter to strip the start and stop characters from a decoded Codabar symbol Enable this feature if the host system requires this data format Enable NOTIS Editing 01h Disable NOTIS Editing 00h Symbologies 15 53 MSI Enable Disable MSI To enable or disable MSI scan the appropriate bar code below Enable MSI 01h Disable MSI 00h Set Lengths for MSI The length of a cod
92. character preceding a Code 39 character and assigns an ASCII character value to the pair For example when Code 39 Full ASCII is enabled and a B is scanned it is interpreted as b J as and V as Scanning ABC l outputs the keystroke equivalent of ABC gt Table 9 2 Keyboard Wedge ASCII Character Set Full ASCII ASCII Value Code 39 Encode Character EE 1001 A CTRL A 1002 B CTRLB 1003 C CTRL C 1004 D CTRL D 1005 E CTRLE 1006 F CTRL F 1007 G CTRL G 1008 H CTRL H BACKSPACE 1009 l CTRL I HORIZONTAL TAB 1010 J CTRL J 1011 K CTRL K 1012 L CTRLL 1013 M CTRL M ENTER 1014 N CTRL N 1015 SO CTRL O 1016 P CTRL P 1017 Q CTRLQ 1018 R CTRL R 1019 S CTRLS 1020 T CTRL T 1021 U CTRL U The keystroke in bold is sent only if the Function Key Mapping is enabled Otherwise the unbolded keystroke is sent Keyboard Wedge Interface 9 15 Table 9 2 Keyboard Wedge ASCII Character Set Continued Full ASCII ee Code 39 Encode Character E 1022 V CTRL V 1023 w CTRL W 1024 X CTRL X 1025 Y CTRL Y 1026 Z CTRL Z 1027 A CTRL ESC 1028 B CTRL 1029 C CTRL 1030 D CTRL 6 1031 E CTRL 1032 Space Space 1033 A 1034 B R 1035 IC 1036 D 1037 E 1038 IF amp 1039 IG i 1040 H 1041 WI 1042 Al i 1043 IK 1044 L y 1045 S 10
93. code below Enable Maxicode 01h Disable Maxicode 00h OR Code To enable or disable QR Code scan the appropriate bar code below Enable QR Code 01h Disable QR Code 00h 15 82 DS6878 Product Reference Guide OR Inverse This parameter sets the QR inverse decoder setting Options are Regular Only the digital scanner decodes regular QR bar codes only e Inverse Only the digital scanner decodes inverse QR bar codes only e Inverse Autodetect the digital scanner decodes both regular and inverse QR bar codes Regular 00h Inverse Only 01h Inverse Autodetect 02h MicroQR To enable or disable MicroQR scan the appropriate bar code below Enable MicroQR 01h Disable MicroQR 00h Symbologies 15 83 Aztec To enable or disable Aztec scan the appropriate bar code below Enable Aztec 01h Disable Aztec 00h Aztec Inverse This parameter sets the Aztec inverse decoder setting Options are e Regular Only the digital scanner decodes regular Aztec bar codes only e Inverse Only the digital scanner decodes inverse Aztec bar codes only e Inverse Autodetect the digital scanner decodes both regular and inverse Aztec bar codes Regular 00h Inverse Only 01h Inverse Autodetect 02h 15 84 DS6878 Pr
94. configured as follows Third Rule Second Rule First Rule When you scan data the rules list is checked from top to bottom to determine if the criteria matches and therefore if the actions occur Input is modified into the data format specified by the first matching set of criteria it finds Be sure to program the most general rule first For example if the THIRD rule states When scanning a bar code of any length send all data then send the ENTER key And the SECOND tule states When scanning a Code 128 bar code of length 12 send the first four characters then send the ENTER key then send all remaining data and you scan a Code 128 bar code of length 12 the THIRD rule applies and the SECOND rule appears to not function Advanced Data Formatting 16 5 Note that using the standard data editing functions also creates ADF rules Scan options are entered as ADF rules and the hierarchy mentioned above also applies to them For the digital scanner this applies to prefix suffix programming in the parameter Scan Data Transmission Format on page 5 49 These rules reside in the same rule list as ADF Rules so the order you create them is also important Default Rules Every unit has a default rule to send all scan data Units with custom software may have one or more default rules burned in The rules hierarchy checks user programmable rules first then the default rules Disable default rules by entering the following gener
95. destination code into their own Code 128 bar codes The distribution center also has products that carry UPC bar codes placed there by the manufacturer The Code 128 bar codes have the following format MMMMMPPPPPDD Where M Manufacturer ID P Part Number D Destination Code The distribution center uses a PC with dedicated control characters for manufacturer ID lt CTRL M gt part number lt CTRL P gt and destination code lt CTRL D gt At this center the UPC data is treated as manufacturer ID code The following rules need to be entered When scanning data of code type Code 128 send the next 5 characters send the manufacturer ID key lt CTRL M gt send the next 5 characters send the part number key lt CTRL P gt send the next 2 characters send the destination code key lt CTRL D gt When scanning data of code type UPC EAN send all data send the manufacturer ID key lt CTRL M gt To enter these rules see the following steps Advanced Data Formatting 16 3 Rule 1 The Code 128 Scanning Rule Step Bar Code On Page Beep Indication 1 Begin New Rule 16 8 High High 2 Code 128 16 11 High High 3 Send next 5 characters 16 26 High High 4 Send lt CTRL M gt 16 48 High High 5 Send next 5 characters 16 26 High High 6 Send lt CTRL P gt 16 48 High High 7 Send next 2 characters 16 25 High High 8 Send lt CTRL D gt 16 47 High High 9 Save Rule 16 8 High Low High Low Rule 2 The UPC Scanning Rule Step Bar Code O
96. device and aborts from Macro PDF mode Flush Macro PDF Buffer Abort Macro PDF Entry This clears all currently stored Macro PDF data in the buffer without transmission and aborts from Macro PDF mode Abort Macro PDF Entry Chapter 16 Advanced Data Formatting Introduction Advanced Data Formatting ADF is a means of customizing data before transmission to the host device Scan data can be edited to suit particular requirements To implement ADF scan a related series of bar codes which begin on page 16 8 which allows programming the digital scanner with Advanced Data Formatting ADF Rules Avoid using ADF formatting with bar codes containing more than 60 characters To add a prefix or suffix value for such bar codes use Prefix Suffix Values on page 5 48 Using ADF with longer bar codes transmits the bar code in segments of length 252 or less depending on the host selected and applies the rule to each segment Rules Criteria Linked to Actions ADF uses rules to customize data These rules perform detailed actions when the data meets certain criteria One rule may consist of single or multiple criteria applied to single or multiple actions For instance a data formatting rule could be Criteria When scan data is Code 39 length 12 and data at the start position is the string 129 Actions pad all se
97. digital scanner s illumination shuts off after a programmable time period after Idle Mode has expired See Time Delay to Presentation Sleep Mode on page 5 21 The digital scanner wakes when it is lifted or senses motion upon presentation of a bar code depending on ambient light conditions or upon a trigger pull e Low Power Mode The digital scanner enters a low power consumption mode after Sleep Mode has expired in which the LEDs turn off in order to conserve energy and prolong the life of the scanner See Low Power Mode In hand held mode this occurs immediately after the programmed Time Delay to Reduced Power Mode In presentation mode this occurs after idle mode and sleep mode The digital scanner wakes when it is lifted senses a trigger pull or when the host attempts to communicate J NOTE The digital scanner does not use Low Power Mode when connected to a USB or IBM host Time Delay to Time Delay to Time Delay to Presentation Presentation Low Power Idle Mode value Sleep Mode value Mode value Active Mode ldle Mode Sleep Mode _ Low Power Mode Note Time delays are cumulative Figure 5 1 Power Levels User Preferences amp Miscellaneous Digital Scanner Options 5 19 Time Delay to Presentation Idle Mode Parameter Eih 97h In Presentation Mode this parameter sets the time the digital scanner remains active before entering idle mode with dim illumination
98. eee dared Hae dd 15 88 flush buffer abort PDF entry 15 88 maintenance 3 1 Detten Ae ere SE es ad esas Ree 3 4 digital scanner 3 1 MAS EF EELER 3 5 4 4 4 6 DEENEN 4 14 4 19 matrix 2 of 5barcodes 00006 15 57 IONQINS erse ee eee ede eee eden eee cee teed 15 58 transmit check digit 15 59 maxicode bar codes 0 e eee eee 15 81 microPDF417 barcodes 000 5 15 77 mounting el EE 1 11 MSI bar codes check digit algorithm 15 56 check digits 15 55 Ee LEE 15 53 OUER 15 53 transmit check digit 15 55 multipoint to point communication 4 18 N notational conventions 00 200005 xxi 0 OCR default parameters 14 2 parameters 14 3 out of range indicator eee 4 17 P pairing address 4 14 barcode sab 2 taw NEE e 1 4 2 2 4 3 bar code format 4 22 charging cradle 1 7 connection maintenance interval 4 23 cradle host E meemin da a E EEN d Nk A 4 4 lock override 4 20 lost connection to host 1 11 NEIER 3 5 master slave setup 4 6 methods 000 cece eee eee 4 21 MODES EE 4 2 4 19 mulitpoint to point 4 18 aleet CS 4 2 pin codes 200 e eee eee 4 27 point to point 0 0 eee eee 4 18 radio communication 0 1 20 SPP EE 4 4 troubleshooting 3 6 UMPAN eer cid owed ee eee Ree Ae eS 4 21 pairing beeper definitions
99. every 5 seconds while a reconnection attempt is in progress See Auto reconnect Feature on page 4 14 High low high low beeps Pairing bar code scanned Low high beeps Bluetooth connection established High low beeps Bluetooth disconnection event Note When connected to a remote device using SPP or HID if a disconnect beep sequence sounds immediately after a bar code is scanned check the host device for receipt of transmitted data It is possible that an attempt was made to transmit the last bar code scanned after the connection was lost Long low long high beeps Page timeout remote device is out of range not powered See Auto reconnect Feature on page 4 14 Long low long high long low long high beeps Connection attempt was rejected by remote device Note In the case of Pairing Methods on page 4 21 the cradle may already be connected to another digital scanner in single Point to Point locked mode or the piconet may be full in Multipoint to Point mode If Pair On Contacts is enabled and the digital scanner that is inserted is already connected to the cradle no beeping occurs 4 4 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Radio Communications Host Types To set up the digital scanner for communication with a cradle or to use standard Bluetooth profiles scan the appropriate host type bar code below v Cradle Host default Select this host type for digital scanner s to cradle operation The
100. lt PREFIX gt lt DATA gt lt SUFFIX 2 gt 06h lt PREFIX gt lt DATA gt lt SUFFIX 1 gt lt SUFFIX 2 gt 07h FN1 Substitution Values Key Category Parameter 67h Decimal Value Parameter 6Dh The Wedge and USB HID Keyboard hosts support a FN1 Substitution feature Enabling this substitutes any FN1 character 0x1b in an EAN128 bar code with a value This value defaults to 7013 Enter Key When using host commands to set the FN1 substitution value set the key category parameter to 1 then set the 3 digit keystroke value See the ASCII Character Set table for the current host interface for the desired value To select a FN1 substitution value via bar code menus Set FN1 Substitution Value 2 Locate the keystroke desired for FN1 Substitution in the ASCII Character Set table for the current host interface Enter the 4 digit ASCII Value by scanning each digit in Appendix D Numeric Bar Codes 1 Scan the bar code below To correct an error or change the selection scan Cancel To enable FN1 substitution for USB HID keyboard scan the Enable FN1 Substitution bar code on page 5 50 User Preferences amp Miscellaneous Digital Scanner Options 5 51 Transmit No Read Message Scan a bar code below to select whether or not to transmit a No Read message Enable this
101. mode Disable Mobile Phone Display Mode 00h Enable in Hand Held Mode 01h Enable in Hands Free Mode 02h Enable in Both Modes 03h 5 26 DS6878 Product Reference Guide FIPS Mode Parameter F1h EOh The Federal Information Processing Standard FIPS 140 2 is a U S government computer security standard used to accredit cryptographic modules FIPS enabled DS6878 scanners and cradles offer this secure mode of operation J NOTE The CROO78 P cradle is required for FIPS mode To enable the FIPS mode of operation enabled by default scan the Enable FIPS bar code The scanner will attempt to establish a secure session with the cradle to which it is connected On success the scanner will light a yellow LED on every trigger pull to signal that all data will be transmitted over Bluetooth in a secure fashion On failure the scanner will sound transmission failure error message on every attempt to transmit data To disable the FIPS mode scan the Disable FIPS bar code at any time Enable FIPS 01h Disable FIPS 00h User Preferences amp Miscellaneous Digital Scanner Options 5 27 PDF Prioritization Enable this feature to delay decoding a
102. no lint left by the cotton tipped applicator Remove lint if found If grease and other dirt are found on other areas of the cradle use a lint free cloth and isopropyl alcohol to remove Allow at least 10 to 30 minutes depending on ambient temperature and humidity for the isopropyl alcohol to air dry before applying power to cradle NOTE f the temperature is low and humidity is high longer drying time is required Warm temperature and dry humidity requires less drying time Battery Information 3 4 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Rechargeable battery packs are designed and constructed to the highest standards within the industry However there are limitations to how long a battery can operate or be stored before needing replacement Many factors affect the life of a battery pack such as heat cold customer usage profiles age and severe drops When batteries are stored over a year battery cell manufacturers advise that some irreversible deterioration in overall battery quality may occur To minimize this loss they recommend storing batteries half charged in a dry cool place between 41 F and 77 F 5 C and 25 C the cooler the better and removed from the equipment to prevent the loss of capacity Batteries should be charged to half capacity at least once a year If an electrolyte leakage is observed avoid any contact with the affected area and properly dispose of the battery Replace the battery when a significant loss of run
103. other end of the IBM 46XX interface cable to the appropriate port on the host typically Port 9 3 Select the port address by scanning the appropriate bar code from Port Address on page 10 4 4 To modify any other parameter options scan the appropriate bar codes in this chapter J NOTE Interface cables vary depending on configuration The connectors illustrated in Figure 10 1 are examples only The connectors may be different than those illustrated but the steps to connect the cradle remain the same If a power supply is used disconnect the power supply before changing host cables or the cradle may not recognize the new host The only required configuration is the port number Other digital scanner parameters are typically controlled by the IBM system IBM Interface 10 3 IBM Parameter Defaults Table 10 1 lists the defaults for IBM host parameters To change any option scan the appropriate bar code s provided in the Parameter Descriptions section beginning on page 10 4 J NOTE See Appendix A Standard Default Parameters for all user preferences hosts symbologies and miscellaneous default parameters Table 10 1 BM Host Default Table Page Number Parameter Default IBM 468X 469X Host Parameters Port Address None Selected 10 4 Convert Unknown to Code 39 Disable 10 5 Ignore Beep Disable 10 5 Ignore Bar Code Configuration Disable 10 6 10 4 DS6878 Product Reference Guide IBM 468X 469X Host
104. supplemental The digital scanner transmits UPC EAN bar codes that do not have that prefix immediately e Enable 378 379 Supplemental Mode e Enable 978 979 Supplemental Mode J NOTE lf you select 978 979 Supplemental Mode and are scanning Bookland EAN bar codes see Enable Disable Bookland EAN on page 15 10 to enable Bookland EAN and select a format using Bookland ISBN Format on page 15 22 es Enable 977 Supplemental Mode es Enable 414 419 434 439 Supplemental Mode es Enable 491 Supplemental Mode es Enable Smart Supplemental Mode applies to EAN 13 bar codes starting with any prefix listed previously e Supplemental User Programmable Type 1 applies to EAN 13 bar codes starting with a 3 digit user defined prefix Set this 3 digit prefix using User Programmable Supplementals on page 15 14 e Supplemental User Programmable Type 1 and 2 applies to EAN 13 bar codes starting with either of two 3 digit user defined prefixes Set the 3 digit prefixes using User Programmable Supplementals on page 15 14 e Smart Supplemental Plus User Programmable 1 applies to EAN 13 bar codes starting with any prefix listed previously or the user defined prefix set using User Programmable Supplementals on page 15 14 e Smart Supplemental Plus User Programmable 1 and 2 applies to EAN 13 bar codes starting with any prefix listed previously or one of the two user defined prefixes set using User Programmable Supplementals on page 15 14 J NOTE To minimize th
105. to 30 Minutes Set Interval to 60 Minutes Set Interval to 2 Hours Set Interval to 4 Hours Set Interval to 8 Hours Set Interval to 24 Hours Set Interval to Forever Radio Communications 4 25 Page Button The CR0078 P cradle offers a page button see CR0078 P Series Cradle on page 1 6 The page button is a sensor that when touched causes paired scanners to emit a beeping sequence The default is Disable Page Button 1 Place your finger over the button sensor AT 2 Press down for approximately 1 second 3 The cradle LED will turn blue when the scanner is out of the cradle The paired scanner will beep five times If multiple scanners are paired to the cradle all the scanners will beep five times 4 Repeat as necessary J NOTE Scanners out of radio range will not beep when paged Refer to Technical Specifications on page 3 9 for detailed radio range information Scan one of the following bar codes to enable or disable this feature Disable Page Button Enable Page Button 4 26 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Bluetooth Security The digital scanner supports Bluetooth Authentication and Encryption Authentication can be requested by either the remote device or the digital scanner When Authentication is requested the digital scanner uses its programmed PIN code to generate a link key Once Authentication is complete either device may then negotiate to enable Encryption J NOTE A remote device can still request
106. to Code 39 This option applies only to the IBM Handheld IBM Tabletop and OPOS devices Scan a bar code below to enable or disable converting unknown bar code type data to Code 39 Disable Convert Unknown to Code 39 Enable Convert Unknown to Code 39 7 12 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Emulate Keypad When enabled all characters are sent as ASCII sequences over the numeric keypad For example ASCII A would be sent as ALT make 0 6 5 ALT Break Disable Keypad Emulation Enable Keypad Emulation Emulate Keypad with Leading Zero Enable this to send character sequences sent over the numeric keypad as ISO characters which have a leading zero For example ASCII A transmits as ALT MAKE 0 0 6 5 ALT BREAK Disable Keypad Emulation with Leading Zero Enable Keypad Emulation with Leading Zero USB Interface 7 13 Quick Keypad Emulation This option applies only to the HID Keyboard Emulation Device and if Emulate Keypad is enabled This parameter enables a quicker method of keypad emulation where ASCII sequences are o
107. to Point communication mode the cradle allows one digital scanner to connect to it at a time In this mode the digital scanner is paired to the cradle either by insertion into the cradle if pairing on contacts is enabled page 4 21 or by scanning the PAIR bar code Communication can be locked unlocked default or in a lock override state see Pairing Modes on page 4 20 In locked mode locking intervals must be set by scanning a connection maintenance interval bar code beginning on page 4 23 To activate this mode of operation scan Point to Point Multipoint to Point Communication Multipoint to Point communication mode allows up to three digital scanners to pair to one cradle for the CRO078 S and up to seven digital scanners for the CR0078 P To activate this mode the first digital scanner connected to the cradle must scan the Multipoint to Point bar code This mode allows a parameter broadcast page 4 19 feature that forwards parameter bar code settings to all connected digital scanners In this mode programming one digital scanner applies the settings to all connected digital scanners To select Point to Point or Multipoint to Point mode scan the appropriate bar code Multipoint to Point Mode Point to Point Mode Radio Communications 4 19 Parameter Broadcast Cradle Host Only When in multipoint to point mode enable Parameter Broadcast to broadcast all parameter bar codes scanned to all other digital scanners in the
108. 005 E CTRL E 1006 F CTRL F 1007 G CTRL G 1008 H CTRL H BACKSPACE 1009 I CTRL HORIZONTAL TAB 1010 J CTRL J 1011 K CTRL K 1012 L CTRLL 1013 M CTRL M ENTER 1014 N CTRL N 1015 O CTRL O The keystroke in bold is sent only if the Function Key Mapping is enabled Otherwise the unbolded keystroke is sent F 2 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Table F 1 ASCII Value Standard Default Parameters Table Continued Full ASCII ee Code 39 Encode Character one 1016 P CTRL P 1017 Q CTRLQ 1018 R CTRL R 1019 S CTRLS 1020 T CTRLT 1021 U CTRL U 1022 V CTRL V 1023 w CTRL W 1024 X CTRL X 1025 Y CTRL Y 1026 Z CTRL Z 1027 A CTRL 1028 B CTRL 1029 C CTRL 1030 D CTRL6 1031 E CTRL 1032 Space Space 1033 A 1034 B i 1035 JC 1036 D 1037 E 1038 IF amp 1039 IG 1040 H 1041 WI 1042 Al iJ 1043 IK The keystroke in bold is sent only if the Function Key Mapping is enabled Otherwise the unbolded keystroke is sent ASCII Character Sets F 3 Table F 1 ASCII Value Standard Default Parameters Table Continued GE Code 39 EE ee 1044 L j 1045 1046 1047 Jo 1048 0 0 1049 1 1 1050 2 2 1051 3 3 1052 4 4 1053 5 5 1054 6 6 1055 7 7 1056 8 8 1057 9 9 1058 IZ 1059 F 1060 G lt 1061 H
109. 1 7 bar codes RS 232 software handshaking 8 14 batch mode stored data 5 11 battery Charging 4 2deecee EE e ete ierg EELER 1 16 inserting removing 0000 eee eee 1 12 reconditioning 1 17 shutting oft 1 16 battery reconditioning barcode 1 16 1 17 beeper definitions paining feces he eke te eee teh ede ete des 4 3 Standard erekere ecb ered sere eerie esa 2 1 WINGIOSS cea a ANNE EEN EE EE E SE 4 3 Bluetoothi EE 1 7 1 20 Bluetooth disconnect event 2 2 3 5 4 3 bluetooth keyboard emulation 4 4 Bluetooth security 4 26 l xxi C cables installing 1 8 1 10 character set 050 7 20 8 20 9 14 F 1 CHANGING EECH 1 16 Ee aer AE age bated ant 1 16 via USB o kpanic ed Soe ohn d Ee BARE RA 1 9 charging LED age ge ac Ee Ser cea Gea 2 3 codabar bar codes CLSI editing 15 52 c dabar 25 ciate ka daea Bien vs Pee eee aeih 15 50 Ee LEE 15 50 NOTIS editing 15 52 code 11 bar codes ee Will errara eaei Os oh ES aed a N 15 40 lengis erorri Enni es iene nu e 15 40 code 128 bar codes code 128 WEE 15 26 GSF E EE 15 28 ISBT 128 ncc2 ede i cua en eae Sowa nko dea eas 15 28 ISBT concatenation 15 29 15 30 ISBT concatenation redundancy 15 30 lengis 242 ee ee A 15 26 code 128 emulation barcodes 15 78 code 39 bar codes buffering 15 35 15 36 check digit verification 15 34 code gI EE 15
110. 1 followed by 4 To correct an error or to change the selection scan Cancel on page D 3 e Two Discrete Lengths Select this option to decode only 2 of 5 symbols containing either of two selected lengths Select lengths using the numeric bar codes in Appendix D Numeric Bar Codes For example to decode only 2 of 5 symbols containing either 2 or 14 characters select 2 of 5 Two Discrete Lengths then scan 0 2 1 and then 4 To correct an error or to change the selection scan Cancel on page D 3 e Length Within Range Select this option to decode an 2 of 5 symbol with a specific length range Select lengths using numeric bar codes in Appendix D Numeric Bar Codes For example to decode 2 of 5 symbols containing between 4 and 12 characters first scan 2 of 5 Length Within Range Then scan 0 4 1 and 2 enter a leading zero for single digit numbers To correct an error or change the selection scan Cancel on page D 3 e Any Length Scan this option to decode 2 of 5 symbols containing any number of characters within the digital scanner s capability V NOTE Due to the construction of the 2 of 5 symbology it is possible for a scan line covering only a portion of the code to transmit as a complete scan yielding less data than is encoded in the bar code To prevent this select specific lengths I 2 of 5 One Discrete Length Two Discrete Lengths for 2 of 5 applications Symbologies 15 45 Set Lengths for Interleav
111. 10 J CTRLJ 1011 K CTRL K 1012 L CTRL L 1013 M CTRL M ENTER 1014 N CTRL N 1015 O CTRL O 1016 P CTRL P 1017 Q CTRL Q 1018 R CTRL R 1019 S CTRL S 1020 T CTRL T 1021 U CTRL U 1022 V CTRL V 1023 W CTRL W 1024 X CTRL X 1The keystroke in bold is sent only if the Function Key Mapping is enabled Otherwise the unbolded keystroke is sent USB Interface 7 21 Table 7 2 ASCII Character Set for USB Continued Full ASCII ASCII Value Code 39 Encode Keystroke Character 1025 Y CTRL Y 1026 Z CTRL Z 1027 A CTRL ESC 1028 B CTRL 1029 C CTRL 1030 D CTRL6 1031 E CTRL 1032 Space Space 1033 A 1034 B 1035 JC 1036 D 1037 E 1038 IF amp 1039 IG 1040 H 1041 WI 1042 Al 7 1043 IK 1044 L 1045 1046 1047 JO 1048 0 0 1049 1 1 1050 2 2 1051 3 3 1052 4 4 The keystroke in bold is sent only if the Function Key Mapping is enabled Otherwise the unbolded keystroke is sent 7 22 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Table 7 2 ASCII Character Set for USB Continued Full ASCII ASCII Value Code 39 Encode Keystroke Character 1053 1054 1056 5 6 1055 7 8 9 o NI ol wo 1057 1058 IZ 1059 F 1060 G lt 1061 3s I 1i 1062 l Vv 1063 J 1064 V 1065 A 106
112. 13 Convert Case No Case Conversion 4 13 Beep on Reconnect Attempt Disable 4 15 Reconnect Attempt Interval 30 sec 4 16 Auto reconnect in Bluetooth Keyboard On Bar Code Data 4 17 Emulation HID Slave Mode Modes of Operation Point to Point 4 18 Point to Point Multipoint to Point Parameter Broadcast Cradle Host Only Enable 4 19 Pairing Modes Unlocked 4 20 Pairing on Contacts Enable 4 21 Connection Maintenance Interval 15 min 4 23 Authentication Disable 4 26 Variable Pin Code Static 4 27 Encryption Disable 4 28 Radio Communications 4 3 Wireless Beeper Definitions When the digital scanner scans the pairing bar code it issues various beep sequences indicating successful or unsuccessful operations Table 4 2 defines beep sequences that occur during pairing operations For additional beeper definitions see Beeper Definitions on page 2 1 Table 4 2 Wireless Beeper Definitions Beeper Sequence Indication Four long low beeps 1 A transmission error was detected in a scanned symbol The data is ignored This occurs if a unit is not properly configured Check option setting 2 When communicating with a cradle the cradle acknowledges receipt of data If the acknowledgment is not received this transmission error beep sequence sounds Data may still have been received by the host Check the host system for receipt of transmitted data If data was not received by the host re scan the bar code Five high beeps Emitted
113. 16 Advanced Data Formatting OCR Check Digit Multiplier OCR Programming 14 27 OCR Check Digit Validation Parameter F1h B6h Use OCR Check Digit Validation to protect against scanning errors by applying a check digit validation scheme The following is a list of options None No check digit validation indicating no check digit is applied This is the default No Check Digit 00h Product Add Left to Right Each character in the scanned data is assigned a numeric value see OCR Check Digit Multiplier on page 14 26 Each digit representing a character in the scanned data is multiplied by its corresponding digit in the multiplier and the sum of these products is computed The check digit passes if this sum modulo Check Digit Modulus is zero Example Scanned data numeric value is 132456 check digit is 6 Check digit multiplier string is 123456 Digit 1 3 2 4 5 6 Multiplier 1 2 3 4 5 6 Product 1 6 6 16 25 36 Product add 1 6 6 16 25 36 90 The Check Digit Modulus is 10 It passes because 90 is divisible by 10 the remainder is zero Product Add Left to Right 03h 14 28 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Product Add Right to Left Each character in the scanned data is assigned a numeric value see OCR Check Digit Multiplier on page 14 26 The check digit multiplier is reve
114. 46 1047 JO 1048 0 0 1049 1 1 1The keystroke in bold is sent only if the Function Key Mapping is enabled Otherwise the unbolded keystroke is sent 9 16 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Table 9 2 Keyboard Wedge ASCII Character Set Continued ve Code 39 A E 1050 2 2 1051 3 3 1052 4 4 1053 5 5 1054 6 6 1055 7 7 1056 8 8 1057 9 9 1058 IZ 1059 F 1060 G lt 1061 H 1062 l gt 1063 J 1064 V 1065 A A 1066 B B 1067 C C 1068 D D 1069 E E 1070 F F 1071 G G 1072 H H 1073 l 1074 J J 1075 K K 1076 L L 1077 M M 1The keystroke in bold is sent only if the Function Key Mapping is enabled Otherwise the unbolded keystroke is sent Keyboard Wedge Interface 9 17 Table 9 2 Keyboard Wedge ASCII Character Set Continued Full ASCII ve Code 39 Encode Character A 1078 N N 1079 O O 1080 P P 1081 Q Q 1082 R R 1083 S S 1084 T T 1085 U U 1086 V V 1087 W W 1088 X X 1089 Y Y 1090 Z Z 1091 K 1092 L 1093 M 1094 N d 1095 0 1096 W i 1097 A a 1098 B b 1099 C c 1100 D d 1101 E e 1102 F f 1103 G g 1104 H h 1105 l i The keystroke in bold is sent only if the Function Key Mapping is enabled Otherwise the unbolded keystroke is sent 9 18 DS6878 Product Reference Guide
115. 5 17 Time Delay to Presentation Idle Mode Fih 97h 1 Minute 5 19 Time Delay to Presentation Sleep Mode Fih 96h 1 Hour 5 21 Timeout to Low Power Mode from Auto Aim F1h D9h 15 Sec 5 23 Picklist Mode FOh 92h Disabled Always 5 24 Mobile Phone Display Mode Fih CCh Disable 5 25 FIPS Security Fih EOh Enabled 5 26 PDF Prioritization Fih CFh Disable 5 27 PDF Prioritization Timeout Eih DOh 200 ms 5 28 Continuous Bar Code Read F1 89h Disable 5 29 Unique Bar Code Reporting Fih D3h Disable 5 29 Decode Session Timeout 88h 9 9 Sec 5 30 Timeout Between Decodes Same Symbol 89h 0 5 Sec 5 31 Timeout Between Decodes Different Symbols 90h 0 2 Sec 5 31 Fuzzy 1D Processing F1h 02h Enable 5 32 Hand Held Decode Aiming Pattern FOh 32h Enable 5 33 Hands Free Decode Aiming Pattern Fih 4Eh Enable 5 34 Presentation Mode Field of View Fih 61h Full 5 35 Decoding Illumination FOh 2Ah Enable 5 36 Multicode Mode Fih A5h Disable 5 36 Multicode Expression Fih 95h 1 5 37 Multicode Mode Concatenation Fih CDh Disable 5 43 Multicode Concatenation Symbology Fih D2h Concatenate as PDF417 5 44 Miscellaneous Options Transmit Code ID Character 2Dh None 5 47 Prefix Value 63h 69h 7013 lt CR gt lt LF gt 5 48 Suffix 1 Value 62h 68h 7013 lt CR gt lt LF gt 5 48 Suffix 2 Value 64h 6Ah 5 4 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Parameter Page Parameter Number Default Number Scan Data Transmission Format EBh Data as is 5 49 FN1 Substitution Values 67h 6Dh Set
116. 5 55 MSI Check Digit Algorithm BEE 15 56 Ghinese Seeerei 15 56 Enable Disable Chinese 2 of 5 eege ERSEENENEEC Seege 15 56 Matrix 2 Of EE 15 57 Enable Disable Matrix 2 of 5 e euege genee EE EE ee nnee nnn 15 57 Set Lengths for Matrix E 15 58 Transmit Matrix 2 of 5 Check Digit scicsicchsssscnctaessncdekacactantainidebsaiiw landetibieimeeneeamaw 15 59 Korean EE 15 59 Enable Disable Korean 3 of 5 s sssssenesssrrnseerrnrrrrrrrrsrtrrssrrrnnertrnnrrrnentstnnreserer neern nne 15 59 Inverse VR EE 15 60 Postal OSS ege EE 15 61 ME ae 15 61 US Planet cae ne aca Ee eebg 15 61 Transmit US Postal Check de EE 15 62 UK slo to ca eee een rn eee eres eee Cee ner eee ce ere ee ect er eee eee ree 15 62 Transmit UK Postal Check Digit sisctisssccdussadecitiedsseccrinnasinidalsedtendusesidecenssiel anaemia 15 63 SVAN FF OSTA ME 15 63 Australian Postal E 15 64 Er EE 15 65 Netherlands KIX Code sisri aeneae eRe R ERE Ea EEA minded 15 66 USPS 4CB One Code Intelligent Mail AE 15 66 Table of Contents XV UPU FICS Postal irissen aR REEE EE 15 67 EAR 15 68 E DUAN EE 15 68 GS1 D taBa r EE 15 68 GS1 DataBar Expanded RE 15 69 GS1 DataBar Limited Security Level EE 15 70 Convert GS1 DataBar to UPC EAN sssEEESRRESEEEEREEEEEESNEEESEEEERSREEEESEEEEEEEEEESESEEER 15 71 Composite geg 15 72 Composite acess sees eege 15 72 COMPOSE CC A B EE 15 72 Composite AE iegerebeedeereeeseeeegerg aaia a iaaa TE EE a naaa 15 73 UPC Composite E 15 74 Composite Beep Mode de zess
117. 5 76 MicroPDF417 Disable 15 77 Code 128 Emulation Disable 15 78 Data Matrix Enable 15 79 Data Matrix Inverse 15 80 Non Healthcare Configurations Regular Healthcare Configurations Inverse Autodetect Maxicode Disable 15 81 QR Code Enable 15 81 QR Inverse Regular 15 82 MicroQR Enable 15 82 Aztec Enable 15 83 Aztec Inverse Regular 15 83 Symbology Specific Security Levels Redundancy Level 1 15 84 Security Level 0 15 86 Intercharacter Gap Size Normal 15 87 Report Version Report Software Version 15 87 Macro PDF Flush Macro PDF Buffer None 15 88 Abort Macro PDF Entry None 15 88 1User selection is required to configure this interface and this is the most common selection Appendix B Programming Reference Symbol Code Identifiers Table B 1 Symbol Code Characters Code Character Code Type UPC A UPC E UPC E1 EAN 8 EAN 13 Code 39 Code 32 Codabar Code 128 ISBT 128 ISBT 128 Concatenated Code 93 Interleaved 2 of 5 Discrete 2 of 5 or Discrete 2 of 5 IATA Code 11 MSI GS1 128 Bookland EAN Trioptic Code 39 Coupon Code GS1 DataBar Family Matrix 2 of 5 UCC Composite TLC 39 Cl al nm D Z Si ry A SC oc ool Tym oO oi DY gt Chinese 2 of 5 B 2 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Table Bi Symbol Code Characters Continued Code Character Code Type V Korean 3 of 5 X ISSN EAN PDF417
118. 5 GUI U 3086 GUI V 3087 GUI W 3088 GUI X 3089 GUI Y 3090 GUI Z Note GUI Shift Keys The Apple iMac keyboard has an apple key on either side of the space bar Windows based systems have a GUI key to the left of the left ALT key and to the right of the right ALT key Table 7 5 USB F Key Character Set F Keys Keystroke 5001 F1 5002 F2 5003 F3 5004 F4 5005 F5 5006 F6 5007 F7 5008 F8 5009 F9 5010 F10 5011 F11 5012 F12 5013 F13 5014 F14 5015 F15 7 28 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Table 7 5 USB F Key Character Set Continued F Keys Keystroke 5016 F16 5017 F17 5018 F18 5019 F19 5020 F20 5021 F21 5022 F22 5023 F23 5024 F24 Table 7 6 USB Numeric Keypad Character Set Numeric Keypad Keystroke 6042 i 6043 6044 undefined 6045 6046 6047 6048 0 6049 1 6050 2 6051 3 6052 4 6053 5 6054 6 6055 7 6056 8 6057 9 6058 Enter 6059 Num Lock USB Interface 7 29 Table 7 7 USB Extended Keypad Character Set Extended Keypad Keystroke 7001 Break 7002 Delete 7003 PgUp 7004 End 7005 Pg Dn 7006 Pause 7007 Scroll Lock 7008 Backspace 7009 Tab 7010 Print Screen 7011 Insert 7012 Home 7013 Enter 7014 Escape 7015 Up Arrow 7016 Down Arrow 7017 Left Arrow 7018 Right Arrow 7 30 DS
119. 6 1067 1068 1070 1071 r oi mi ml ol oi w Sle B C D 1069 E F G H 1072 1073 1074 1075 1076 1078 O z Z T K S J K L 1077 M N O 1079 1080 P P 1The keystroke in bold is sent only if the Function Key Mapping is enabled Otherwise the unbolded keystroke is sent USB Interface 7 23 Table 7 2 ASCII Character Set for USB Continued Full ASCII ASCII Value Code 39 Encode Keystroke Character 1081 Q Q 1082 R R 1083 S S 1084 T T 1085 U U 1086 V V 1087 W W 1088 X X 1089 Y Y 1090 Z Z 1091 K 1092 L 1093 M 1094 N A 1095 0 1096 W 1097 A a 1098 B b 1099 C c 1100 D d 1101 E e 1102 F f 1103 G g 1104 H 1105 l i 1106 J j 1107 K k 1108 L 1The keystroke in bold is sent only if the Function Key Mapping is enabled Otherwise the unbolded keystroke is sent 7 24 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Table 7 2 ASCII Character Set for USB Continued Full ASCII ASCII Value Code 39 Encode Keystroke Character 1109 M m 1110 N n 1111 O o 1112 P p 1113 Q q 1114 R r 1115 S s 1116 T t 1117 U u 1118 V v 1119 W w 1120 X x 1121 Y y 1122 Z H 1123 P 1124 Q 1125 R 1126 S 1The keystroke in bold is sent only i
120. 6 Advanced Data Formatting Enable Convert to Code 39 for Wand Host Disable Convert to Code 39 for Wand Host Wand Emulation Interface 11 9 Convert Code 39 to Full ASCII By default any characters that do not have a corresponding character in the Code 39 symbology set are replaced by a space If this parameter is enabled the data sent to the wand interface is encoded in Code 39 Full ASCII This setting requires that the host be able to interpret Code 39 Full ASCII data This setting applies only if Convert to Code 39 is also enabled Disable Code 39 Full ASCII Conversion Enable Code 39 Full ASCII Conversion 11 10 DS6878 Product Reference Guide This chapter provides instructions for programming the cradle to interface with a digital scanner emulation host With digital scanner emulation the cradle connects either to an external decoder or to a decoder integrated in a portable terminal or Point of Sale POS terminal Throughout the programming bar code menus default values are indicated with asterisks wi _ Parameter Process and Pass Through Feature Optign Indicates Default 12 2 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Connecting Using Scanner Emulation J NOTE See Chapter 4 Radio Communications for informa
121. 6878 Product Reference Guide Chapter 8 RS 232 Interface Introduction This chapter provides instructions for programming the cradle to interface with an RS 232 host interface The RS 232 interface is used to attach the scanner cradle to point of sale devices host computers or other devices with an available RS 232 port i e COM port If the particular host is not listed in Table 8 2 set the communication parameters to match the host device Refer to the documentation for the host device J NOTE This digital scanner uses TTL RS 232 signal levels which interface with most system architectures For system architectures requiring RS 232C signal levels Motorola offers different cables providing the TTL to RS 232C conversion Contact Motorola Solutions Support for more information Throughout the programming bar code menus default values are indicated with asterisks Cy Indicates Default_ Baud Rate 38 400 Feature Option 8 2 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Connecting an RS 232 Interface J See Chapter 4 Radio Communications for information about digital scanner cradle pairing and wireless communication The digital scanner must be connected to the cradle for the host parameter setting to take effect When the digital scanner is not connected to a cradle and a host parameter bar code is scanned a long low long high beep sequence sounds This connection is made directly from the cradle to the host computer
122. 7 6048 0 6049 1 6050 2 6051 3 6052 4 ASCII Character Sets F 11 Table F 7 Numeric Key Standard Default Table Continued Numeric Keypad Keystroke 6053 6054 6056 5 6 6055 7 8 9 6057 6058 Enter 6059 Num Lock Table F 8 Extended Keypad Standard Default Table Extended Keypad Keystroke 7001 Break 7002 Delete 7003 Pg Up 7004 End 7005 Pg Dn 7006 Pause 7007 Scroll Lock 7008 Backspace 7009 Tab 7010 Print Screen 7011 Insert 7012 Home 7013 Enter 7014 Escape 7015 Up Arrow 7016 Dn Arrow 7017 Left Arrow 7018 Right Arrow F 12 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Appendix G Signature Capture Code Introduction CapCode a signature capture code is a special pattern that encloses a signature area on a document and allows a scanner to capture a signature There are several accepted patterns that allow automatic identification of different signatures on the same form For example on the federal tax return 1040 form there are three signature areas one each for two joint filers and one for a professional preparer By using different patterns a program can correctly identify all three so they can be captured in any sequence and still be identified correctly Code Structure Signature Capture Area A CapCode is printed as two identical patterns on either side of a signature capture box as shown in Figure G 1
123. 78 Product Reference Guide Table A 1 Standard Default Parameters Table Continued Parameter Default Br Es lel Snapshot Aiming Pattern Enable 6 7 Image Cropping Disable 6 8 Crop to Pixel Addresses 0 top 6 9 0 left 479 bottom 751 right Image Size Number of Pixels Full 6 10 Image Brightness Target White 180 6 11 JPEG Options Quality 6 11 JPEG Target File Size 160 kB 6 12 JPEG Quality and Size Value 65 6 12 Image Enhancement Off 0 6 13 Image File Format Selection JPEG 6 14 Image Rotation 0 6 15 Bits per Pixel BPP 8 BPP 6 16 Signature Capture Disable 6 17 Signature Capture Image File Format Selection JPEG 6 18 Signature Capture Bits per Pixel BPP 8 BPP 6 19 Signature Capture Width 400 6 20 Signature Capture Height 100 6 20 Signature Capture JPEG Quality 65 6 20 USB Host Parameters USB Device Type HID Keyboard Emulation 7 5 Symbol Native API SNAPI Status Handshaking Enable 7 7 USB Country Keyboard Types Country Codes North American 7 8 USB Keystroke Delay No Delay 7 10 USB CAPS Lock Override Disable 7 10 USB Ignore Unknown Characters Send 7 11 USB Convert Unknown to Code 39 Disable 7 11 1User selection is required to configure this interface and this is the most common selection Table A 1 Standard Default Parameters Table Continued Standard Default Parameters
124. 78 Product Reference Guide Auto reconnect Feature When in SPP Master or Cradle Host mode the digital scanner automatically tries to reconnect to a remote device when a disconnection occurs that is due to the radio losing communication This can happen if the digital scanner goes out of range with the remote device or if the remote device powers down The digital scanner tries to reconnect for the period of time specified by the Reconnect Attempt Interval setting During that time the green LED continues to blink If the auto reconnect process fails due to page time outs the digital scanner sounds a page timeout beep long low long high and enters low power mode The auto reconnect process can be re started by pulling the digital scanner trigger If the auto reconnect process fails because the remote device rejects the connection attempt the digital scanner sounds a connection reject beep sequence see Wireless Beeper Definitions on page 4 3 and deletes the remote pairing address If this happens a pairing bar code must be scanned to attempt a new connection to the remote device J NOTE f a bar code is scanned while the auto reconnect sequence is in process a transmission error beep sequence sounds and the data is not transmitted to the host After a connection is reestablished normal scanning operation returns For error beep sequence definitions see Beeper Definitions on page 2 1 The digital scanner has memory available for storing a
125. 878 Product Reference Guide OCR Subset Parameter F1 AEN Set an OCR subset to define a custom group of characters in place of a preset font variant For example if scanning only numbers and the letters A B and C create a subset of just these characters to speed decoding This applies a designated OCR Subset across all enabled OCR fonts To set or modify the OCR font subset first enable the appropriate OCR font s Next scan the following bar code then scan numbers and letters to form the OCR Subset from the alphanumeric keyboard in Chapter 16 Advanced Data Formatting Then scan End of Message in Chapter 16 Advanced Data Formatting OCR Subset To cancel an OCR subset for OCR A or OCR B scan OCR A variant Full ASCII or OCR B variant Full ASCII For MICR E13B or US Currency Serial Number create a subset which includes all allowed characters in that character set or scan an option from the Default Parameters on page 5 5 and re program the digital scanner OCR Quiet Zone Parameter F1h B7h This option sets the OCR quiet zone The digital scanner stops scanning a field when it detects a sufficiently wide blank space The width of this space is defined by the End of Field option Used with parsers that tolerate slanted characters the End of Field count is roughly a count of 8 for a character width For example if set to 15 then two character widths are an end of line indicator for the parser Larger
126. 9 Beeper DAU EE 5 10 vili DS6878 Product Reference Guide Beep on INSORMION serisine aiaiai RARE a 5 10 Bath Mode sissisodan aaa aaa a E aai a aae RENE 5 11 Modes of Operation eebe EE 5 11 Hand Held Trigger Mode EE 5 13 Hands Free Mode E 5 14 Presentation Performance Mode cccceeeeeseseeceeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeneeeeeeeenseneeeeeneees 5 15 Low Power E 5 16 Time Delay to Reduced Power Mode kan 5 17 Digital Scanner Activity Modes AEN 5 18 Time Delay to Presentation Idle Mode ssssseeeseesinireeeeeerirrrrteeerrinnrrrssssrrrirrrssssrene 5 19 Time Delay to Presentation Sleep Mode ceeeeeeeceecceeeeeeeneeeeeeeneeeeeeneeeeeeeeaeeeeess 5 21 Time Delay to Presentation Sleep Mode continued 5 22 Timeout to Low Power Mode from Auto Am o eeeeeeeeeceeeeee eee eenneneeeeeeeeeeeneneeeeeeeees 5 23 Picklist Mode eege Eed 5 24 Mobile Phone Display Mode 2 0 0 cccccss cceccsesccneeseneesandeneedecsnsensesteneneanastecenesannte 5 25 FIRS Eet eege EEN 5 26 PDF EISE genre nnn er neon eege 5 27 PDF Gate e Ra TE 5 28 Continuous Bar Code Read eege 5 29 Unique Bar Code Reporting eseseedEtedebehEAk NEE SeeE EES NEESS 5 29 Decode Session WR TE 5 30 Timeout Between Decodes Same Symbol cccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeaeeeeeees 5 31 Timeout Between Decodes Different Symbols 5 31 Fuzzy 1D Processing NEE 5 32 Hand Held Decode Aiming Pattern cccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeenseeeeseseeneen
127. 9 gt BCEINPSXz e OCR B Travel Document Version 2 TD2 2 Line ID Cards 0123456789 lt ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ e OCR B Visa Type A 0123456789 lt ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ e OCR B Visa Type B 0123456789 lt ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZN To choose a variant scan one of the following bar codes Selecting the following OCR B variants automatically sets the appropriate OCR Lines on page 14 12 These five variants invoke extensive special algorithms and checking for that particular document type Variant OCR Lines Setting Passport 2 TD1 ID Cards 3 TD2 ID Cards 2 Visa Type A 2 Visa Type B 2 Selecting one of the ISBN Book Numbers automatically applies the appropriate ISBN checksum so you do not need to set this For the best performance in passport reading fix the target passport and the imaging engine in place 6 5 7 5 V NOTE Enable OCR B before setting this parameter If disabling OCR B set the variant to its default OCR B Full ASCII OCR Programming 14 7 OCR B Variant continued OCR B Full ASCII 00h OCR B Banking 01h OCR B Limited 02h OCR B Travel Document Version 1 TD1 3 Line ID Cards 03h OCR B Passport 04h 14 8 DS6878 Product Reference Guide O
128. Authentication Authentication To force Authentication with a remote device including the cradle scan the Enable Authentication bar code below To prevent the digital scanner from forcing Authentication scan the Disable Authentication bar code below Enable Authentication Disable Authentication Radio Communications 4 27 PIN Code To set the PIN code e g password on the digital scanner scan the bar code below followed by five alphanumeric programming bar codes see Appendix E Alphanumeric Bar Codes The default PIN code is 12345 If the digital scanner communicates with a cradle with security enabled synchronize the PIN codes on the digital scanner and cradle To achieve this connect the digital scanner to the cradle when setting the PIN codes If the digital scanner is not connected to a cradle the PIN code change only takes affect on the digital scanner If security is required between the digital scanner and cradle and the PIN codes do not match pairing fails If the PIN codes are not synchronized re synchronize them by disabling security establishing a connection to the cradle and then programming a new PIN code Set PIN Code Variable PIN Code The default PIN code is the user programmed Static PIN Code Typically however HID connections require entering a Variable PIN Code If when attempting connection the application presents a text box that includes a PIN scan the Variable PIN Code bar code then re
129. B or LNKB is the prefix XXXXXXXXXXXX represents the 12 character Bluetooth address Pairing Bar Code Example If the remote device to which the digital scanner can connect has a Bluetooth address of 11 22 33 44 55 66 then the pairing bar code is Paring Bar Code Content N WT B Bluetooth Address lt O 112233445566 Radio Communications 4 23 Connection Maintenance Interval J NOTE The Connection Maintenance Interval only applies in locked pairing mode see page 4 20 When a digital scanner disconnects from a cradle due to a Link Supervision Timeout the digital scanner immediately attempts to reconnect to the cradle for 30 seconds If the auto reconnect process fails it can be restarted by pulling the digital scanner trigger To guarantee that a disconnected digital scanner can reconnect when it comes back in range the cradle reserves the connection for that digital scanner for a period of time defined by the Connection Maintenance Interval If the cradle is supporting the maximum three digital scanners and one digital scanner disconnects a fourth digital scanner cannot pair to the cradle during this interval To connect another digital scanner either wait until the connection maintenance interval expires then scan the PAIR bar code on the cradle with the new digital scanner or scan Lock Override page 4 20 with the new digital scanner then sca
130. B CAPS ed 7 10 USB Ignore Unknown Characters AAA 7 11 USB Convert Unknown to Code 39 iccisiscecdsexscctiginaccicendecastwesdetdeaneteontenmaxerseecmannies 7 11 Emulate Keypad aorin inaanod a seen a aE aeaa ear E 7 12 Emulate Keypad with Leading Zero ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeneeeeenenseaeeeees 7 12 Quick Keypad Emulation BEE 7 13 USB Keyboard FN 1 Substitution eu ekeNNEOEEENSEENENAERGEENe ENEE EEEEEAEEEeN 7 14 USB Staic CDO eege seess et ARLOA RANAS EN AAAA ae a iA Aaa 7 14 xX DS6878 Product Reference Guide Function Key Mapping EE 7 15 Simulated Caps BEE 7 15 Convert Case een eenegen ee EE 7 16 Optional USB Parameters ee Eeer 7 17 Ignore Beep E 7 17 Ignore Bar Code Configuration EE 7 17 USB Polling Bi 7 18 ASCII Character Set for USB E 7 20 Chapter 8 RS 232 Interface Dette D EE 8 1 Connecting an RS 232 Interface Au 8 2 RS 232 Parameter Elei eet Ae ebe 8 3 RS 232 eg 8 4 RS 232 Host TYPES cose Sw eee hee E naaa 8 6 Baud Rate eege ees 8 8 EE 8 10 Data Bits ASCII Format WE 8 11 Check Receive E 8 11 Hardware Handshaking scssnncatita ce saceiit cacinleterasaanCeepidaaasaatatediretauunutdescimeateuadeuaneelnmaee 8 12 Software Handshaking EEN 8 14 Host Serial Response Time out seisecccssciscisessasececnsesastccassscteieacenienrincoeneeianieasennees 8 16 AE ELMS State E 8 17 Ee E E 8 17 Waits ee 8 18 Nixdorf Beep LED E 8 19 Ignore Unknown Characters 2 rge zegeer eu euer SNNEEN ege SENNENG Een 8 19 ASCII
131. Bar 14 Family ae GS1 DataBar Limited transmit with an Application Identifier Note In GS1 128 emulation mode GS1 DataBar is transmitted using Code 128 rules i e C1 Example A GS1 DataBar 14 bar code 0110012345678902 is transmitted as Je00110012345678902 B 6 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Table B 3 Modifier Characters Continued Code Type EAN UCC Composites GS1 DataBar GS1 128 2D portion of UPC composite Option Value Option Native mode transmission Note UPC portion of composite is transmitted using UPC rules Standard data packet Data packet containing the data following an encoded symbol separator character Data packet containing the data following an escape mechanism character The data packet does not support the ECI protocol Data packet containing the data following an escape mechanism character The data packet supports the ECI protocol GS1 128 emulation Note UPC portion of composite is transmitted using UPC rules Data packet is a GS1 128 symbol i e data is preceded with UCI PDF417 Micro PDF417 Reader set to conform to protocol defined in 1994 PDF417 symbology specifications Note When this option is transmitted the receiver cannot reliably determine whether ECls have been invoked or whether data byte 92p ec has been doubled in transmission Reader set to follow the ECI protocol Extended Channel Interpretation All data characters 92
132. CR B Variant continued OCR B ISBN 10 Digit Book Numbers 06h OCR B Travel Document Version 2 TD2 2 Line ID Cards 08h OCR B Visa Type B OAh OCR B ISBN 10 or 13 Digit Book Numbers 07h OCR B Visa Type A 09h OCR Programming 14 9 Enable Disable MICR E13B Parameter Fih AAh To enable or disable MICR E13B scan one of the following bar codes MICR E 13B uses the following characters Oh d n ite TOAD characters Transit On Us Amount and Dash output as the following representative characters outputs as t outputs as a a outputs as o nm outputs as d Enable MICR E13B Disable MICR E13B 14 10 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Enable Disable US Currency Serial Number Parameter F1 ABh To enable or disable US Currency Serial Number scan one of the following bar codes Enable US Currency Disable US Currency OCR Orientation Parameter F1 AFh Select one of five options to specify th
133. CR B Variant Fih ADh Full ASCII 14 6 MICR E13B Fih AAh Disable 14 9 US Currency F1h ABh Disable 14 10 OCR Orientation Fih AFh 0 14 10 OCR Lines Fih B3h 1 14 12 OCR Minimum Characters F1h Bih 3 14 12 OCR Maximum Characters Fih B2h 100 14 13 OCR Security Level F1h 2Ah 80 14 13 OCR Subset Fih AEh Selected font 14 14 variant OCR Quiet Zone Fih B7h 50 14 14 OCR Bright Illumination Fih BDh Disable 14 15 OCR Template Fih 23h 54R 14 16 OCR Check Digit Modulus Fih Boh 1 14 25 OCR Check Digit Multiplier Fih BCh 121212121212 14 26 OCR Check Digit Validation F1h B6h None 14 27 OCR Programming 14 3 OCR Programming Parameters Enable Disable OCR A Parameter Eih A8h To enable or disable OCR A scan one of the following bar codes Enable OCR A Disable OCR A OCR A Variant Parameter F1 ACh Font variant sets a processing algorithm and default character subset for the given font To choose a variant scan one of the following bar codes Selecting the most appropriate font variant optimizes performance and accuracy OCR A supports the following variants e OCR A Full ASCII 1 0123456789 lt gt ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ e OCR A Reserved 1 0123456789ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ e OCR A Reserved 2 0123456789 lt gt ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ e OCR A Banking 0123456789 lt gt YH Special banking characters output as
134. CTS Option 3 8 14 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Software Handshaking This parameter offers control of the data transmission process in addition to or instead of that offered by hardware handshaking There are five options If Software Handshaking and Hardware Handshaking are both enabled Hardware Handshaking takes precedence None When this option is selected data is transmitted immediately No response is expected from host ACK NAK When this option is selected after transmitting data the digital scanner expects either an ACK or NAK response from the host When a NAK is received the digital scanner transmits the same data again and waits for either an ACK or NAK After three unsuccessful attempts to send data when NAKs are received the digital scanner issues an error indication and discards the data The digital scanner waits up to the programmable Host Serial Response Time out to receive an ACK or NAK If the digital scanner does not get a response in this time it issues an error indication and discards the data There are no retries when a time out occurs ENQ When this option is selected the digital scanner waits for an ENQ character from the host before transmitting data If an ENQ is not received within the Host Serial Response Time out the digital scanner issues an error indication and discards the data The host must transmit an ENQ character at least every Host Serial Response
135. Character Set for RS 232 cs cc sicececwencciarsiieevinciine conic nasdtslasaneneaensiaeoemenades 8 20 Chapter 9 Keyboard Wedge Interface BVM SOIC UID EE 9 1 Connecting a Keyboard Wedge Interface AAA 9 2 Keyboard Wedge Parameter Defaults ccsccesessereeesssssesesseeseesesceneesssssoresoneesenees 9 3 Keyboard Wedge Host Parameters si scccisstniissessecncs castesssntneccerseesesaccseesenstvcieceassuncteaes 9 4 Keyboard Wedge Host Types scccases deine ncinescesenndsacicenasiubnasanieteetntecntasetonieeienaraunteneens 9 4 Keyboard Wedge Country Types Country Codes ccccecceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneees 9 5 Ignore Unknown Characters eSebetecnie rkerden ge egEgeg Eege 9 7 Keystroke Delay edie ns tas acts eas a secs GEES geen 9 8 Intra Keystroke Delay eege sae eee 9 8 Alternate Numeric Keypad Emulation eeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaeeeeeeeeeneaaaa 9 9 CapsLock EE 9 9 Caps Lock Override css te cece na cde cece Genet Scien conedaens idee inet eect 9 10 CONVer Wedge Data sicrie ASA 9 10 Function Key Mapping NEE 9 11 FNI S bSttUtTON E 9 11 Send Make and Break 9 12 Table of Contents xi Keyboard MapS eersten ana ENEE a 9 13 ASCII Character Set for Keyboard Wedge ssssssseessserrsssrrrretrnrrrrtrnrsstrreserrnnnrennnnennee 9 14 Chapter 10 IBM Interface Introductio EE 10 1 Connecting to an IBM 468X 469X Host ssssssssssseeeseneesssrrrsserrrrtrrnnnrstnrrnssrrnnsrrn rerne 10 2 USR ERT
136. Cleaning and Disinfecting Following are the cleaning and disinfecting instructions for environments that require daily or more frequent cleaning to prevent the spread of germs including healthcare workers who need to disinfect their scanner after each patient visit and retail and other shift workers who share devices 1 Dampen a soft cloth with one of the approved cleaning agents listed above or use pre moistened wipes 2 Gently wipe all surfaces including the front back sides top and bottom Never apply liquid directly to the scanner Be careful not to let liquid pool around the scanner window trigger cable connector or any other area on the device 3 Be sure to clean the trigger and in between the trigger and the housing use a cotton tipped applicator to reach tight or inaccessible areas 4 Immediately dry the scanner window after cleaning with a soft non abrasive cloth to prevent streaking 5 Allow the unit to air dry before use Maintenance Troubleshooting amp Technical Specifications 3 3 Monthly Deen Cleaning Maintenance Keep your Motorola scanner and cradle in good working order with a regular comprehensive cleaning routine to remove the natural build up of dirt that occurs with everyday use on connectors and the scanner exit window as well as the main surfaces of the device 1 Housing Follow the instructions for daily cleaning and disinfecting above to give the housing a general cleaning 2 Scanner ex
137. Convert Newer Code Types The digital scanner supports a variety of code types that are not decodable by attached decoder systems To allow compatibility in these environments the digital scanner converts these code types to more commonly decodable symbologies as per the following chart Symbologies not listed on this chart are transmitted normally Scan this code type Transmitted as Code 11 Code 39 Chinese 2 of 5 Code 39 GS1 DataBar 14 Limited and Expanded Code 128 Coupon Code Code 128 When decoding these code types with this parameter disabled the digital scanner issues Convert Error beeps and transmits no data Convert Newer Code Types Reject Newer Code Types Module Width The standard module width is 20 us For an extremely slow decoder system select 50 ps Module Width 20 ue Module Width 50 us Module Width Scanner Emulation Interface 12 7 Convert All Bar Codes to Code 39 Scan the bar code below to enable or disable the conversion of all bar code data to Code 39 Do Not Convert Bar Codes To Code 39 Convert All To Code 39 Code 39 Full ASCII Conversion By default any characters that do not have a corresponding character in the Cod
138. DS6878 Product Reference Guide DS6878 Product Reference Guide 72E 131700 03 Revision A January 2012 ii DS6878 Product Reference Guide 2011 2012 Motorola Solutions Inc All rights reserved No part of this publication may be reproduced or used in any form or by any electrical or mechanical means without permission in writing from Motorola This includes electronic or mechanical means such as photocopying recording or information storage and retrieval systems The material in this manual is subject to change without notice The software is provided strictly on an as is basis All software including firmware furnished to the user is on a licensed basis Motorola grants to the user a non transferable and non exclusive license to use each software or firmware program delivered hereunder licensed program Except as noted below such license may not be assigned sublicensed or otherwise transferred by the user without prior written consent of Motorola No right to copy a licensed program in whole or in part is granted except as permitted under copyright law The user shall not modify merge or incorporate any form or portion of a licensed program with other program material create a derivative work from a licensed program or use a licensed program in a network without written permission from Motorola The user agrees to maintain Motorola s copyright notice on the licensed programs delivered hereunder and to include the sa
139. DS6878 Product Reference Guide Send Graphic User Interface GUI Characters continued Send GUI Y Send GUI Z Turn On Off Rule Sets Use these bar codes to turn rule sets on and off Turn On Rule Set 1 Turn On Rule Set 2 Turn On Rule Set 3 Turn On Rule Set 4 Advanced Data Formatting 16 89 Turn On Off Rule Sets continued Use these bar codes to turn rule sets on and off Turn Off Rule Set 1 Turn Off Rule Set 2 Turn Off Rule Set 3 Turn Off Rule Set 4 16 90 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Alphanumeric Keyboard IN Space d III UA ILL Geass DAIN III Dash Advanced Data Formatting 16 91 Alphanumeric Keyboard continued Comma amp 16 92 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Alphanumeric Keyboard continued lt gt Advanced Data Formatting 16 93 Alphanumeric Keyboard continued DIN DI DIN DNA KUAN DI Underscore 16 94 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Alphanumeric Keyboard continued
140. Disable 9 9 Caps Lock On Disable 9 9 Caps Lock Override Disable 9 10 Convert Wedge Data No Convert 9 10 Function Key Mapping Disable 9 11 FN1 Substitution Disable 9 11 Send and Make Break Send 9 12 IBM 468X 469X Host Parameters Port Address None Selected 10 4 Convert Unknown to Code 39 Disable 10 5 Ignore Beep Disable 10 5 Ignore Bar Code Configuration Disable 10 6 Wand Emulation Host Parameters Wand Emulation Host Types Symbol OmniLink Interface 11 5 Controller Leading Margin 80 msec 11 6 Polarity Bar High Margin Low 11 7 Ignore Unknown Characters Send 11 7 Convert All Bar Codes to Code 39 Disable 11 8 Convert Code 39 to Full ASCII Disable 11 9 Scanner Emulation Beep Style Beep on Successful Transmit 12 4 Parameter Pass Through Parameter Process and Pass 12 5 Through Convert Newer Code Types Convert Newer Code Types 12 6 1User selection is required to configure this interface and this is the most common selection Standard Default Parameters A 7 Table A 1 Standard Default Parameters Table Continued Parameter Default ee Module Width 20 us 12 6 Convert All Bar Codes to Code 39 Do Not Convert Bar Codes to 12 7 Code 39 Code 39 Full ASCII Conversion Disable 12 7 Transmission Timeout 3 sec 12 8 Ignore Unknown Characters Ignore Unknown Characters 12 9 Leading Margin 2ms 12 9 Check for Decode LED Check for Decode LED 12 10 123Scan Configuration To
141. E 10 3 IBM 468X 469X Host Parameters cccceeeeeeeeeeeeee eee eeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeecceeeeeeneeeeeesnaaeeeeee 10 4 POM Address iere geet EES 10 4 Convert Unknown to Code 29 10 5 Optional IBM Parameters E 10 5 lgnore E 10 5 Ignore Bar Code Configuration ccicicisticssnthisausneinpneavinccsansieineatenieeiniaedeannietemineetesiaes 10 6 Chapter 11 Wand Emulation Interface WATHO GU CUO NN WEE 11 1 Connecting Using Wand Emulation EE 11 2 Wand Emulation Parameter Defaults 0 cccccecccceceseeceeseeeeseeseeeeseeeeceaaeeseetanestentaneaes 11 4 Wand Emulation Host Parameters ccccccccessececeeeceeectenseceetaneeeetaneneeetensnsentensagees 11 5 Wand Emulation Host Types REENEN 11 5 RE Muere le TE 11 6 Polarity eege Eeer 11 7 Ignore Unknown Characters cxccsastcecixeswsidtederedcaanivaedeteaiicensdecoinbizald eomtescinesbechoneladen 11 7 Convert All Bar Codes to Code 20 11 8 Convert Code 39 to Full ASCII aasassssssnsesesesrrrrrrrreresserrrrrrrrreresrsrrnrrrrreererenrrnrrrreeeenrnn 11 9 Chapter 12 Scanner Emulation Interface Connecting Using Scanner Emulation 0 cece cece eeeneeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenaeeeseeaes 12 2 Scanner Emulation Parameter Defaults 20 0 0 ccceececceceseseeeeeeseceeeeeeseesaeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeees 12 3 Scanner Emulation HOSE 2 e eesdsgegeE Ee a a ENEE 12 3 Scanner Emulation Host Parameters ccccccccccscsesseceeeeeeseseaeeeeeeceeeeeessesaeaeeeeeseeeeetenes 12 4 Elei 12 4 Parameter E
142. ES sg ede pane dee ede ed 14 12 maximum characters 14 13 MICR E13B pe dinaa eii ie deg Yani es 14 9 minimum chararacter 14 12 OCRAA eesigi ada iieo ede E 14 3 OCH Avarant aaaea anaana aaea 14 3 OCR B aas utadi ie uat Aer AR Ee 14 5 OCH Bvarant anaua 14 6 orientation 14 10 parameters 14 3 quiet zone ee eee eee eee 14 14 security level 14 13 SUDSELs ci eta ete ed ee eee eee eed 14 14 template 14 16 US currency serialnumber 14 10 parameter broadcast 2055 4 19 parameter scanning 2 0 e ee eee 5 6 parser version ID 17 16 PDF prioritization 0 0055 5 27 PDF prioritization timeout 5 28 PDF417 wise deteeaete eee gu sees eee twas 15 76 picklist modes 5 24 poslal errare reet ak bead oe pees 15 61 prefix suffix values 5 48 presentation mode field of view 5 35 presentation performance mode 5 15 QRCOQE grageas i trees eee ee Ye 15 81 QRinverse o aiita sanaa sae a eee eee eee 15 82 radio output power 200 08e 4 19 reconnect attempt beep 4 15 reconnect attempt interval 4 16 RS 232 baud rate eee 8 8 Deep on es See eve ee Bees 8 17 check receive errors 2 000 8 11 data DIS a sav Erra TERIO Ae hen ees 8 11 hardware handshaking 8 12 8 13 host serial response time out 8 16 host typeS
143. ISBT Table 01h Disable Check ISBT Table 00h ISBT Concatenation Redundancy Parameter DFh If you set ISBT Concatenation to Autodiscriminate use this parameter to set the number of times the digital scanner must decode an ISBT symbol before determining that there is no additional symbol Scan the bar code below then scan two numeric bar codes in Appendix D Numeric Bar Codes to set a value between 2 and 20 Enter a leading zero for single digit numbers To correct an error or change a selection scan Cancel on page D 3 The default is 10 ISBT Concatenation Redundancy Symbologies 15 31 Code 39 Enable Disable Code 39 Parameter 00h To enable or disable Code 39 scan the appropriate bar code below Enable Code 39 01h Disable Code 39 00h Enable Disable Trioptic Code 39 Parameter ODh Trioptic Code 39 is a variant of Code 39 used in the marking of computer tape cartridges Trioptic Code 39 symbols always contain six characters To enable or disable Trioptic Code 39 scan the appropriate bar code below Enable Trioptic Code 39 01h Disable Trioptic Code 39 00h J NOTE You cannot enable Triopti
144. K POSTAI scn aa aot A A AEN E C 5 Appendix D Numeric Bar Codes Numeric Bar Codes D 2 CO EE D 3 Appendix E Alphanumeric Bar Codes Alphanumeric Keyboard E E 1 xviii DS6878 Product Reference Guide Appendix F ASCII Character Sets Appendix G Signature Capture Code lridgee Tee G 1 Code Str ct re Ee G 1 Signature Capture EE G 1 CapCod Pattern East beeet ee ed geed geen G 2 Start Stop E G 2 DIMENSIONS nissa a R RR E EE EEN G 3 Data FOMmMat EE G 3 Additional TEE G 4 Signature e G 4 Glossary Index Tell Us What You Think About This Guide Introduction The DS6878 Product Reference Guide provides general instructions for setting up operating maintaining and troubleshooting the DS6878 digital scanner and cradles Configurations This guide includes the following configurations DS6878 SR20001WR DS6878 digital scanner standard range cash register white DS6878 SR20007WR DS6878 digital scanner standard range twilight black DS6878 SR2F001WR DS6878 digital scanner standard range FIPS cash register white DS6878 SR2F007WR DS6878 digital scanner standard range FIPS twilight black DS6878 HC2000BWR DS6878 digital scanner standard range healthcare white DS6878 HC2FO9BWR DS6878 digital scanner standard range FIPS healthcare white DS6878 DL20001WR DS6878 digital scanner standard range DL parsing cash register white DS6878 DL20007WR DS6878 digital scanner standard range DL parsing twi
145. Key Mapping is enabled Otherwise the unbolded keystroke is sent F 6 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Table F 2 ALT Key Standard Default Tables ALT Keys Keystroke 2064 ALT 2 2065 ALTA 2066 ALT B 2067 ALT C 2068 ALT D 2069 ALTE 2070 ALT F 2071 ALT G 2072 ALT H 2073 ALT 2074 ALT J 2075 ALT K 2076 ALT L 2077 ALT M 2078 ALT N 2079 ALT O 2080 ALT P 2081 ALT Q 2082 ALT R 2083 ALT S 2084 ALT T 2085 ALT U 2086 ALT V 2087 ALT W 2088 ALT X 2089 ALT Y 2090 ALT Z ASCII Character Sets F 7 Table F 3 Misc Key Standard Default Table Misc Key Keystroke 3001 PA 1 3002 PA 2 3003 CMD 1 3004 CMD 2 3005 CMD 3 3006 CMD 4 3007 CMD 5 3008 CMD 6 3009 CMD 7 3010 CMD 8 3011 CMD 9 3012 CMD 10 3013 CMD 11 3014 CMD 12 3015 CMD 13 3016 CMD 14 Table F 4 GUI Shift Keys Other Value Keystroke 3048 GUI 0 3049 GUI 1 3050 GUI 2 3051 GUI 3 3052 GUI 4 3053 GUI5 3054 GUI 6 3055 GUI 7 3056 GUI 8 The Apple iMac keyboard has an apple key on either side of the space bar Windows based systems have a GUI key to the left of the left ALT key and to the right of the right ALT key F 8 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Table F 4 GUI Shift Keys Continued Other Value Keystroke
146. LT Characters continued Send Alt G Send Alt I Send Alt K Send Alt F Send Alt H Send Alt J Send Alt L Advanced Data Formatting 16 67 Send ALT Characters continued VATA Send Alt M UATE Send Alt N UA WAT Send Alt O MAN Send Alt P du Woh Send Alt Q A Mul Send Alt R Nuit Send Alt S 16 68 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Send ALT Characters continued Send Alt U Send Alt W Send Alt Y Send Alt T Send Alt V Send Alt X Send Alt Z Advanced Data Formatting 16 69 Send ALT Characters continued Send Alt Send Alt Send Alt 16 70 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Send Keypad Characters VITA Send Keypad VAN Send Keypad VITA Send Keypad A HM Send Keypad UA MAI Send Keypad A Mul Send Keypad 0 du Wa
147. M defaults 20 2 eee 10 3 illumination 2 0 0 eee 5 36 6 5 image brightness target white 6 11 image cropping 6 8 6 9 image enhancement 6 13 image options bits per pixel 6 16 CYOPPING vice ka sinodu eae eyed eyes 6 8 6 9 file formats 00 e eee eae 6 14 6 18 image brightness target white 6 11 image enhancement 6 13 image resolution 6 10 image rotation 6 15 JPEG image options 6 11 JPEG size quality 6 12 JPEG target file size 6 12 image resolution 6 10 imaging preferences parameters 6 2 information service xxii inserting baten 1 12 interleaved 2 of 5 bar codes check digit verification 15 46 convert to EAN 13 000 eae 15 47 transmit check digit 15 46 J JPEG image options 6 11 size quality 0 00 eee eee 6 12 JPEG target file size 6 12 K keyboard wedge connection 9 2 keyboard wedge defaults 000 9 3 keyboard wedge parameters 04 9 4 Korean 3 of 5 barcodes 15 59 L LED battery reconditioning definitions 1 17 Charging 00 eee eee 1 17 2 3 discharging 1 17 SCANNING E Ee IER E dE eae nays 2 3 standard definitions 2 3 lock override 2 0 eee ee 4 20 locked pairing mode 4 20 4 23 low power mode 4 14 M Macro PDP sostenerse eee eee ee
148. Macro PDF417 Micro PDF417 H Aztec Aztec Rune POO Data Matrix P0O1 QR Code MicroQR P02 Maxicode P03 US Postnet P04 US Planet POR Japan Postal P06 UK Postal P08 Netherlands KIX Code P09 Australian Postal POA USPS 4CB One Code Intelligent Mail POB UPU FICS Postal POX Signature Capture Programming Reference B 3 AIM Code Identifiers Each AIM Code Identifier contains the three character string Jem where Flag Character ASCII 93 c Code Character see Table B 2 m Modifier Character see Table B 3 Table B 2 Aim Code Characters Code Character Code Type A Code 39 Code 39 Full ASCII Code 32 C Code 128 ISBT 128 ISBT 128 Concatenated GS1 128 Coupon Code 128 portion d Data Matrix E UPC EAN Coupon UPC portion e GS1 DataBar Family F Codabar G Code 93 H Code 11 l Interleaved 2 of 5 L PDF417 Macro PDF417 Micro PDF417 L2 TLC 39 M MSI Q QR Code MicroQR S Discrete 2 of 5 IATA 2 of 5 U Maxicode Z Aztec Aztec Rune X Bookland EAN ISSN EAN Trioptic Code 39 Chinese 2 of 5 Matrix 2 of 5 Korean 3 of 5 US Postnet US Planet UK Postal Japan Postal Australian Postal Netherlands KIX Code USPS 4CB One Code Intelligent Mail UPU FICS Postal Signature Capture B 4 DS6878 Product Reference Guide The modifier character is the sum of the applicable option values based on Table B 3 Table B 3 Modifier Characters
149. Mode Modes of Operation Point to Point Multipoint to Point Point to Point 4 18 Parameter Broadcast Cradle Host Only Enable 4 19 1User selection is required to configure this interface and this is the most common selection A 2 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Table A 1 Standard Default Parameters Table Continued Parameter Default ee Pairing Modes Unlocked 4 20 Pairing on Contacts Enable 4 21 Connection Maintenance Interval 15 min 4 24 Authentication Disable 4 26 Variable Pin Code Static 4 27 Encryption Disable 4 28 User Preferences Set Default Parameter Set Defaults 5 5 Parameter Bar Code Scanning Enable 5 6 Beep After Good Decode Enable 5 6 Suppress Power Up Beeps Do Not Suppress 5 7 Beeper Tone Medium 5 8 Beeper Volume High 5 9 Beeper Duration Medium 5 10 Beep on Insertion Enabled 5 10 Batch Mode Normal Do Not Batch Data 5 11 Hand Held Trigger Mode Level 5 13 Hands Free Mode Enable 5 14 Presentation Performance Mode Standard 5 15 Low Power Mode Enabled 5 16 Time Delay to Reduced Power Mode 100 msec 5 17 Time Delay to Presentation Idle Mode Fih 97h 5 19 Time Delay to Presentation Sleep Mode Fih 96h 5 22 Timeout to Low Power Mode from Auto Aim 15 Sec 5 23 Picklist Mode Disabled Always 5 24 Mobile Phone Display Mode Disable 5 25 FIPS Security Enabled 5 26 PDF Prioritization Disable 5 27 1User selection is required to configure t
150. NDA ageet eee eee ewe eG Beek eae 4 21 UPC composite mode 15 74 Index 4 DS6878 Product Reference Guide UPC EAN coupon code 15 23 supp redundancy 15 14 15 15 UPC EAN JAN supplemental AIM ID format 15 15 supplemental redundancy 15 14 IP GAAS esses tie arte seen Ae eeh ae BR 15 8 UPC A preamble 00000 eee 15 17 UPC A E E1 check digit 15 15 15 16 UPCE Za pinch Mia heed dade dad pees 15 8 UPC E preamble 00000005 15 18 UPCE unser 15 9 UPU FICS postal 15 67 US planet 0 2 0 eee 15 61 US poste 15 61 USB caps lock override 004 7 10 CONVEM CASE nek seater ese eee eee 7 16 country keyboard types 7 8 device type 7 5 emulate kevpad naana 7 12 function key mapping 7 15 keyboard FN 1 sub 7 14 keystroke dea 7 10 optional parameters 7 17 polling interval 7 18 7 19 quick emulation 004 7 13 simulated caps lock nannan aaaaaaaaaa 7 15 SNAPI handshaking 7 7 static CD 7 14 unknown characters 7 11 USPS 4CB One Code Intelligent Mail 15 66 variable PIN code 4 27 wand emulation code 39 full ASCII 0 11 9 convert all bar codes to code 39 11 8 host types 11 5 leading margin quiet zone 11 6 polarity vd EE ie E ene 11 7 unknown characters 1
151. NTER 1014 N SO 1015 O SI 1016 P DLE 1017 Q DC1 XON 1018 R DC2 1019 S DC3 XOFF 1020 T DC4 1021 U NAK 1022 V SYN 1023 w ETB 1024 X CAN 1025 Y EM 1026 z SUB RS 232 Interface 8 21 Table 8 4 ASCII Character Set for RS 232 Continued ASCII Value rete Eat EE ASCII Character 1027 A ESC 1028 B FS 1029 C GS 1030 D RS 1031 E US 1032 Space Space 1033 JA 1034 B 1035 IC 1036 De 1037 E 1038 IF amp 1039 IG 1040 D I 1041 D 1042 IJ 1043 K 1044 D 1045 1046 1047 0 1048 0 0 1049 1 1 1050 2 2 1051 3 3 1052 4 4 1053 5 5 1054 6 6 1057 7 7 1056 8 8 8 22 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Table 8 4 ASCII Character Set for RS 232 Continued ASCII Value DEE EE ASCII Character 1057 9 9 1058 IZ 1059 F 1060 G lt 1061 H 1062 Di gt 1063 J 2 1064 V 1065 A A 1066 B B 1067 SG C 1068 D D 1069 E E 1070 F F 1071 G G 1072 H H 1073 l l 1074 J J 1075 K K 1076 L L 1077 M M 1078 N N 1079 O O 1080 P P 1081 Q Q 1082 R R 1083 S S 1084 T T 1085 U U 1086 V V RS 232 Interface 8 23 Table 8 4 ASCII Character Set for RS 232 Continued ASCII Value DE EE ASCII Character 1087 W W 1088 X
152. Numeric Bar Codes corresponding to a value in the range of 001 to 480 decimal Signature Capture Height Default 100 001 480 Decimal Signature Capture JPEG Quality Parameter FOh A5h Scan the JPEG Quality Value bar code followed by 3 bar codes from Appendix D Numeric Bar Codes corresponding to a value from 005 to 100 where 100 represents the highest quality image JPEG Quality Value Default 065 5 100 Decimal Chapter 7 USB Interface Introduction This chapter provides instructions for programming the cradle to interface with a USB host The digital scanner cradle connects directly to a USB host or a powered USB hub The USB host can power the cradle and recharge the digital scanner battery but this charging method has limitations See Using the USB Interface to Supply Power on page 1 9 Throughout the programming bar code menus default values are indicated with asterisks tee Indicates Default North American Standard USB Keyboard Feature Option J NOTE The CROO78 S cradle has the ability to be powered by the USB port instead of an external power supply The CR0078 P can only receive power via an external power supply 7 2 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Connecting a USB Interface J NOTE See Chapter 4 Radio Communications for information about digital scanner cradle pairing and wireless c
153. PC E1 Preamble System Character 15 19 Convert UPC E to A Disable 15 20 Convert UPC E1 to A Disable 15 20 EAN 8 JAN 8 Extend Disable 15 21 Bookland ISBN Format ISBN 10 15 22 UCC Coupon Extended Code Disable 15 23 Coupon Report New Coupon Format 15 24 ISSN EAN Disable 15 25 Code 128 Code 128 Enable 15 26 Set Length s for Code 128 Any Length 15 28 1User selection is required to configure this interface and this is the most common selection Standard Default Parameters A 9 Table A 1 Standard Default Parameters Table Continued Parameter Default ee GS1 128 formerly UCC EAN 128 Enable 15 28 ISBT 128 Enable 15 28 ISBT Concatenation Disable 15 29 Check ISBT Table Enable 15 30 ISBT Concatenation Redundancy 10 15 30 Code 39 Code 39 Enable 15 31 Trioptic Code 39 Disable 15 31 Convert Code 39 to Code 32 Italian Pharmacy Code Disable 15 32 Code 32 Prefix Disable 15 32 Set Length s for Code 39 2 to 55 15 33 Code 39 Check Digit Verification Disable 15 34 Transmit Code 39 Check Digit Disable 15 34 Code 39 Full ASCII Conversion Disable 15 35 Buffer Code 39 Disable 15 35 Code 93 Code 93 Disable 15 38 Set Length s for Code 93 4 to 55 15 38 Code 11 Code 11 Disable 15 40 Set Lengths for Code 11 4 to 55 15 40 Code 11 Check Digit Verification Disable 15 42 Transmit Code 11 Check Digit s Disable 15 43 Interleaved 2 of 5 ITF Interleaved 2 of 5 I
154. S6878 Product Reference Guide Leading Margin Quiet Zone Scan a bar code below to select a leading margin duration A leading margin is the time that precedes the first bar of the scan in milliseconds The minimum allowed value is 80 msec and the maximum is 250 msec This parameter accommodates older wand decoders which cannot handle short leading margins J NOTE 250 msec is the maximum value that this parameter can attain however 200 msec is sufficient 80 msec 140 msec 200 msec Wand Emulation Interface 11 7 Polarity Scan a bar code below to select the polarity required by the decoder Polarity determines how the cradle s Wand Emulation interface creates the Digitized Bar code Pattern DBP DBP is a digital signal that represents the scanned bar code Different decoders expect the DBP to be in a certain format The DBP either has the highs represent bars and the lows represent spaces margins or the highs represent spaces margins and the lows represent bars Bar High Margin Low Bar Low Margin High Ignore Unknown Characters Unknown characters are characters the host does not recognize When Send Bar Codes With Unknown Characters is selected all bar code data is sent except for unknown characters and no error beeps sound on the digital scanner When Do Not Send Bar Codes With Unknown Characters is selected bar codes con
155. SI Check Digit s Disable 00h 15 56 DS6878 Product Reference Guide MSI Check Digit Algorithm Two algorithms are possible for the verification of the second MSI check digit Select the bar code below corresponding to the algorithm used to encode the check digit MOD 10 MOD 11 00h MOD 10 MOD 10 01h Chinese 2 of 5 Enable Disable Chinese 2 of 5 To enable or disable Chinese 2 of 5 scan the appropriate bar code below Enable Chinese 2 of 5 01h Disable Chinese 2 of 5 00h Symbologies 15 57 Matrix 2 of 5 Enable Disable Matrix 2 of 5 To enable or disable Matrix 2 of 5 scan the appropriate bar code below Enable Matrix 2 of 5 01h Disable Matrix 2 of 5 00h 15 58 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Set Lengths for Matrix 2 of 5 The length of a code refers to the number of characters i e human readable characters including check digit s the code contains Set lengths for Matrix 2 of 5 to any length one or two discrete lengths or lengths within a specific range e One Discrete Length Select this option to decode only Matrix 2 of 5 symbols containing a selected length Select the length using the numeric bar c
156. Scan the following bar code 2 Enter an alphanumeric string representing the desired character or characters up to a total of 10 using the 3 Scan End of Message bar code on page 16 99 Alphanumeric Keyboard on page 16 90 Specific String Search Any Message OK Do not scan any bar code to format all selected code types regardless of information contained 16 22 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Numeric Keypad Do not confuse bar codes on this page with those on the alphanumeric keyboard IMM 0 VAT 1 AU 2 UI 3 ALT 4 Il 5 6 Advanced Data Formatting 16 23 Numeric Keypad continued 7 8 9 Cancel 16 24 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Rule Belongs To Set Select the set to which a rule belongs There are four possible rule sets See Alternate Rule Sets on page 16 3 for more information about rule sets Rule Belongs To Set 1 Rule Belongs To Set 2 Rule Belongs To Set 3 Rule Belongs To Set 4 Advanced Data Formatting 16 25 Actions Select how to format the data for transmission Send Data Send all data that remains send all data up to a specific character selected from the Alphanumeric Keyboard on page 16 90 or s
157. Send Control W 16 50 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Control Characters continued Send Control X Send Control Z Send Control Send Control Y Send Conirol Send Control Advanced Data Formatting 16 51 Control Characters continued Send Control 6 Send Control Keyboard Characters Scan a Send bar code for the keyboard characters to send Send Space Send Send Send 16 52 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Keyboard Characters continued du Wil Send AA Send VATA Send amp ID Send df Send AAT Send UA WU Send Advanced Data Formatting 16 53 Keyboard Characters continued IAU Send VATA Send AAN Send KANAI Send AAN Send KAAN Send 0 AAN Send 1 16 54 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Keyboard Characters continued Send 2 Send 4 Send 6 Send 8 Send 3 Send 5
158. Serial Port Connection to Host Interface Cable Figure 8 1 ARS 232 Direct Connection To connect the RS 232 interface 1 Attach the modular connector of the RS 232 interface cable to the host port on the bottom of the scanner cradle see Connecting the CRO078 S CRO008 S Series Cradle on page 1 8 or Connecting the CRO078 P Series Cradle on page 1 10 2 Connect the other end of the RS 232 interface cable to the serial port on the host 3 Connect the power supply to the serial connector end of the RS 232 interface cable Plug the power supply into an appropriate outlet 4 Select the RS 232 host type by scanning the appropriate bar code from RS 232 Host Types on page 8 6 5 To modify any other parameter options scan the appropriate bar codes in this chapter lt V NOTE Interface cables vary depending on configuration The connectors illustrated in Figure 8 1 are examples only The connectors may be different than those illustrated but the steps to connect the cradle remain the same RS 232 Interface If a power supply is used disconnect the power supply before changing host cables or the cradle may not recognize the new host RS 232 Parameter Defaults 8 3 Table 8 1 lists the defaults for RS 232 host parameters If any option needs to be changed scan the appropriate bar code s provided in the Parameter Descriptions section beginning on page 8 4 NOTE See Appendix A Standard Default Parameters for all user preferen
159. System Character There are three options for transmitting a UPC E1 preamble to the host device transmit System Character only transmit System Character and Country Code CO for USA and transmit no preamble Select the appropriate option to match the host system No Preamble lt DATA gt 00h System Character lt SYSTEM CHARACTER gt lt DATA gt 01h System Character amp Country Code lt COUNTRY CODE gt lt SYSTEM CHARACTER gt lt DATA gt 02h 15 20 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Convert UPC E to UPC A Parameter 25h Enable this to convert UPC E zero suppressed decoded data to UPC A format before transmission After conversion the data follows UPC A format and is affected by UPC A programming selections e g Preamble Check Digit Disable this to transmit UPC E decoded data as UPC E data without conversion Convert UPC E to UPC A Enable 01h Do Not Convert UPC E to UPC A Disable 00h Convert UPC E1 to UPC A Parameter 26h Enable this to convert UPC E1 decoded data to UPC A format before transmission After conversion the data follows UPC A format and is affected by UPC A programming selections e g Preamble Check Digit Disable this to transmit UPC E1 decoded data as UPC E1 data without conversion Convert UPC E1 to UPC A Enable 01h
160. TF Disable 15 44 Set Lengths for 2 of 5 14 15 44 2 of 5 Check Digit Verification Disable 15 46 Transmit 2 of 5 Check Digit Disable 15 46 1User selection is required to configure this interface and this is the most common selection A 10 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Table A 1 Standard Default Parameters Table Continued Parameter Default Br Bele Convert 2 of 5 to EAN 13 Disable 15 47 Discrete 2 of 5 DTF Discrete 2 of 5 Disable 15 47 Set Length s for D 2 of 5 12 15 48 Codabar NW 7 Codabar Disable 15 50 Set Lengths for Codabar 5 to 55 15 50 CLSI Editing Disable 15 52 NOTIS Editing Disable 15 52 MSI MSI Disable 15 53 Set Length s for MSI 4 to 55 15 53 MSI Check Digits One 15 55 Transmit MSI Check Digit Disable 15 55 MSI Check Digit Algorithm Mod 10 Mod 10 15 56 Chinese 2 of 5 Chinese 2 of 5 Disable 15 56 Matrix 2 of 5 Matrix 2 of 5 Disable 15 57 Matrix 2 of 5 Lengths 1 Length 14 15 58 Matrix 2 of 5 Check Digit Disable 15 59 Transmit Matrix 2 of 5 Check Digit Disable 15 59 Korean 3 of 5 Korean 3 of 5 Disable 15 59 Inverse 1D Inverse 1D Regular 15 60 Postal Codes US Postnet Disable 15 61 1User selection is required to configure this interface and this is the most common selection Standard Default Parameters A 11 Table A 1 Standard Default Parameters Table Continued
161. Table 9 2 Keyboard Wedge ASCII Character Set Continued Full ASCII ve Code 39 Encode Character A 1106 J j 1107 K k 1108 L 1109 M m 1110 N n 1111 O o 1112 P p 1113 Q q 1114 R r 1115 S S 1116 T t 1117 U u 1118 V Vv 1119 W W 1120 X D 1121 Y y 1122 Z Zz 1123 P 1124 Q l 1125 R 1126 S 1The keystroke in bold is sent only if the Function Key Mapping is enabled Otherwise the unbolded keystroke is sent Table 9 3 Keyboard Wedge ALT Key Character Set ALT Keys Keystroke 2065 ALT A 2066 ALT B 2067 ALT C 2068 ALT D 2069 ALT E Keyboard Wedge Interface 9 19 Table 9 3 Keyboard Wedge ALT Key Character Set Continued ALT Keys Keystroke 2070 ALT F 2071 ALT G 2072 ALT H 2073 ALT 2074 ALT J 2075 ALT K 2076 ALT L 2077 ALT M 2078 ALT N 2079 ALT O 2080 ALT P 2081 ALT Q 2082 ALT R 2083 ALT S 2084 ALT T 2085 ALT U 2086 ALT V 2087 ALT W 2088 ALT X 2089 ALT Y 2090 ALT Z Table 9 4 Keyboard Wedge GIU Key Character Set GUI Keys Keystrokes 3000 Right Control Key 3048 GUI 0 3049 GUI 1 3050 GUI 2 3051 GUI 3 3052 GUI 4 3053 GUI 5 9 20 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Table 9 4 Keyboard Wedge GIU Key Character Set Continued GUI Keys Keystrokes
162. Time out to prevent transmission errors ACK NAK with ENQ This combines the two previous options For re transmissions of data due to a NAK from the host an additional ENQ is not required XON XOFF An XOFF character turns the digital scanner transmission off until the digital scanner receives an XON character There are two situations for XON XOFF e XOFF is received before the digital scanner has data to send When the digital scanner has data to send it waits up to Host Serial Response Time out for an XON character before transmission If the XON is not received within this time the digital scanner issues an error indication and discards the data e XOFF is received during a transmission Data transmission then stops after sending the current byte When the digital scanner receives an XON character it sends the rest of the data message The digital scanner waits up to 30 seconds for the XON RS 232 Interface 8 15 Software Handshaking continued None ACK NAK E NQ ACK NAK with ENQ XON XOFF 8 16 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Host Serial Response Time out This parameter specifies how long the digital scanner waits for an ACK NAK ENQ XON or CTS before determining that a transmission error occurred Minimum 2 sec Low 2 5 sec Medium 5 sec
163. UPC EAN JAN Supplemental Redundancy Parameter 50h If you selected Autodiscriminate UPC EAN JAN Supplemenitals this option adjusts the number of times to decode a symbol without supplementals before transmission The range is from two to thirty times Five or above is recommended when decoding a mix of UPC EAN JAN symbols with and without supplementals The default is 10 Scan the bar code below to set a decode redundancy value Next scan two numeric bar codes in Appendix D Numeric Bar Codes Enter a leading zero for single digit numbers To correct an error or change a selection scan Cancel on page D 3 UPC EAN JAN Supplemental Redundancy Symbologies 15 15 UPC EAN JAN Supplemental AIM ID Format Parameter F1h AOh Select an output format when reporting UPC EAN JAN bar codes with supplementals with AIM ID enabled e Separate UPC EAN with supplementals transmit as JE lt O or 4 gt lt data gt E lt 1 or 2 gt supp data e Combined EAN 8 with supplementals transmit as JE4 lt data gt E lt 1 or 2 gt supp data All other UPC EAN with supplementals transmit as JE3 lt data supps gt Separate 00h Combined 01h Transmit UPC A Check Digit Parameter 28h The check digit is the last character of the symbol used to verify the integrity of the data Scan the appropriate bar code below to transmit
164. Zeros continued Pad Zeros To Length 18 Pad Zeros To Length 19 Pad Zeros To Length 20 Pad Zeros To Length 21 Pad Zeros To Length 22 Pad Zeros To Length 23 Pad Zeros To Length 24 Advanced Data Formatting 16 45 Pad Data with Zeros continued Pad Zeros To Length 25 Pad Zeros To Length 26 Pad Zeros To Length 27 Pad Zeros To Length 28 Pad Zeros To Length 29 Pad Zeros To Length 30 Stop Pad Zeros 16 46 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Beeps Select a beep sequence for each ADF rule Beep Once Beep Twice Send Keystroke Control Characters and Keyboard Characters Beep Three Times Control Characters Scan a Send b
165. ace the scanner in the cradle 3 The digital scanner must perform two charge cycles to complete the battery reconditioning process discharge charge discharge charge See Table 1 2 Battery Reconditioning LED Definitions Table 1 2 Battery Reconditioning LED Definitions Battery Reconditioning LED Mode Comments Discharging Red Flash Time to discharge is approximately 2 5 hours Charging Green Flash Time to charge is approximately 2 5 hours with an external power supply Reconditioning Complete Green Solid always on The digital scanner enters a trickle charge until the digital scanner is removed from the cradle 1 18 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Wall Mount Bracket Template For your convenience a wall mount bracket can be purchased from Motorola Use the mounting holes on the Wall Mount Bracket or see Figure 1 14 for a Wall Mount Bracket Template to determine the location of the screw holes References to mounting the cradle only apply to the CRO078 S CRO0008 S cradle not the CRO078 P cradle For V detailed instructions on mounting the cradle refer to the CR0078 S CR0008 S Quick Reference Guide p n 72 135874 xx Getting Started 1 19 ww 22 64 EE 1 7 in 43 18 mm ke Weg pg Figure 1 14 Wall Mount Bracket Template 1 20 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Radio Communications The digital scanner can communicate with remote devices via Bluetooth Technology Pr
166. age that is less susceptible to motion blur at the expense of noise artifacts However for most applications the amount of noise is acceptable e Scan Low Gain Priority to set a mode in which the digital scanner favors longer exposure time rather than higher gain to capture an image This ensures that the image is less noisy and produces fewer artifacts during post processing activities like image enhancement sharpening The mode is recommended for fixed mount fixed object image capture since the image acquired is susceptible to motion blur e Scan Autodetect default to set a mode in which the digital scanner automatically selects Gain Priority or Low Exposure Priority mode for Snapshot Mode If the digital scanner is in a magnetic read switch enabled stand or it is configured in Blink Mode it uses Low Gain Priority mode Otherwise it uses the Low Exposure Priority mode Low Gain Priority 0 Low Exposure Priority 1 Autodetect 2 Imaging Preferences 6 7 Snapshot Mode Timeout Parameter FOh 43h This parameter sets the amount of time the digital scanner remains in Snapshot Mode The digital scanner exits Snapshot Mode when you pull the trigger or when the Snapshot Mode Timeout elapses To set this timeout value scan the bar code below followed by a bar code from Appendix D Numeric Bar Codes The default value is 0 which represents 30 seconds values increment by 30 For example 1 60 seconds 2 90 seconds et
167. al 16 35 Remove Leading Zeros 16 36 Stop Zero Removal 16 36 Pad Data with Spaces 16 37 Pad Data with Zeros 16 41 Beeps 16 46 Control Characters 16 46 Keyboard Characters 16 51 Send ALT Characters 16 65 Send Keypad Characters 16 70 Send Function Key 16 75 Send F1 Key Send F24 Key 16 75 Send DEI Key Send PF30 Key 16 78 Send Right Control Key 16 82 Send Graphic User Interface GUI Characters 16 83 Send GUI 0 Send GUI 9 16 83 Send GUI A Send GUI Z 16 84 Turn On Off Rule Sets 16 88 Alphanumeric Keyboard 16 90 Space 16 90 0 9 16 94 A Z 16 95 Cancel 16 99 16 8 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Table 16 1 ADF Bar Codes Continued Parameter et le End of Message 16 99 a z 16 99 et 16 103 Special Commands Pause Duration Use this parameter along with Send Pause on page 16 31 to insert a pause in the data transmission Set the pause by scanning a two digit number e two bar codes from Appendix D Numeric Bar Codes in 0 1 second intervals For example scanning bar codes 0 and 1 inserts a 0 1 second pause 0 and 5 inserts a 0 5 second delay To correct an error or change a selection scan Cancel on page D 3 Pause Duration Begin New Rule Scan the bar code below to start entering a new rule Begin New Rule Save Rule Scan the bar code below to save the rule Save Rule
168. al rule in the user programmable buffer When receiving scan data send all data Since this rule always applies ADF never applies the default rules 16 6 DS6878 Product Reference Guide ADF Bar Codes Table 16 1 lists the bar codes available through ADF Table 16 1 ADF Bar Codes Parameter ies Special Commands 16 8 Pause Duration 16 8 Begin New Rule 16 8 Save Rule 16 8 Erase 16 9 Quit Entering Rules 16 9 Disable Rule Set 16 10 Criteria 16 11 Code Types 16 11 Code Lengths 16 16 1 Character 6 Characters 16 16 7 Characters 13 Characters 16 17 14 Characters 20 Characters 16 18 21 Characters 27 Characters 16 19 28 Characters 30 Characters 16 20 Specific String at Start 16 20 Specific String Any Location 16 21 Specific String Search 16 21 Any Message OK 16 21 Numeric Keypad 16 22 Rule Belongs To Set 16 24 Actions 16 25 Send Data 16 25 Send Data Up To Character 16 25 Send Next Character 16 25 Send All Data That Remains 16 25 Send Next 2 Characters Send Next 20 Characters 16 25 Advanced Data Formatting 16 7 Table 16 1 ADF Bar Codes Continued Parameter Det le Move Cursor 16 30 Send Pause 16 31 Skip Ahead 16 32 Skip Back 16 33 Send Preset Value 16 35 Remove All Spaces 16 35 Crunch All Spaces 16 35 Stop Space Remov
169. al scanner and cradle from their respective packing and inspect for damage If the digital scanner or cradle was damaged in transit contact Motorola Solutions Support See page xxii for contact information KEEP THE PACKING It is the approved shipping container and should be used if the equipment ever needs to be returned for servicing Getting Started Parts Scanner Scan Window Beeper Battery Door Latch Metal Charging Contacts Figure 1 2 Parts of the Digital Scanner e 1 4 DS6878 Product Reference Guide CRO0078 S CRO008 S Series Cradle Pairing Bar Code PAIR Convertible Mount Hook Charging LED Latch Latch Charging Communications Contacts Figure 1 3 CR0O078 S CRO008 S Series Cradle Front View Getting Started 1 5 Mounting Hole Rubber Foot Rubber Foot Host Cable Hook Host Cable Groove Power Cable Groove Desk Wall Mount Converter Knob Rubber Foot Mounting Hole Figure 1 4 CR0078 S CR0008 S Series Cradle Back View 1 6 DS6878 Product Reference Guide CRO0078 P Series Cradle Latch Charging Communication Contacts Page Button LED Figure 1 5 CR0078 P Cradle Front View Power Cable Host Cable Groove Rubber Foot Rubber Foot Host Cable Groove Power Cable Groove Cable Support Hook Power Port Cable Support Hook Mounting Hole Host Port Mounting Hole Rubber Foot Rubber Foot Figure 1 6 CR0078 P Crad
170. al scanner can expect to find in an image Each element represents one bar code in the digital scanner s field of view The order of elements in the expression is the order in which bar code data from each element transmits to the host Elements are defined using one or more of the following methods By Region This type of element limits decoding to a specific area within the digital scanner s field of view Region coordinates are defined as the top left and bottom right corners of the region expressed in percentages of the field of view These can range from 0 to 100 or 0x00 to 0x64 in hex for both horizontal and vertical axes A region element is constructed as R 4 Top Left Bottom Right Where e R is the character R e 4 is 0x04 indicating there are four bytes thereafter to describe the region e Top Left are two values representing the top left corner of the region e Bottom Right are two values representing the bottom right corner of the region By Code Type An element can specify a specific bar code symbology to find and decode somewhere in the field of view A code type element is constructed as C 2 Code Type 5 38 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Where e C is the character C e 2 is 0x02 indicating there are two bytes thereafter to describe the code type e Code Type is the desired symbology s parameter number see Chapter 15 Symbologies For single byte parameter numbers extend the va
171. all the Human Interface Device driver To install this driver provided by Windows click Next through all the choices and click Finished on the last choice The cradle powers up during this installation 5 To modify any other parameter options scan the appropriate bar codes in this chapter J NOTE Interface cables vary depending on configuration The connectors illustrated in Figure 7 1 are examples only The connectors may be different than those illustrated but the steps to connect the digital scanner cradle remain the same If problems occur with the system see Troubleshooting on page 3 4 7 4 DS6878 Product Reference Guide USB Parameter Defaults Table 7 1 lists the defaults for USB host parameters If any option needs to be changed scan the appropriate bar code s provided in the Parameter Descriptions section beginning on page 7 5 J NOTE See Appendix A Standard Default Parameters for all user preferences hosts symbologies and miscellaneous default parameters Table 7 41 USB Host Default Table Parameter Default Page Number USB Host Parameters USB Device Type HID Keyboard Emulation 7 5 Symbol Native API SNAPI Status Handshaking Enable 7 7 USB Country Keyboard Types Country Codes North American 7 8 USB Keystroke Delay No Delay 7 10 USB CAPS Lock Override Disable 7 10 USB Ignore Unknown Characters Send 7 11 USB Convert Unknown to Code 39 Disable 7 11
172. ame scan the following bar code then scan up to 23 characters from Appendix E Alphanumeric Bar Codes If the name contains less than 23 characters scan End of Message on page E 7 after entering the name J NOTE f your application allows you to set a device name this takes precedence over the Bluetooth Friendly Name Bluetooth Friendly Name Discoverable Mode Select a discoverable mode based on the device initiating discovery e Select General Discoverable Mode when initiating connection from a PC e Select Limited Discoverable Mode when initiating connection from a mobile device eg Motorola Q and the device does not appear in General Discoverable Mode Note that it can take longer to discover the device in this mode The device remains in Limited Discoverable Mode for 30 seconds and green LEDs flash while in this mode It is then non discoverable To re active Limited Discoverable Mode press the trigger S General Discoverable Mode Limited Discoverable Mode 4 8 DS6878 Product Reference Guide HID Host Parameters The digital scanner supports keyboard emulation over the Bluetooth HID profile In this mode the digital scanner can interact with Bluetooth enabled hosts supporting the HID profile as a Bluetooth keyboard Scanned data is transmitted to the host as keystrokes Following are the keyboard parameters supported by the HID host HID Country Keyboard Types Country Codes Scan the bar code corresponding to t
173. amming Use the following suggestions if encountering problems programming a multicode expression e Ensure the expression is valid Invalid expressions are rejected during programming When an expression is rejected the previous expression remains intact H after programming the expression the digital scanner can still decode any bar code the expression was possibly rejected e When programming the multicode expression via parameter bar code the digital scanner generates beeps If any of the following beeps do not sound during programming an error occurred see Table 2 1 on page 2 1 and Table 2 2 on page 2 3 for error indicators e Scanning the Multicode Expression bar code produces a two tone same pitch beep e Scanning each value of the expression produces a two tone same pitch beep e Scanning the End Of Message bar code produces a four tone high low high low beep e Check the expression for syntax errors e Try programming a simple expression to ensure the syntax is correct See Examples of Simple Multicode Expressions e Review Defining Multicode Expression Notes on page 5 38 for additional hints Troubleshooting Multicode Mode Scanning and Decoding Use the following suggestions if encountering problems using multicode mode e Ifthe digital scanner appears to decode any single bar code instead of the intended multiple bar codes ensure you enabled Multicode Mode on page 5 36 Programming the multicode expression does not enable
174. amples can not be decoded d H d TEL a En Be 012345 Figure 2 5 Acceptable and Incorrect Aiming Scanning 2 9 Decode Ranges Table 2 6 DS6878 SR DS6878 HC DS6878 DL Decode Ranges Typical Working Ranges Symbol Density Bar Code Type Near Far 5 mil Code 39 0 7 6 6 13 mil 100 UPC 1 2 14 2 5 mil PDF 2 0 4 5 6 6 mil PDF 1 2 6 0 10 mil Data Matrix 1 1 7 2 Table 2 7 DS6878 HD Decode Ranges Typical Working Ranges Symbol Density Bar Code Type Near Far 3 mil Code 39 0 6 3 4 5 mil Code 39 FOV2 4 9 13 mil 100 UPC 1 2 6 8 4 mil PDF 0 9 2 8 10 mil Data Matrix 0 6 4 2 a Field of View 2 10 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Chapter 3 Maintenance Troubleshooting amp Technical Specifications Introduction This chapter provides suggested digital scanner and cradle maintenance troubleshooting technical specifications and signal descriptions pinouts Maintenance Digital Scanner Cleaning the exit window is required A dirty window may affect scanning accuracy e Do not allow any abrasive material to touch the window e Remove any dirt particles with a damp cloth e Wipe the scanner window using a tissue moistened with an approved cleanser listed below e Do not spray water or other cleaning liquids directly into the window The DS6878 HC design allows safe cleansing of the product plastics with a variety of cleaning products and
175. ar code for the keystroke to send Send Control 2 Send Control A Send Control B Advanced Data Formatting 16 47 Control Characters continued Send Control C Send Control D Send Control E Send Control F Send Control G Send Control H Send Control I 16 48 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Control Characters continued Send Control J Send Control L Send Control N Send Control P Send Control K Send Control M Send Control O Advanced Data Formatting 16 49 Control Characters continued Send Control Q Send Control R Send Control S Send Control T Send Control U Send Control V
176. ar codes containing at least one unknown character are not sent to the decoder and a convert error beep sounds Ignore Unknown Characters Convert Error On Unknown Characters Leading Margin Scan a bar code below to select a leading margin duration 1 ms Leading Margin 2 ms Leading Margin 3 ms Leading Margin 12 10 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Leading Margin continued 5 ms Leading Margin 10 ms Leading Margin Check For Decode LED The attached decoder normally asserts the Decode line to signal to the Scanner Emulation host that it successfully decoded the transmitted bar code Some decoders however do not assert the Decode signal In this case the digital scanner emits transmit error beeps to indicate that the bar code was not successfully transmitted Scan the Ignore Decode LED bar code to disable the Transmit Error beeps Check For Decode LED Ignore Decode LED Chapter 13 123Scan2 Introduction 123Scan is an easy to use PC based software tool that enables rapid and easy customized setup of Motorola scanners 123Scan uses a wizard tool to guide users through a streamlined set up process Settings are saved ina configuration file that can be distributed via e mail electronically downloaded via a USB cable or used to generate a sheet of scannable program
177. are trademarks or registered trademarks of Motorola Trademark Holding LLC and are used under license All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners 2012 Motorola Solutions Inc All rights reserved 72E 131700 03 Revision A January 2012
178. ata Formatting The default is 54R which accepts any character OCR strings OCR Template End of Message Required Digit 9 9 Only a numeric character is allowed in this position Template Valid data Valid data Invalid data 99999 12987 30517 123AB Required Alpha A Only an alpha character is allowed in this position A Template Valid data Valid data Invalid data AAA ABC WXY 12F OCR Programming 14 17 Optional Alphanumeric 1 1 When this option appears in the template string the data validator accepts an alphanumeric character if present Optional characters are not allowed as the first character s in a field of like characters Template Valid data Valid data Invalid data 99991 1234A 12345 1234 lt Optional Alpha 2 When this option appears in the template string the data validator accepts an alpha character if present Optional characters are not allowed as the first character s in a field of like characters 2 Template Valid data Valid data Invalid data AAAA2 ABCDE WXYZ ABCD6 Alpha or Digit 3 The data validator requires an alphanumeric character in this position to validate the incoming data 3 Template Valid data Valid data Invalid data 33333 12ABC WXY34 12AB lt 14 18 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Any Including Space amp Reject 4 The template accepts any character in this position including space an
179. ation of the letters or numbers encoded within a bar code symbol Decryption Decryption is the decoding and unscrambling of received encrypted data Also see Encryption and Key Depth of Field The range between minimum and maximum distances at which a scanner can read a symbol with a certain minimum element width Discrete Code A bar code or symbol in which the spaces between characters intercharacter gaps are not part of the code Discrete 2 of 5 A binary bar code symbology representing each character by a group of five bars two of which are wide The location of wide bars in the group determines which character is encoded spaces are insignificant Only numeric characters 0 to 9 and START STOP characters may be encoded E EAN European Article Number This European International version of the UPC provides its own coding format and symbology standards Element dimensions are specified metrically EAN is used primarily in retail Element Generic term for a bar or space Encoded Area Total linear dimension occupied by all characters of a code pattern including start stop characters and data ENQ RS 232 ENQ software handshaking is also supported for the data sent to the host ESD Electro Static Discharge H HID Human Interface Device A Bluetooth host type Host Computer A computer that serves other terminals in a network providing such services as computation database access supervisory programs and network c
180. attempt connection When you hear a beep indicating the digital scanner is waiting for an alphanumeric entry enter the provided variable PIN using the Alphanumeric Bar Codes on page E 1 then scan End of Message on page E 7 if the code is less than 16 characters The digital scanner discards the variable PIN code after connection Static PIN Code Variable PIN Code 4 28 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Encryption J NOTE Authentication must be performed before Encryption can take effect To set up the digital scanner for enabling Encryption scan Enable Encryption To prevent the digital scanner from enabling Encryption scan Disable Encryption When enabled the radio encrypts data Enable Encryption Disable Encryption Chapter 5 User Preferences amp Miscella neous Digital Scanner Options Introduction If desired program the digital scanner to perform various functions or activate different features This chapter describes imaging preference features and provides programming bar codes for selecting these features The digital scanner ships with the settings in User Preferences Parameter Defaults on page 5 2 also see Appendix A Standard Default Parameters for all host device and miscellaneous defaults If the default values suit requirements programming is not necessary To set feature values scan a single bar code or a short bar code sequence The se
181. available If Standard RTS CTS handshaking is selected scan data is transmitted according to the following sequence e The digital scanner reads the CTS line for activity If CTS is asserted the digital scanner waits up to Host Serial Response Time out for the host to de assert the CTS line If after Host Serial Response Time out the CTS line is still asserted the digital scanner sounds a transmit error and any scanned data is lost e When the CTS line is de asserted the digital scanner asserts the RTS line and waits up to Host Serial Response Time out for the host to assert CTS When the host asserts CTS data is transmitted If after Host Serial Response Time out the CTS line is not asserted the digital scanner sounds a transmit error and discards the data e When data transmission is complete the digital scanner de asserts RTS 10 msec after sending the last character e The host should respond by negating CTS The digital scanner checks for a de asserted CTS upon the next transmission of data During the transmission of data the CTS line should be asserted If CTS is de asserted for more than 50 ms between characters the transmission is aborted the digital scanner sounds a transmission error and the data is discarded If the above communication sequence fails the digital scanner issues an error indication In this case the data is lost and must be rescanned If Hardware Handshaking and Software Handshaking are both enabled
182. aves a remainder of 9 Digit Add Right to Left Simple Remainder 06h Health Industry HIBCC43 This is the health industry module 43 check digit standard Health Industry HIBCC43 09h 14 32 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Chapter 15 Symbologies Introduction This chapter describes symbology features and provides programming bar codes for selecting these features Before programming follow the instructions in Chapter 1 Getting Started To set feature values scan a single bar code or a short bar code sequence The settings are stored in non volatile memory and are preserved even when the digital scanner powers down lt J NOTE Most computer monitors allow scanning the bar codes directly on the screen When scanning from the screen be sure to set the document magnification to a level where you can see the bar code clearly and bars and or spaces do not merge Select a host type see each host chapter for specific host information after the power up beeps sound This is only necessary upon the first power up when connected to a new host To return all features to default values scan the Default Parameters on page 5 5 Throughout the programming bar code menus asterisks indicate default values D indicates Defaut Enable UPC A Feature Option Oth ae Option Hex Value Scanning
183. balances bar code swipe speed the speed a bar code can pass through the field of view and still be read and decode range distance between the digital scanner and the bar code for optimal performance on standard paper based bar codes e Enhanced Presentation Mode is also optimized for general purpose paper based scanning but provides for a faster bar code swipe speed and shorter decode range than Standard Presentation Mode This mode is recommended for applications requiring the highest bar code swipe speed e g automated scanning or a reduced decode range eg to better match EAS deactivation range or reduce the occurrence of inadvertent reads during hands free operation e Traditional Presentation Mode is optimized for applications that require frequent reading of bar codes from mobile phones or PC displays This mode allows more time for the digital scanner to analyze each bar code improving performance on challenging bar codes such as those on a mobile phone display where the backlight has dimmed This mode is also recommended for applications that include many truncated or poor quality bar codes Because swipe speed is reduced present bar codes to the digital scanner rather than swiping them when using this mode Standard Presentation Mode 02h Enhanced Presentation Mode 00h Traditional Presentation Mode 03h 5 16 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Low Power Mode Parameter 80h If enabled the digital scanner enters a
184. bar code then scan a three digit number between 003 and 100 using the numeric keypad in Chapter 16 Advanced Data Formatting representing the number of OCR characters to decode Strings of OCR characters less than the minimum are ignored The default is 003 OCR Minimum Characters OCR Programming 14 13 OCR Maximum Characters Parameter F1 B2h To select the maximum number of OCR characters including spaces per line to decode scan the following bar code then scan a three digit number between 003 and 100 using the numeric keypad in Chapter 16 Advanced Data Formatting represents the number of OCR characters to decode Strings of OCR characters greater than the maximum are ignored The default is 100 OCR Maximum Characters OCR Security Level Parameter F1 2Ah To select the OCR decoding security confidence level scan the following bar code then scan a two digit number using the numeric keypad in Chapter 16 Advanced Data Formatting represents the level of confidence Greater numbers minimize OCR decoding errors but reduce performance Setting a value that is too high can result in failure to decode Setting a value that is too low can cause decoding errors The range of the security level is 10 90 and the default is 80 OCR Security Level 14 14 DS6
185. bar code Four short beeps Low battery warning Five low long beeps Conversion or format error Table 2 1 Beeper Sequence Low beep 2 2 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Standard Beeper Definitions Continued Indication Digital scanner detects power when inserted into a cradle Note This feature is enabled by default and can be disabled see Beep on Insertion on page 5 10 Low high low high beeps Out of memory unable to store a new bar code Low high low beeps ADF transmit error High high high low beeps RS 232 receive error Parameter Menu Scanning Long low long high beeps Input error incorrect bar code or Cancel scanned wrong entry incorrect bar code programming sequence remain in program mode High low beeps Keyboard parameter selected Enter value using bar code keypad High low high low beeps Successful program exit with change in the parameter setting Long low long high long low long high beeps Out of host parameter storage space Scan Default Parameters on page 5 5 Image Capture Low beep Snapshot mode started or completed High low beeps Snapshot mode timed out Wireless Operation High low high low beeps Pairing bar code scanned Low high beeps Bluetooth connection established High low beeps Bluetooth disconnection event Note When connected to a remote device using SPP or HID if a di
186. been received by the host Check the host system for receipt of transmitted data If data was not received by the host re scan the bar code Digital Scanner emits five low long beeps Conversion or format error Check ADF rules for the host Decoding Bar Codes Digital Scanner emits the laser but does not decode the bar code Digital Scanner is not programmed for the correct bar code type Program the digital scanner to read that type of bar code See Chapter 15 Symbologies Bar code symbol is unreadable Scan test symbols of the same bar code type to determine if the bar code is defaced Distance between digital scanner and bar code is incorrect Move the digital scanner closer to or further from the bar code See Decode Ranges on page 2 9 The scan line is not crossing every bar and space of the symbol Move the symbol until the scan line is within the acceptable aiming pattern See Figure 2 1 on page 2 6 Digital Scanner decodes bar code but does not transmit the data to the host Digital Scanner is not programmed for the correct host type Scan the appropriate host type programming bar code See the chapter corresponding to the host type Interface cable is loose Ensure all cable connections are secure Cradle is not programmed for the correct host interface Check digital scanner host parameters or edit options Digital Scanner not paire
187. c Snapshot Mode Timeout Snapshot Aiming Pattern Parameter F0h 2Ch Select Enable Snapshot Aiming Pattern to project the aiming pattern when in Snapshot Mode or Disable Snapshot Aiming Pattern to turn the aiming pattern off Enable Snapshot Aiming Pattern 01h Disable Snapshot Aiming Pattern 00h 6 8 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Image Cropping Parameter FO0h 2Dh This parameter crops a captured image Select Disable Image Cropping to present the full 752 x 480 pixels Select Enable Image Cropping to crop the image to the pixel addresses set in Crop to Pixel Addresses on page 6 9 Enable Image Cropping 01h Disable Image Cropping Use Full 752 x 480 Pixels 00h Imaging Preferences 6 9 Crop to Pixel Addresses Parameter F4h FOh 3Bh Top Parameter F4h FOh 3Ch Left Parameter F4h FO0h 3Dh Bottom Parameter F4h FOh 3Eh Right If you selected Enable Image Cropping set the pixel addresses from 0 0 to 751 479 to crop to Columns are numbered from 0 to 751 rows from 0 to 479 Specify four values for Top Left Bottom and Right where Top and Bottom correspond to row pixel addresses and Left and Right corresp
188. c Code 39 and Code 39 Full ASCII simultaneously 15 32 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Convert Code 39 to Code 32 Parameter 56h Code 32 is a variant of Code 39 used by the Italian pharmaceutical industry Scan the appropriate bar code below to enable or disable converting Code 39 to Code 32 J NOTE Code 39 must be enabled for this parameter to function Enable Convert Code 39 to Code 32 01h Disable Convert Code 39 to Code 32 00h Code 32 Prefix Parameter E7h Scan the appropriate bar code below to enable or disable adding the prefix character A to all Code 32 bar codes i NOTE Convert Code 39 to Code 32 must be enabled for this parameter to function Enable Code 32 Prefix 01h Disable Code 32 Prefix 00h Symbologies 15 33 Set Lengths for Code 39 Parameter L1 12h L2 13h The length of a code refers to the number of characters i e human readable characters including check digit s the code contains Set lengths for Code 39 to any length one or two discrete lengths or lengths within a specific range If Code 39 Full ASCII is enabled Length Within a Range or Any Length are the preferred options J NOTE When setting lengths for different bar code types enter a leading zero for single digit numbers e One Discrete Length Select this option to decode only Code 39 symbols containing a selected length Select the length using the numeric bar codes in Appendix D Numeric Bar Codes For examp
189. cable Non charging Cradle 5V 70mA or 12 V 50 mA Color Cash Register White or Twilight Black HC Configuration Healthcare White Power Requirements 4 75 14 0 VDC Performance Characteristics Interfaces Supported CR0078 S only Features on board Multiple Interface with RS 232C Standard Nixdorf ICL amp Fujitsu IBM 468x 469x Keyboard Wedge USB Standard IBM SurePOS Macintosh SSI Laser Wand Emulation 123Scan Remote Digital Scanner Management In addition Synapse allows for connectivity to all of the above plus many non standard interfaces User Environment Operating Temperature 32 to 122 F 0 to 50 C Storage Temperature 40 to 158 F 40 to 70 C Charging Temperature 32 to 104 F 0 to 40 C nominal 41 to 95 F 5 to 35 C ideal Humidity 5 to 95 non condensing Maintenance Troubleshooting amp Technical Specifications 3 11 Table 3 3 Technical Specifications CROO78 S CR0008 Cradle Continued Item Description Accessories Mounting Options Desktop mount on a wall computer work station or medical cart Power Supplies Power supplies are available for applications that do not supply power over host cable Table 3 4 Technical Specifications CRO078 P Cradle Item Description Physical Characteristics Dimensions 5 4 in Lx 4in W x 3 6 in H Weight Approximately 7 9 oz V
190. ce Guide Move Cursor Scan a bar code below to move the cursor in relation to a specified character Then enter a character by scanning a bar code from the Alphanumeric Keyboard on page 16 90 lt J NOTE f there is no match and the rule fails the next rule is checked Move Cursor To Character Move Cursor To Start Move Cursor Past Character Move Cursor Past Specific String Move Cursor to Specific String and Replace Advanced Data Formatting 16 31 Move Cursor continued Move Cursor to Last Occurrence of String and Replace All Skip to End Send Pause Scan the bar code below to insert a pause in the transmission of data See Pause Duration on page 16 8 to set the length of this pause Send Pause 16 32 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Skip Ahead Use the following bar codes to skip ahead characters Skip Ahead 1 Character Skip Ahead 2 Characters Skip Ahead 3 Characters Skip Ahead 4 Characters Skip Ahead 5 Characters Skip Ahead 6 Characters
191. ces hosts symbologies and miscellaneous default parameters Table 8 1 RS 232 Host Default Table Parameter Default alee RS 232 Host Parameters RS 232 Host Types Standard 8 6 Baud Rate 9600 8 8 CRO0078 P Baud Rate None 8 8 Parity Type None 8 10 Data Bits ASCII Format 8 Bit 8 11 Check Receive Errors Enable 8 11 Hardware Handshaking None 8 12 Software Handshaking None 8 14 Host Serial Response Time out 2 sec 8 16 RTS Line State Low RTS 8 17 Beep on lt BEL gt Disable 8 17 Intercharacter Delay 0 msec 8 18 Nixdorf Beep LED Options Normal Operation 8 19 Ignore Unknown Characters Send Bar Code 8 19 8 4 DS6878 Product Reference Guide RS 232 Host Parameters Various RS 232 hosts are set up with their own parameter default settings Table 8 2 Selecting the ICL Fujitsu Wincor Nixdorf Mode A Wincor Nixdorf Mode B Olivetti Omron or terminal sets the defaults listed below Table 8 2 Terminal Specific RS 232 Wincor Wincor Parameter Fujitsu Nixdorf Nixdorf Mode Olivetti Mode A B OPOS JPOS Transmit Code ID Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Data Transmission Data Suffix Data Suffix Data Suffix Data Suffix Prefix Data Data Suffix Prefix Data Format Suffix Suffix Suffix CR 1013 CR 1013 CR 1013 CR 1013 ETX 1002 CR 1013 CR 1013 ETX 1003 Baud Rate 9600 9600 9600 9600 9600 9600 9600 Parity Even None Odd Odd Even None Even
192. cial Third Party Publicly Available Software Legal Notices Publicly available software list Name Regular Expression Evaluator Version 8 3 Description Compiles and executes regular expressions Software Site http www freebsd org cgi cvsweb caqi src lib libc regex Source Code No Source Distribution Obligations Motorola will not provide nor distribute the Source Code for the Regular Expression Evaluator License BSD Style License 1992 Henry Spencer 1992 1993 The Regents of the University of California All rights reserved This code is derived from software contributed to Berkeley by Henry Spencer of the University of Toronto Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met 1 Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer 2 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution 3 All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgement This product includes software developed by the University of California Berkeley and its contributors 4 Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote produ
193. clockwise to lock the latch in place Getting Started 1 13 Inserting the Digital Scanner in the Cradle Insert the digital scanner in the cradle so that the metal contacts on the bottom of the digital scanner handle touch the contacts on the cradle Push the handle lightly to ensure a proper connection engaging the contacts in the cradle and digital scanner Ensure the desk wall mount converter knob on the back of the cradle is in the correct position for the horizontal or vertical mounting J NOTE References to mounting the cradle only apply to the CR0078 S CR0008 S cradle not the CR0078 P cradle 1 14 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Inserting Digital Scanner in the CR0078 S CR0008 S Cradle Horizontal Cradle Mount When mounting the cradle horizontally where no fastening is necessary 1 Ensure the rubber feet are attached to the cradle These feet provide traction and prevent surface damage 2 Ensure the desk wall mount converter knob is in the position shown in Figure 1 10 Desk Wall Mount Converter Knob Figure 1 10 Horizontal Mount Inserting the Digital Scanner in the Cradle Vertical Cradle Mount When mounting the cradle vertically 1 Ensure the rubber feet are attached to the cradle These feet provide traction and prevent surface damage 2 Ensure the convertible mount hook on the front of the cradle is inserted with the hook facing up If not remove and reverse the hook so that it is in position to secure
194. connect the cradle remain the same Scanner Emulation Interface If a power supply is used disconnect the power supply before changing host cables or the cradle may not recognize the new host CAUTION Connect the cradle to a 5 volt decoder only Connecting the cradle to a 12 volt decoder can damage the digital scanner and invalidate the warranty Scanner Emulation Parameter Defaults Table 12 1 lists the defaults for the Scanner Emulation host To change any option scan the appropriate bar code s provided in the Scanner Emulation Host Parameters section beginning on page 12 4 J NOTE See Appendix A Standard Default Parameters for all user preferences hosts symbologies and miscellaneous default parameters Table 12 1 Scanner Emulation Default Table Parameter Default Page Number Beep Style Beep on Successful Transmit 12 4 Parameter Pass Through Parameter Process and Pass Through 12 5 Convert Newer Code Types Convert Newer Code Types 12 6 Module Width 20 us 12 6 Convert All Bar Codes to Code 39 Do Not Convert Bar Codes to Code 39 12 7 Code 39 Full ASCII Conversion Disable 12 7 Transmission Timeout 3 sec 12 8 Ignore Unknown Characters Ignore Unknown Characters 12 9 Leading Margin 2ms 12 9 Check for Decode LED Check for Decode LED 12 10 1User selection is required to configure this interface and this is the most common selection Scanner Emulation Host Scan the bar code below to enable the Sca
195. connected to a new host To return all features to default values scan a default bar code in Default Parameters on page 5 5 Throughout the programming bar code menus default values are indicated with asterisks Indicates Default Enable Pair on Contacts Feature Option Scanning Sequence Examples In most cases scan one bar code to set a specific parameter value Errors While Scanning Unless otherwise specified to correct an error during a scanning sequence just re scan the correct parameter 4 2 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Radio Communications Parameter Defaults Table 4 1 lists the defaults for radio communication parameters If you wish to change any option scan the appropriate bar code s provided in the Radio Communications Parameters section beginning on page 4 4 J NOTE See Appendix A Standard Default Parameters for all user preferences hosts symbologies and miscellaneous default parameters Table 4 1 Radio Communication Default Table Parameter Default ee Bluetooth Host Host Type Cradle Host 4 4 Discoverable Mode General 4 7 Country Keyboard Types Country Code North American 4 8 HID Keyboard Keystroke Delay No Delay 0 msec 4 10 CAPS Lock Override Disable 4 10 Ignore Unknown Characters Enable 4 11 Emulate Keypad Disable 4 11 Keyboard FN1 Substitution Disable 4 12 Function Key Mapping Disable 4 12 Simulated Caps Lock Disable 4
196. containing any number of characters within the digital scanner s capability 15 54 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Set Lengths for MSI continued S NOTE Due to the construction of the MSI symbology it is possible for a scan line covering only a portion of the code to transmit as a complete scan yielding less data than is encoded in the bar code To prevent this select specific lengths MSI One Discrete Length Two Discrete Lengths for MSI applications MSI One Discrete Length MSI Two Discrete Lengths MSI Length Within Range MSI Any Length Symbologies 15 55 MSI Check Digits With MSI symbols one check digit is mandatory and always verified by the reader The second check digit is optional If the MSI codes include two check digits scan the Two MSI Check Digits bar code to enable verification of the second check digit See MSI Check Digit Algorithm on page 15 56 for the selection of second digit algorithms One MSI Check Digit 00h Two MSI Check Digits 01h Transmit MSI Check Digit s Scan a bar code below to transmit MSI data with or without the check digit Transmit MSI Check Digit s Enable 01h Do Not Transmit M
197. cradle disconnect it If using an interface cable insert the cable into the cradle s host port See Figure 1 7 If using a power supply that connects to the interface cable insert this power supply into the power connector on the interface cable and the other end to an AC supply Insert the other end of the interface cable into the appropriate port on the host computer see the specific host chapter for information on host connections If using an external power supply if required by the interface or to allow fast charging of the digital scanner insert the power cable into the power port on the back of the cradle and connect the power supply to an approved AC supply refer to the CRO078 S CRO008 S Cradle Quick Reference Guide for more information Host Port Power Host Port Power Port Connect to appropriate host Figure 1 7 Connecting the Cables to the CR0078 S CR0008 S Cradle 6 If applicable thread the interface cable over the cable support hook and run the host and power cables into their respective cable grooves Mount the cradle as necessary For information on mounting the cradle refer to the documentation included with the cradle V NOTE Disconnect the power supply before changing host cables or the cradle may not recognize the new host Different cables are required for different hosts The connectors illustrated in each host chapter are examples only The connectors may be dif
198. ct Reference Guide Connecting a Keyboard Wedge Interface J NOTE See Chapter 4 Radio Communications for information about digital scanner cradle pairing and wireless communication The digital scanner must be connected to the cradle for the host parameter setting to take effect When the digital scanner is not connected to a cradle and a host parameter bar code is scanned a long low long high beep sequence sounds Male DIN Connector Keyboard Connector Female DIN Keyboard Y cable Connector Figure 9 1 Keyboard Wedge Connection with Y cable To connect the Keyboard Wedge interface Y cable 1 Turn off the host and unplug the keyboard connector 2 Attach the modular connector of the Y cable to the host port on the bottom of the digital scanner cradle see Connecting the CR0078 S CR0008 S Series Cradle on page 1 8 or Connecting the CR0078 P Series Cradle on page 1 10 3 Connect the round male DIN host connector of the Y cable to the keyboard port on the host device 4 Connect the round female DIN keyboard connector of the Y cable to the keyboard connector 5 If needed attach the optional power supply to the connector in the middle of the Y cable 6 Ensure that all connections are secure 7 Turn on the host system 8 Select the Keyboard Wedge host type by scanning the appropriate bar code from Keyboard Wedge Host Parameters on page 9 4 9 To modify any other parameter options scan the appropriate bar codes in this chap
199. cts derived from this software without specific prior written permission THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS AG IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE Motorola Solutions Inc One Motorola Plaza Holtsville New York 11742 1300 http Awww motorolasolutions com Warranty For the complete Motorola Solutions hardware product warranty statement go to http www motorola com enterprisemobility warranty iv DS6878 Product Reference Guide Revision History Changes to the original manual are listed below Change 01 Rev A Date 4 2010 Description Initial release 02 RevA 3 2011 Add CR0078 P cradle FIPS configurations Imaging Preferences chapter Hands Free scanning instructions Page Button Chapter 7 Snapi Parameters Simple COM Port Emulation Quick Keypad Emulatio
200. d UA WI Send AM Send VARTA Send A WHO Send du E Send AA Senda du d Send b Advanced Data Formatting 16 61 Keyboard Characters continued Ad Send c DA Send d AA Send e NEO Send f AAT Send g du W Send h Arial Send i 16 62 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Keyboard Characters continued Send j Send Send n Send p Send k Send m Send o Advanced Data Formatting 16 63 Keyboard Characters continued AAA Send o du N Send r AA Send s NIE Sendt AA Send u du ul Send v VAAN A Send w 16 64 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Keyboard Characters continued Send x Send z Send Send Send y Send Send Advanced Data Formatting 16 65 Send ALT Characters Send Alt 2 Send Alt MINN Send Alt A A Mu Send Alt B VATA Send Alt C A Mu Send Alt D VIII Send Alt E 16 66 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Send A
201. d Space 17 42 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Parsing Rule Example continued 7 Last Name Send Enter Key 9 Mailing Address Line 1 10 Send Space 11 Mailing Address Line 2 12 Send Enter Key Driver s License Set Up DS6878 DL 17 43 Parsing Rule Example continued 13 Mailing Address City 14 Send Space 15 Mailing Address State 16 Send Space 17 Mailing Address Postal Code 17 44 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Parsing Rule Example continued 18 Send Enter Key 19 Birth Date 20 Send Enter Key 21 Save Driver s Licence Parse Rule Driver s License Set Up DS6878 DL 17 45 Embedded Driver s License Parsing ADF Example This example creates a parsing rule for parsed data configured to result in the format Last Name First Name 1 Begin New Driver s License Parse Rule 2
202. d by common physical characteristics signal characteristics and signal meanings Types of interfaces include RS 232 and PCMCIA K Key A key is the specific code used by the algorithm to encrypt or decrypt the data Also see Encryption and Decrypting L LASER Light Amplification by Stimulated Emission of Radiation The laser is an intense light source Light from a laser is all the same frequency unlike the output of an incandescent bulb Laser light is typically coherent and has a high energy density Laser Diode A gallium arsenide semiconductor type of laser connected to a power source to generate a laser beam This laser type is a compact source of coherent light Laser Scanner A type of bar code reader that uses a beam of laser light LED Indicator A semiconductor diode LED Light Emitting Diode used as an indicator often in digital displays The semiconductor uses applied voltage to produce light of a certain frequency determined by the semiconductor s particular chemical composition Glossary 5 Light Emitting Diode See LED M MIL 1 mil 1 thousandth of an inch MIN Mobile Identification Number The unique account number associated with a cellular device It is broadcast by the cellular device when accessing the cellular system Misread Misdecode A condition which occurs when the data output of a reader or interface controller does not agree with the data encoded within a bar code symbol MRD M
203. d reject Rejects are represented as an underscore _ in the output This is a good selection for troubleshooting 4 Template Valid data Valid data 99499 12 34 34_98 Any except Space amp Reject 5 5 The template accepts any character in this position except a space or reject Template Valid data Valid data Invalid data 55999 A 123 Z456 A BCD Optional Digit 7 When this option appears in the template string the template accepts a numeric character if present Optional characters are not allowed as the first character s in a field of like characters 7 Template Valid data Valid data Invalid data 99977 12345 789 789AB OCR Programming 14 19 Digit or Fill 8 The data validator accepts any numeric or fill character in this position 8 Template Valid data Valid data Invalid data 88899 12345 gt gt 789 lt lt 789 Alpha or Fill F F The data validator accepts any alpha or fill character in this position Template Valid data Valid data Invalid data AAAFF ABCXY LMN gt gt ABC lt 5 Required Space When this option appears in the template string the template accepts a space if present Optional characters are not allowed as the first character s in a field of like characters Space Template Valid data Invalid data 99 99 12 34 67891 14 20 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Optional Small Special When this option appears in the template string the data va
204. d to host connected interface Pair the digital scanner to the cradle by scanning the PAIR bar code on the cradle Table 3 1 Troubleshooting Continued Problem Maintenance Troubleshooting amp Technical Specifications Possible Causes Cradle has lost connection to host Possible Solutions In this exact order disconnect power supply disconnect host cable wait three seconds reconnect host cable reconnect power supply reestablish pairing Digital Scanner emits five long low beep after a bar code is decoded Conversion or format error was detected The digital scanner s conversion parameters are not properly configured Ensure the digital scanner s conversion parameters are properly configured Conversion or format error was detected An ADF rule was set up with characters that can t be sent for the host selected Change the ADF rule or change to a host that can support the ADF rule Conversion or format error was detected A bar code was scanned with characters that can t be sent for that host Change the bar code or change to a host that can support the bar code Host Displays Host displays scanned data incorrectly Digital Scanner is not programmed to work with the host Ensure the proper host is selected Scan the appropriate host type programming bar code For RS 232 ensure the digital scanner s communication parameters match the host
205. d you do not want a delay to occur when the first bar code is transmitted Note that auto reconnect does not occur on rejection and cable unplug commands e Disable Auto reconnect When the digital scanner loses connection you must re establish it manually Auto reconnect on Bar Code Data Auto reconnect Immediately Disable Auto reconnect Out of Range Indicator An out of range indicator can be set by scanning Enable Beep on Reconnect Attempt on page 4 15 and extending the time using the Reconnect Attempt Interval on page 4 16 For example with Beep on Reconnect Attempt disabled while the digital scanner loses radio connection when it is taken out of range the digital scanner attempts to reconnect silently during the time interval set by scanning a Reconnect Attempt Interval When Beep on Reconnect Attempt is enabled the digital scanner emits 5 high beeps every 5 seconds while the reconnection attempt is in progress If the Reconnect Attempt Interval is adjusted to a longer period of time such as 30 minutes the digital scanner emits 5 high beeps every 5 seconds for 30 minutes providing an out of range indicator 4 18 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Digital Scanner s To Cradle Support Modes of Operation The charging cradle with radio supports two radio communication modes of operation allowing the digital scanner to communicate wirelessly e Point to Point e Multipoint to Point Point to Point Communication In Point
206. de 39 Check Digit Verification 30h Disable 15 34 Transmit Code 39 Check Digit 2Bh Disable 15 34 Code 39 Full ASCII Conversion 11h Disable 15 35 Buffer Code 39 71h Disable 15 35 Code 93 Code 93 09h Disable 15 38 Set Length s for Code 93 1Ah 1Bh 4 to 55 15 38 15 4 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Table 15 1 Parameter Defaults Continued Parameter e Default Pt el Code 11 Code 11 OAh Disable 15 40 Set Lengths for Code 11 1Ch 1Dh 4 to 55 15 40 Code 11 Check Digit Verification 34h Disable 15 42 Transmit Code 11 Check Digit s 2Fh Disable 15 43 Interleaved 2 of 5 ITF Interleaved 2 of 5 ITF 06h Disable 15 44 Set Lengths for 2 of 5 16h 17h 14 15 44 2 of 5 Check Digit Verification 31h Disable 15 46 Transmit 2 of 5 Check Digit 2Ch Disable 15 46 Convert 2 of 5 to EAN 13 52h Disable 15 47 Discrete 2 of 5 DTF Discrete 2 of 5 05h Disable 15 47 Set Length s for D 2 of 5 14h 15h 12 15 48 Codabar NW 7 Codabar 07h Disable 15 50 Set Lengths for Codabar 18h 19h 5 to 55 15 50 CLSI Editing 36h Disable 15 52 NOTIS Editing 37h Disable 15 52 MSI MSI OBh Disable 15 53 Set Length s for MSI 1Eh 1Fh 4 to 55 15 53 MSI Check Digits 32h One 15 55 Transmit MSI Check Digit 2Eh Disable 15 55 MSI Check Digit Algorithm 33h Mod 10 Mod 10 15 56 Chinese 2 of 5 Chinese 2 of 5 FOh 98h Disable 15 56 Symbologies 15 5 Table
207. decode only Code 128 symbols containing either 2 or 14 characters select Code 128 Two Discrete Lengths then scan 0 2 1 and then 4 To correct an error or change the selection scan Cancel on page D 3 e Length Within Range Select this option to decode a Code 128 symbol with a specific length range Select lengths using numeric bar codes in Appendix D Numeric Bar Codes For example to decode Code 128 symbols containing between 4 and 12 characters first scan Code 128 Length Within Range Then scan 0 4 1 and 2 enter a leading zero for single digit numbers To correct an error or change the selection scan Cancel on page D 3 e Any Length Select this option to decode Code 128 symbols containing any number of characters within the digital scanner s capability Symbologies 15 27 Set Lengths for Code 128 continued Code 128 One Discrete Length Code 128 Two Discrete Lengths Code 128 Length Within Range Code 128 Any Length 15 28 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Enable Disable GS1 128 formerly UCC EAN 128 Parameter OEh To enable or disable GS1 128 scan the appropriate bar code below Enable GS1 128 01h Disable GS1 128 00h Enable Disable ISBT 128 Parameter 54h ISBT 128 is a variant of Code 128 used in the blood bank industry Scan a bar code below to enable or disable ISBT 128 If necessary the host must perform concatenatio
208. der Failure to read the note will not result in physical harm to the reader equipment or data CAUTION This symbol indicates that if this information is ignored the possibility of data or material damage may AN occur WARNING This symbol indicates that if this information is ignored the possibility that serious personal A injury may occur xxii DS6878 Product Reference Guide Related Documents e The DS6878 Quick Start Guide p n 72 131700 xx provides general information to help the user get started with the digital scanner It includes basic operation instructions and start up bar codes e The CR0078 S CR0008 S Cradle Quick Reference Guide p n 72 135874 xx provides information to help the user set up and use the charge only and host interface cradles It includes set up and mounting instructions e The CR0078 P Cradle Quick Reference Guide p n 72 138860 xx provides general information regarding the cradle It includes set up and usage instructions The latest version of this guide and all guides are available at www motorolasolutions com support Service Information If you have a problem with your equipment contact Motorola Solutions Support for your region Contact information is available at www motorolasolutions com support When contacting Motorola Solutions Support please have the following information available e Serial number of the unit e Model number or product name e Software type and version number M
209. diesiefee gesteet AE 15 75 GS1 128 Emulation Mode for UCC EAN Composite Codes A 15 75 RN ere E 15 76 Enable Disable PDF417 cisssccaceccecnitcais eg esgeieshtbeer Geesse EES eg 15 76 Eriabl Disable MiIChOPD A KEE 15 77 Code T28 Dn E E 15 78 D ta Matik EE 15 79 Data Matrix Inverse Rene eee eee eS eer ee eer ers 15 80 E TEE 15 81 OR COdE ebe 15 81 SE 15 82 KU serene eee eee ere ere ee ee ee ee 15 82 EE eege Eege 15 83 e E 15 83 Redundancy Level geseet ee eege Eege 15 84 Redundancy Level WEE 15 84 Rule nei 15 84 Redundancy Level ee eege 15 84 Redundancy Level E 15 85 Sec rity L vel tee 15 86 Intercharacter Gap Size mcessecessaccsnnrcitecetnedsdcinecasanieiendeateceanieccasaniuemaseatadnadiuacscenenie 15 87 See EE 15 87 Macro PDF Features ett 15 88 Flush Macro BUET sormscnireirroniriavn airia aR A EEEE NE 15 88 Abort Macro PDF EE 15 88 Chapter 16 Advanced Data Formatting ntrod ctiO E 16 1 Rules Criteria Linked to Actions icici esENEeEEEeEEeERESS EE deeg eEENEe SEENEN 16 1 Using ADF Bar EE 16 2 ADF Bar Code Menu DEE Eeer eher gEEge 16 2 Rule 1 The Code 128 Scanning Rule EE 16 3 Rule 2 The UPC Scanning Rule EE 16 3 Alternate Rule Sets zegsget tgeeeg ere gas 16 3 Rules Hierarchy in Bar Codes ssesssesessssrneeerressrrrsstrrrnerrrnnrrtrnnrsrnrrnssrrrnsrrnn nne 16 4 Default Rules giessen 16 5 ADF Bar Codos ccccccccececceeccecececceeeceeececeeeeaeeeeecunseasuneesuaeessaesesunesssseesutessuaesesunesanees 16 6
210. digital scanner must then be paired to the cradle and the cradle communicates directly to the host via the host interface cable connection Serial Port Profile Master Select this host type for Bluetooth Technology Profile Support see page 4 6 The digital scanner connects to the PC host via Bluetooth and performs like there s a serial connection The digital scanner initiates the connection to the remote device and is the Master Scan Serial Port Profile Master then scan the PAIR bar code for the remote device See Pairing Bar Code Format on page 4 22 for information about creating a pairing bar code for a remote device Serial Port Profile Slave Select this host type for Bluetooth Technology Profile Support see page 4 6 The digital scanner connects to the PC host via Bluetooth and performs like there s a serial connection The digital scanner accepts incoming connection requested from a remote device and is the Slave Scan Serial Port Profile Slave and wait for the incoming connection Bluetooth Keyboard Emulation HID Slave Select this host type for Bluetooth Technology Profile Support See page 4 6 for Bluetooth Technology Profile Support and Master Slave definitions The digital scanner connects to the PC host via Bluetooth and performs like a keyboard The digital scanner accepts incoming connection requested from a remote device and is the slave Scan Bluetooth Keyboard Emulation HID Slave and wait for the incoming conn
211. disinfectants If required wipe the digital scanner with the following list of approved cleansers e Isopropyl alcohol e Bleach sodium hypochlorite e Hydrogen peroxide e Gentle dish soap and water IMPORTANT Cleansers that contain active ingredients not listed above should not be utilized on the A DS6878 HC digital scanner 3 2 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Digital Scanner Cradle e Do not pour spray or spill any liquid on the cradle Wipe the cradle using the same approved cleansers as the Digital Scanner CAUTION Avoid using cleansers directly on the digital scanner battery door contacts and cradle contacts Use a cotton swab moistened with alcohol to gently clean contacts Known Harmful Ingredients The following chemicals are known to damage the plastics on Motorola scanners cradles and should not come in contact with the device e Ammonia solutions e Compounds of amines or ammonia e Acetone e Ketones e Ethers e Aromatic and chlorinated hydrocarbons e Aqueous or alcoholic alkaline solutions e Ethanolamine e Toluene e Trichloroethylene e Benzene e Carbolic acid e TB lysoform IMPORTANT Some hand sanitizers commonly used in the healthcare environment may contain the A harmful ingredients listed above such as ethanolamine Hands must be completely dry before handling the Motorola DS6878 HC digital scanner to prevent inadvertent contamination with known harmful ingredients and damage to the plastics Daily
212. ditional Capabilities Regardless of how the signature is captured the output signature image is de skewed and right side up A scanner that captures signatures automatically determines whether it is scanning a signature or a bar code You can disable the signature capturing capability in a scanner Signature Boxes Figure G 3 illustrates the five acceptable signature boxes Type 2 Type 5 M Type 7 Type 8 Ss Type 9 sd Figure G 3 Acceptable Signature Boxes Glossary A Aperture The opening in an optical system defined by a lens or baffle that establishes the field of view ASCII American Standard Code for Information Interchange A 7 bit plus parity code representing 128 letters numerals punctuation marks and control characters It is a standard data transmission code in the U S Autodiscrimination The ability of an interface controller to determine the code type of a scanned bar code After this determination is made the information content is decoded Bar The dark element in a printed bar code symbol Bar Code A pattern of variable width bars and spaces which represents numeric or alphanumeric data in machine readable form The general format of a bar code symbol consists of a leading margin start character data or message character check character if any stop character and trailing margin Within this framework each recogni
213. dle to a 12 volt decoder can damage the digital scanner and invalidate the warranty 11 4 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Wand Emulation Parameter Defaults Table 11 1 lists the defaults for Wand Emulation host types To change any option scan the appropriate bar code s provided in Wand Emulation Host Parameters beginning on page 11 5 J NOTE See Appendix A Standard Default Parameters for all user preferences hosts symbologies and miscellaneous default parameters Table 11 1 Wand Emulation Default Table Parameter Default Page Number Wand Emulation Host Parameters Wand Emulation Host Types Symbol OmniLink Interface Controller 17 5 Leading Margin 80 msec 11 6 Polarity Bar High Margin Low 11 7 Ignore Unknown Characters Send 11 7 Convert All Bar Codes to Code 39 Disable 11 8 Convert Code 39 to Full ASCII Disable 11 9 1User selection is required to configure this interface and this is the most common selection Wand Emulation Interface 11 5 Wand Emulation Host Parameters Wand Emulation Host Types Select a Wand Emulation host by scanning one of the bar codes below Symbol OmniLink Interface Controller Symbol PDT Terminal MSI Symbol PTC Terminal Telxon J NOTE User selection is required to configure this interface and this is the most common selection 11 6 D
214. e 5 17 user preferences defaults 5 2 Index 9 W wand emulation connection 11 2 12 2 wand emulation defaults 00 11 4 wand emulation parameters 11 5 Tell Us What You Think We d like to know what you think about this Manual Please take a moment to fill out this questionnaire and fax this form to 631 627 7184 or mail to Motorola Inc One Motorola Plaza M S B 10 Holtsville NY 11742 1300 Attention Technical Publications Manager Advanced Data Capture Division Unfortunately we cannot provide customer support at the fax number above Important If you need product support please call the appropriate customer support number for your area Manual Title please include revision level How familiar were you with this product before using this manual CT Very familiar CT Slightly familiar CT Not at all familiar Did this manual meet your needs If not please explain What topics need to be added to the index if applicable What topics do you feel need to be better discussed Please be specific What can we do to further improve our manuals Thank you for your input We value your comments MOTOROLA Motorola Solutions Inc One Motorola Plaza Holtsville New York 11742 USA 1 800 927 9626 http Awww motorolasolutions com MOTOROLA MOTO MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS and the Stylized M Logo
215. e Use these bar codes to send preset values See Prefix Suffix Values on page 5 48 to set these values Send Prefix Send Suffix Modify Data Modify data as described below The following actions work for all send commands that follow it within a rule Programming pad zeros to length 6 send next 3 characters stop padding send next 5 characters adds three zeros to the first send and the next send is unaffected by the padding These options do not apply to the Send Keystroke or Send Preset Value options Remove All Spaces To remove all spaces in the send commands that follow scan the bar code below Remove All Spaces Crunch All Spaces To leave one space between words scan the bar code below This also removes all leading and trailing spaces Crunch All Spaces Scan the bar code below to disable space removal Stop Space Removal Stop Space Removal 16 36 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Remove Leading Zeros Scan the bar code below to remove all leading zeros Remove Leading Zeros Scan the bar code below to disable the removal of zeros Stop Zero Removal Stop Zero Removal Advanced Data Formatting 16 37 Pad Data with Spaces
216. e for best performance define small regions when many bar codes are in view or those in view are close together e Use Region elements to improve decode speeds by reducing the image area to search for the target bar code e Specifying Code Type may also improve decode speeds for some code types e Although you can scan parameter bar codes when multicode mode is enabled be aware of the following If the multicode expression defined a region s to scan a parameter bar code you must position the bar code within the first region defined in the expression In some cases this first region is not the center of the image and aiming at the parameter bar code does not result in a successful decode The following examples show the multicode expressions in both hex and decimal formats however in the sample figures the values are decimal Be sure to use the correct base numbering system when creating an expression A region specified as 0x00 0x00 0x64 0x32 represents a region with coordinates of Top Left 0 0 and Bottom Right 100 50 User Preferences amp Miscellaneous Digital Scanner Options 5 39 Example 1 To decode one Code 128 bar code anywhere in the image even when bar codes of other types are in view as in Figure 5 2 program the expression as follows The expression in decimal is formatted for readability 1C 208 To program the expression via scanning parameters the sequence is Spaces are for readability MultiCode Expression
217. e 128 Emulation to transmit these MicroPDF417 symbols with one of the following prefixes L3 if the first codeword is 903 905 L4 if the first codeword is 908 or 909 L5 if the first codeword is 910 or 911 Scan a bar code below to enable or disable Code 128 Emulation J NOTE Linked MicroPDF codewords 906 907 912 914 and 915 are not supported Use GS1 Composites instead Enable Code 128 Emulation 01h Disable Code 128 Emulation 00h Symbologies 15 79 Data Matrix To enable or disable Data Matrix scan the appropriate bar code below Enable Data Matrix 01h Disable Data Matrix 00h 15 80 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Data Matrix Inverse This parameter sets the Data Matrix inverse decoder setting Options are Regular Only the digital scanner decodes regular Data Matrix bar codes only e Inverse Only the digital scanner decodes inverse Data Matrix bar codes only e Inverse Autodetect the digital scanner decodes both regular and inverse Data Matrix bar codes Regular 00h Inverse Only 01h Inverse Autodetect 02h J NOTE For HC configurations the default is Enable is Inverse Autodetect Symbologies 15 81 Maxicode To enable or disable Maxicode scan the appropriate bar
218. e 39 symbology set are replaced by a space If this parameter is enabled the data sent to the Scanner Emulation host is encoded in Code 39 Full ASCII The host must be able to interpret Code 39 Full ASCII data This setting applies only if Convert to Code 39 is also enabled Disable Convert Code 39 To Full ASCII Enable Convert Code 39 To Full ASCII 12 8 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Transmission Timeout The Scanner Emulation host transmits bar code data to the attached decoder and waits for the decoder to assert the Decode signal indicating successful transmission If after a specified amount of time the Decode signal is not asserted indicating that the attached decoder has not successfully received the bar code data the digital scanner issues transmit error beeps Scan a bar code below to select the desired transmission timeout 3 Second Transmission Timeout 4 Second Transmission Timeout 5 Second Transmission Timeout 10 Second Transmission Timeout 30 Second Transmission Timeout Scanner Emulation Interface 12 9 Ignore Unknown Characters Unknown characters are characters the decoder does not recognize When Ignore Unknown Characters is selected all bar code data is sent except for unknown characters and no error beeps sound When Convert Error on Unknown Characters is selected b
219. e 978 979 Supplemental Mode in Decode UPC EAN JAN Supplementals on page 15 11 Symbologies 15 11 Decode UPC EAN JAN Supplementals Parameter 10h Supplementals are bar codes appended according to specific format conventions e g UPC A 2 UPC E 2 EAN 13 2 The following options are available e f you select Ignore UPC EAN with Supplementals and the digital scanner is presented with a UPC EAN plus supplemental symbol the digital scanner decodes UPC EAN and ignores the supplemental characters e f you select Decode UPC EAN with Supplementals the digital scanner only decodes UPC EAN symbols with supplemental characters and ignores symbols without supplementals e f you select Autodiscriminate UPC EAN Supplementals the digital scanner decodes UPC EAN symbols with supplemental characters immediately If the symbol does not have a supplemental the digital scanner must decode the bar code the number of times set via UPC EAN JAN Supplemental Redundancy on page 15 14 before transmitting its data to confirm that there is no supplemental e f you select one of the following Supplemental Mode options the digital scanner immediately transmits EAN 13 bar codes starting with that prefix that have supplemental characters If the symbol does not have a supplemental the digital scanner must decode the bar code the number of times set via UPC EAN JAN Supplemental Redundancy on page 15 14 before transmitting its data to confirm that there is no
220. e EE xxii Chapter 1 Getting Started idee Tee ET 1 1 iwer 1 2 Unpacking the Digital Scanner and Cradle 0 ccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeteaaeeeeeea 1 2 EE 1 3 ele le e 1 3 CRO0078 S CRO008 S Series Cradle EE 1 4 CR0078 P Series Cradle ccccccccccccceeceee cence cece este aeeeaaceaeeaaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseneeesseeesenseeeees 1 6 le e TE 1 7 Connecting the CRO078 S CROO008 S Series Cradle ccccccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 1 8 Supplying Power to the CRO078 S CRO008 S Cradle ccccceececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 1 9 Using the USB Interface to Supply Power eeeeeeeeeeeeeeee eter eee eeeeeeeeeetaeeeeeeee 1 9 Connecting the CROO78 P Series Cradle ccecceceeeceeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneaes 1 10 Supplying Power to the CR0078 P Cradle ssssesesnnneeeseeneeseneeennrrssrrrsserrnnnnrnnenenene 1 11 Lost Connection to lettres eegend 1 11 Mounting the Cradle cescstceravscnrcncssttatacsadontaee eege geet 1 11 Replacing the Digital Scanner Battery ek 1 12 Inserting the Digital Scanner in the Cradle nsesseenesneresserrrseerrrrreererssrernsrrnnnrennnnennne 1 13 Inserting Digital Scanner in the CR0078 S CR0008 S Cradle cccccceeeeeeees 1 14 Horizontal Cradle Mount EE 1 14 Vertical Cradle Mount scccasiccsesveisssacsescscasssescesteeaavensscocesaasaantncetsdcoctansesandasasncens sts 1 14 Inserting Removing Digital Scanner in the CR0078 P Cradle sseseseesseeesereee 1 15 v
221. e during programming scan Quit Entering Drivers License Rule on page 17 4 Any previously saved rule is retained To erase a programmed saved rule scan Erase Driver s License Parse Rules on page 17 4 Embedded Driver s License Parsing Criteria Code Type After specifying the fields and their order for the parsed driver s license you can also apply standard ADF rules to the parsed data using the Parsed Driver s License criterion bar code in the Advanced Data Formatting Programmer Guide J NOTE Only create standard ADF rules on parsed driver s license data when configured for Embedded Driver s License Parsing See Embedded Driver s License Parsing ADF Example on page 17 45 for a sample ADF rule using this code type criterion 17 4 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Driver s License Parse Field Bar Codes Begin New Driver s License Parse Rule Save Driver s License Parse Rule Quit Entering Driver s License Rule Erase Driver s License Parse Rules Driver s License Set Up DS6878 DL 17 5 Driver s License Parse Field Bar Codes continued The parse fields currently supported begin below Not all IDs present data in the same format For example some IDs may have separate fields for first name last name and middle initial and others may have a single field with the entire name In addition some IDs may expire on the subject s birth date and the actual expiration date field may only indicate the year In order to pre
222. e edges of the quiet zones of the first row and the last row Symbol Length Length of symbol measured from the beginning of the quiet zone margin adjacent to the start character to the end of the quiet zone margin adjacent to a stop character Symbology The structural rules and conventions for representing data within a particular bar code type e g UPC EAN Code 39 PDF417 etc T Tolerance Allowable deviation from the nominal bar or space width U UPC Universal Product Code A relatively complex numeric symbology Each character consists of two bars and two spaces each of which is any of four widths The standard symbology for retail food packages in the United States V Visible Laser Diode VLD A solid state device which produces visible laser light Glossary 8 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Numerics 1238Scan2 0 ee ee eee 13 1 2D bar codes EA 15 83 aztec INVErFSE e 15 83 code 128 emulation nananana aana 15 78 data matrix 15 79 data matrix inverse 15 80 MAXICOdE 1 ee es 15 81 microPDF417 00 eee ee ees 15 77 MICKOQR fi ikaes eee eda tweed Oia ORO a Eo 15 82 PDF417 2 0 ee 15 76 QR COJE 3 eeh E ANNE A Ee fa ca wae 15 81 QR inverse 15 82 A AAMVA field parsing barcodes 17 7 ACCESSOLIES ees 1 20 lanyard 7 see tedden Peebles Pied 1 20 r 61 0 0 AC ek see RN ARENS E 16 2 ADF ntti a etna halen daw iene Paw dun oR Ra EES 16 1 ACTIONS 16 1 16
223. e orientation of an OCR string to be read e 0 to the imaging engine default e 270 clockwise or 90 counterclockwise to the imaging engine e 180 upside down to the imaging engine e 90 clockwise to the imaging engine e Omnidirectional Setting an incorrect orientation can cause misdecodes OCR Programming 14 11 OCR Orientation continued OCR Orientation 0 00h OCR Orientation 270 Clockwise 01h OCR Orientation 180 Clockwise 02h OCR Orientation 90 Clockwise 03h OCR Orientation Omnidirectional 04h 14 12 DS6878 Product Reference Guide OCR Lines Parameter F1 B3h To select the number of OCR lines to decode scan one of the following bar codes Selecting Visas Passport TD1 or TD2 ID cards automatically sets the appropriate OCR Lines Also see OCR B Variant on page 14 6 OCR 1 Line 001h OCR 2 Lines 002h OCR 3 Lines 003h OCR Minimum Characters Parameter F1 Bth To select the minimum number of OCR characters not including spaces per line to decode scan the following
224. e refers to the number of characters i e human readable characters including check digit s the code contains Set lengths for MSI to any length one or two discrete lengths or lengths within a specific range One Discrete Length Select this option to decode only MSI symbols containing a selected length Select the length using the numeric bar codes in Appendix D Numeric Bar Codes For example to decode only MSI symbols with 14 characters scan MSI One Discrete Length then scan 1 followed by 4 To correct an error or to change the selection scan Cancel on page D 3 e Two Discrete Lengths Select this option to decode only MSI symbols containing either of two selected lengths Select lengths using the numeric bar codes in Appendix D Numeric Bar Codes For example to decode only MSI symbols containing either 2 or 14 characters select MSI Two Discrete Lengths then scan 0 2 1 and then 4 To correct an error or to change the selection scan Cancel on page D 3 e Length Within Range Select this option to decode a MSI symbol with a specific length range Select lengths using numeric bar codes in Appendix D Numeric Bar Codes For example to decode MSI symbols containing between 4 and 12 characters first scan MSI Length Within Range Then scan 0 4 1 and 2 enter a leading zero for single digit numbers To correct an error or change the selection scan Cancel on page D 3 e Any Length Scan this option to decode MSI symbols
225. e risk of invalid data transmission select either to decode or ignore supplemental characters 15 12 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Decode UPC EAN JAN Supplementals continued Decode UPC EAN JAN Only With Supplementals 01h ignore Supplementals 00h Autodiscriminate UPC EAN JAN Supplementals 02h Enable 378 379 Supplemental Mode 04h Enable 978 979 Supplemental Mode 05h Enable 977 Supplemental Mode 07h Symbologies 15 13 Decode UPC EAN JAN Supplementals continued Enable 414 419 434 439 Supplemental Mode 06h Enable 491 Supplemental Mode 08h Enable Smart Supplemental Mode 03h Supplemental User Programmable Type 1 09h Supplemental User Programmable Type 1 and 2 OAh Smart Supplemental Plus User Programmable 1 OBh Smart Supplemental Plus User Programmable 1 and 2 0Ch 15 14 DS6878 Product Reference Guide User Programmable Supplementals Supplemental 1 Parameter F1h 43h Supplemental 2 Parameter F1h 44h If you selected a Supplemental User Programmable option from Decode UPC EAN JAN Supplementals on page 15 11 select User Programmable Supplemental 1 to set the 3 digit prefix Then select the 3 digits using the numeric bar codes beginning on page D 1 Select User Programmable Supplemental 2 to set a second 3 digit prefix Then select the 3 digits using the numeric bar codes beginning on page D 1 User Programmable Supplemental 1 User Programmable Supplemental 2
226. eck digits encoded in the Code 11 symbols Disable 00h One Check Digit 01h Two Check Digits 02h Symbologies 15 43 Transmit Code 11 Check Digits This feature selects whether or not to transmit the Code 11 check digit s Transmit Code 11 Check Digit s Enable 01h Do Not Transmit Code 11 Check Digit s Disable 00h J NOTE Code 11 Check Digit Verification must be enabled for this parameter to function 15 44 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Interleaved 2 of 5 ITF Enable Disable Interleaved 2 of 5 To enable or disable Interleaved 2 of 5 scan the appropriate bar code below and select an Interleaved 2 of 5 length from the following pages Enable Interleaved 2 of 5 01h Disable Interleaved 2 of 5 00h Set Lengths for Interleaved 2 of 5 The length of a code refers to the number of characters i e human readable characters including check digit s the code contains Set lengths for 2 of 5 to any length one or two discrete lengths or lengths within a specific range The range for Interleaved 2 of 5 lengths is 0 55 e One Discrete Length Select this option to decode only 2 of 5 symbols containing a selected length Select the length using the numeric bar codes in Appendix D Numeric Bar Codes For example to decode only 2 of 5 symbols with 14 characters scan I 2 of 5 One Discrete Length then scan
227. econds 4 Reconnect the host interface cable to the cradle 5 Reconnect the power supply to the cradle if required 6 Reestablish pairing with the cradle by scanning the pairing bar code J NOTE The CROO78 S does not always require a power supply whereas the CROO08 S and CR0078 P always require a power supply Mounting the Cradle For information on mounting the CRO078 S cradle see Wall Mount Bracket Template on page 1 18 1 12 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Replacing the Digital Scanner Battery The battery is installed in the cordless digital scanner by the factory and resides in a chamber in the digital scanner handle To replace the battery 1 Insert a Phillips screwdriver in the screw at the base of the digital scanner then turn the screw counterclockwise to release the latch Remove the latch If a battery is already installed turn the digital scanner upright to slide the battery out Disconnect the battery connector clip Figure 1 9 Inserting the Battery 4 With the contacts on the connector clips facing in the same direction attach the new battery s connector clip to the connector clip in the base of the digital scanner Slide the new battery into the battery well and ensure the battery leads are visible The battery should sit securely in the well Attach and close the latch Insert a Phillips screwdriver in the screw at the base of the digital scanner press down gently and turn the screw
228. ection NOTE 1 The digital scanner supports keyboard emulation over the Bluetooth HID profile For detailed information and HID host parameters see HID Host Parameters on page 4 8 2 When the digital scanner is paired to the cradle in SPP Master or Cradle Host mode the digital scanner automatically tries to reconnect to a remote device when a disconnection occurs that is due to the radio losing communication For more information see Auto reconnect Feature on page 4 14 Radio Communications Radio Communications Host Types continued Cradle Host Serial Port Profile Master Serial Port Profile Slave Bluetooth Keyboard Emulation HID Slave 4 5 4 6 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Bluetooth Technology Profile Support With Bluetooth Technology Profile Support the cradle is not required for wireless communication The digital scanner communicates directly to the host using Bluetooth technology The digital scanner supports the standard Bluetooth Serial Port Profile SPP and HID Profiles which enable the digital scanner to communicate with other Bluetooth devices that support these profiles e SPP the digital scanner connects to the PC host via Bluetooth and performs like there s a serial connection e HID the digital scanner connects to the PC host via Bluetooth and performs like a keyboard Mast
229. ed Normal Or Enter value using bar code keypad Bluetooth disconnection event Move the digital scanner back into range of the remote device In Master SPP mode re pair the digital scanner and cradle by scanning the PAIR bar code on the cradle check cradle power In Slave SPP HID mode reestablish connection between the digital scanner and remote device from the remote device side Digital Scanner emits three long high beeps Code 39 buffer is full Scan the Code 39 bar code without a leading space or scan Do Not Buffer Code 39 on Code 39 Buffering Scan amp Store on page 15 35 to transmit stored Code 29 data Digital Scanner emits four high beeps on trigger release Low battery Place digital scanner in cradle to charge the battery 3 5 Table 3 1 Problem Digital Scanner emits four long low beeps Troubleshooting Continued Possible Causes A transmission error was detected in a scanned symbol The data is ignored 3 6 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Possible Solutions This occurs if a unit is not properly configured Check option setting The digital scanner is either Out of range Not paired to the cradle Not connected to a remote Bluetooth device Move the digital scanner back into range of the remote device Or Scan the PAIR bar code on the cradle Acknowledgment that transmitted data was not received by the cradle Data may have
230. ed a long low long high beep sequence sounds To perform Wand Emulation connect the cradle to a portable data terminal or a controller which collects the wand data and interprets it for the host IMPORTANT The CRO078 S cradle model STB4278 supports Wand Emulation The CR0078 P cradle model J CRO0078 does not support Wand Emulation G Interface Cable Mobile Computer Figure 11 1 Wand Emulation Connection To connect the Wand Emulation interface 1 Attach the modular connector of the Wand Emulation interface cable to the host port on the bottom of the digital scanner cradle see Connecting the CRO078 S CRO008 S Series Cradle on page 1 8 2 Connect the other end of the Wand Emulation interface cable to the wand port on the mobile computer or controller 3 Select the Wand Emulation host type by scanning the appropriate bar code from Wand Emulation Host Types on page 11 5 Wand Emulation Interface 11 3 4 To modify any other parameter options scan the appropriate bar codes in this chapter lt J NOTE Interface cables vary depending on configuration The connectors illustrated in Figure 11 1 are examples only The connectors may be different than those illustrated but the steps to connect the cradle remain the same If a power supply is used disconnect the power supply before changing host cables or the cradle may not recognize the new host CAUTION Connect the cradle to a 5 volt decoder only Connecting the cra
231. ed 2 of 5 continued l 2 of 5 One Discrete Length 2 of 5 Two Discrete Lengths 2 of 5 Length Within Range l 2 of 5 Any Length 15 46 DS6878 Product Reference Guide I 2 of 5 Check Digit Verification Enable this feature to check the integrity of all 2 of 5 symbols to verify the data complies with either the specified Uniform Symbology Specification USS or the Optical Product Code Council OPCC check digit algorithm Disable 00h USS Check Digit 01h Transmit 2 of 5 Check Digit OPCC Check Digit 02h Scan the appropriate bar code below to transmit 2 of 5 data with or without the check digit Transmit 2 of 5 Check Digit Enable 01h Do Not Transmit I 2 of 5 Check Digit Disable 00h Symbologies 15 47 Convert 2 of 5 to EAN 13 Enable this parameter to convert 14 character 2 of 5 codes to EAN 13 and transmit to the host as EAN 13 To accomplish this the 2 of 5 code must be enabled and the code must have a leading zero and a valid EAN 13 check digit Convert 2 of 5 to EAN 13 Enable 01h Do Not Convert I 2 of 5 to EAN 13 Disable 00h Discrete 2 of 5 DTF
232. eeea 4 2 Wireless Beeper Definitions siicctetitenticteced i itisetscsSievcevis ege Eed e 4 3 Radio Communications Host Types cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeetiaaeeeetnnaeeeteee 4 4 Bluetooth Technology Profile Support AAA 4 6 LEE E 4 6 DIAS ION eege geseet 4 6 A ae een nee Ener tre eer eee ee eee eee errr ner mere rare fen ner 4 6 Bluetooth Friendly Nam Aeudeue Suedler EeEEEEEE 4 7 Discoverable Mode Table of Contents vii AID H st Parameters E 4 8 HID Country Keyboard Types Country Codes eccccccceeceeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeenneeees 4 8 HID Keyboard Keystroke Delay ccccceecee cere ee eeeeeeeeeneeeeneeeneneeneeeeeseseneeeeeeeeees 4 10 HID CAPS EE 4 10 HID Ignore Unknown Characters AE 4 11 Em late Keypad EE 4 11 HID Keyboard ENT Substitution ss esesseeeseereeseerrneeernetsstrrrstrrntrrrnnrrrenrnssrrrnsern nne 4 12 HID Function Key Mapping WEE 4 12 Simulated Caps E 4 13 Convert e 4 13 Auto reconnect Feature ojcivercasccceceasadensmteeteasedocetatdehansentessasearenacatbacrdeatetiar auececaratseede 4 14 Reconnect Attempt Beep Feedback cceeeeeeeenceeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeees 4 15 Reconnect Attempt Interval ccccceesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeseenseeeneneeeeeeees 4 16 Auto reconnect in Bluetooth Keyboard Emulation HID Slave Mode 005 4 17 Out of Range Indicator ee wc en re ee 4 17 Digital Scanner s To Cradle Supp
233. eeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeees 14 31 Health Industry HIBCC43 EE 14 31 Table of Contents xili Chapter 15 Symbologies idee Tee 15 1 Scanning Sequence Examples AA 15 1 Errors While Scanning EE 15 2 Symbology Parameter Defaults 15 2 URCE ANG aaee a ee E eT oe eT er ae errr ee ener 15 8 Enable Disable UPC A cacrasscste tes sanctaves eedage hoc elctushdezeas aa ncaindanteenadeseceueiedtiacskeertanenes 15 8 EHS 15 8 Enable Disable UPC E1 ENEE 15 9 Enable Disable EAN 8 JAN 8 ccissscciasicccctsedatieaedsscedrineseinniaseadenertuasinetetbieieedaaeauanaee 15 9 Enable Disable EAN 13 JAN 13 c cccssciccsacescietcussssessatveteatenta sedtansduenseuend namnaercentenese 15 10 Eriable Disable Bookland EAN siscssasszcccnndescsdevaststiesiaccennitansd ccatveedshdeetanstataaseadebeuntten 15 10 Decode UPC EAN JAN Supplementals ccceccceeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeessaeeees 15 11 User Programmable Supplementals AAA 15 14 UPC EAN JAN Supplemental Redundancy cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeesnaaeeees 15 14 UPC EAN JAN Supplemental AIM ID Format cecccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesneeeees 15 15 Transmit UPC Check Digit sssiets oy Cteceleuten nee 15 15 Transmit UPC E Check Digit sss sect ecrseeeecetedwnlac anche scbecacensssmert ses ce uaseesacevece ads 15 16 Transmit UPC E1 Check Digit 2 aeeeeere eege eege 15 16 IPG Preamble eege ebe EE 15 17 WIPG E E de E 15 18 UPC E1 Preamble entgeet eiaenaeaicnsetcneies 15 19 C
234. en you power down the digital scanner J NOTE Most computer monitors allow scanning the bar codes directly on the screen When scanning from the screen be sure to set the document magnification to a level where you can see the bar code clearly and bars and or spaces are not merging If not using a USB cable select a host type after the power up beeps sound See Chapter 7 USB Interface and Chapter 8 RS 232 Interface for specific host information This is only necessary upon the first power up when connecting to a new host To return all features to default values scan the Default Parameters on page 5 5 Throughout the programming bar code menus asterisks indicate default values 8 Feature Option indicates Default Enable Decode Aiming Pattern 02h Option Hex Value 6 2 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Scanning Sequence Examples In most cases scanning one bar code sets the parameter value For example to disable image capture illumination scan the Disable Image Capture Illumination bar code under mage Capture Illumination on page 6 5 The digital scanner issues a fast warble beep and the LED turns green signifying a successful parameter entry Other parameters require scanning several bar codes See these parameter descriptions for this procedure Errors While Scanning Unless otherwise specified to correct an error during a scanning sequence just re scan the correct parameter Imaging Preferences Param
235. end commands to activate this parameter Pad Zeros To Length 1 Pad Zeros To Length 2 Pad Zeros To Length 3 16 42 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Pad Data with Zeros continued Pad Zeros To Length 4 Pad Zeros To Length 5 Pad Zeros To Length 6 Pad Zeros To Length 7 Pad Zeros To Length 8 Pad Zeros To Length 9 Pad Zeros To Length 10 Advanced Data Formatting 16 43 Pad Data with Zeros continued Pad Zeros To Length 11 Pad Zeros To Length 12 Pad Zeros To Length 13 Pad Zeros To Length 14 Pad Zeros To Length 15 Pad Zeros To Length 16 Pad Zeros To Length 17 16 44 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Pad Data with
236. end of field numbers require bigger quiet zones at each end of text line To set a quiet zone scan the following bar code then scan a two digit number using the numeric keypad in Chapter 16 Advanced Data Formatting The range of the quiet zone is 20 99 and the default is 50 indicating a six character width quiet zone OCR Quiet Zone OCR Programming 14 15 OCR Bright Illumination Parameter Fih BDh When enabled image contrast is improved for OCR scanning Motorola recommends enabling this when the OCR string is longer than 20 characters and for applications with busy backgrounds such as passport check or VISA reading Enable OCR Bright Illumination Disable OCR Bright Illumination J NOTE Enabling OCR Bright Illumination causes the aiming pattern to blink due to the lower frame rate setting 14 16 DS6878 Product Reference Guide OCR Template Parameter F1 23h This option creates a template for precisely matching scanned OCR characters to a desired input format Carefully constructing an OCR template eliminates scanning errors To set or modify the OCR decode template scan the OCR Template bar code then bar codes corresponding to numbers and letters on the following pages to form the template expression Then scan End of Message in Chapter 16 Advanced D
237. end the next X characters Note that only bar codes for Send Next 1 to 20 appear here and can be scanned multiple times to send values greater then 20 For instance to send the next 28 characters scan Send Next 20 Characters then Send Next 8 Characters Send Data Up To Character Send All Data That Remains Send Next Character Send Next 2 Characters Send Next 3 Characters Send Next 4 Characters 16 26 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Send Data continued Send Next 5 Characters Send Next 7 Characters Send Next 9 Characters Send Next 11 Characters Send Next 6 Characters Send Next 8 Characters Send Next 10 Characters Advanced Data Formatting 16 27 Send Data continued Send Next 12 Characters
238. eneeees 5 33 Hands Free Decode Aiming Pattern ccccccccceeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeneeeeees 5 34 Presentation Mode Field of View 22 cccceeeeseeeeceeeeeeeeeseeeeeeneeeeseeseeneneseeeeeeees 5 35 Decoding lllumination WEE 5 36 Multicode RNS a atest dees 5 36 Multicode EX DIOS SION a eteciac ttre sds tected ENEE 5 37 Multicode Expression Syntax EE 5 37 Defining Multicode Expression Notes ccccceeeeeeeseeceeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeenees 5 38 Multicode Mode Concatenation EE 5 43 Multicode Concatenation Symbology EEN 5 44 Multicode TROUDISSIMIOOUING acsesicudss ssocctenacsdenessasdunne veh enassacneedeAtanyaicuachanen ee aatomneene 5 45 Troubleshooting Multicode Expression Programming 5 45 Troubleshooting Multicode Mode Scanning and Decoding sssesssseeserrseeeene 5 45 Miscellaneous Scanner Parameters AE 5 47 Transmit Code ID Character E 5 47 Prefix Suffix Values eiert 5 48 Scan Data Transmission Format e eteegeEEeecC geed ENEE eech 5 49 CNEL le 5 50 Transmit No Read Message sssciccescsdssiecectiasinascdctiGiaxiatases geet d e eege 5 51 Table of Contents ix Chapter 6 Imaging Preferences Lutte Te EE 6 1 Scanning Sequence Examples AA 6 2 Errors While Scanning WEE 6 2 Imaging Preferences Parameter Defaults REENEN 6 2 Imaging BEE 6 4 le ER 6 4 Decode e E 6 4 Ee 6 4 Image Capture Illumination sieissssceicesestccensdacentelsgeih sles aelantaindentatidsinnaetitieimnaemeannes 6 5
239. equency tone scan one of the following bar codes To disable the Beeper Tone scan the Off parameter Off 03h Low Tone 02h Medium Tone 01h High Tone 00h Medium to High Tone 2 tone 04h User Preferences amp Miscellaneous Digital Scanner Options 5 9 Beeper Volume Parameter 8Ch To select a beeper volume scan the Low Volume Medium Volume or High Volume bar code Low Volume 02h Medium Volume 01h High Volume 00h 5 10 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Beeper Duration Parameter F1 74h To select the duration for the beeper scan one of the following bar codes Short 00h Medium 01h Long 02h Beep on Insertion Parameter FO 20h When a digital scanner is inserted into a cradle and detects power it emits a short low beep This feature is enabled by default To enable or disable beeping on insertion scan the appropriate bar code below Enable Beep on Insertion 01h Disable Beep on Insertion 00h User Preferences amp Miscellaneous Digital Scanner Options 5 11 Batch Mode Parameter F1 20h
240. er Slave Set Up The digital scanner can be set up as a Master or Slave When the digital scanner is set up as a Slave it is discoverable and connectable to other devices When the digital scanner is set up as a Master the Bluetooth address of the remote device to which a connection is requested is required A pairing bar code with the remote device address must be created and scanned to attempt a connection to the remote device See the Pairing Bar Code Format on page 4 22 for information about creating a pairing bar code Master When the digital scanner is set up as a Master SPP it initiates the radio connection to a slave device Initiating the connection is done by scanning a pairing bar code for the remote device see Pairing Bar Code Format on page 4 22 Slave When the digital scanner is set up as a Slave device SPP the digital scanner accepts an incoming connection request from a remote device V NOTE The number of digital scanners is dependent on the host s capability Radio Communications 4 7 Bluetooth Friendly Name You can set a meaningful name for the digital scanner that appears in the application during device discovery The default name is the digital scanner name followed by its serial number e g DS6878 123456789ABCDEF Scanning Set Defaults reverts the digital scanner to this name use custom defaults to maintain the user programmed name through a Set Defaults operation To set a new Bluetooth Friendly N
241. ercharacter Gap Size The Code 39 and Codabar symbologies have an intercharacter gap that is typically quite small Due to various bar code printing technologies this gap can grow larger than the maximum size allowed preventing the digital scanner from decoding the symbol If this problem occurs scan the Large Intercharacter Gaps parameter to tolerate these out of specification bar codes Normal Intercharacter Gaps 06h Large Intercharacter Gaps OAh Report Version Scan the bar code below to report the version of software installed in the digital scanner Report Software Version 15 88 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Macro PDF Features Macro PDF is a special feature for concatenating multiple PDF symbols into one file The scanner can decode symbols that are encoded with this feature and can store more than 64 Kb of decoded data stored in up to 50 MacroPDF symbols CAUTION When printing keep each Macro PDF sequence separate as each sequence has unique identifiers A Do not mix bar codes from several Macro PDF sequences even if they encode the same data When scanning Macro PDF sequences scan the entire Macro PDF sequence without interruption If when scanning a mixed sequence the digital scanner emits two long low beeps Low Low this indicates an inconsistent file ID or inconsistent symbology error Flush Macro Buffer This flushes the buffer of all decoded Macro PDF data stored to that point transmits it to the host
242. es for b and e can be any scannable character They are included in the output stream Template Incoming data Output C gt A gt XQ3 gt ABCDE gt gt ABCDE gt gt ATHRUZ gt 123 gt ATHRUZ gt 1ABCZXYZ No Output 14 22 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Ignore to End of Field D D This operator causes all characters after a template to be ignored Use this as the last character in a template expression Examples for the template 999D Template Incoming data Output 999D 123 PED 123 357298 25H 193 193 Skip Until P1 P This operator allows skipping over characters until a specific character type or a literal string is detected It can be used in two ways 1 PILCE Where e p1 is the Skip Until operator e cis the type of character that triggers the start of output e tis one or more template characters Pi s t Where e p1 is the Skip Until operator e s is one or more literal string characters see Literal String and on page 14 20 that trigger the start of output e tis one or more template characters OCR Programming 14 23 The trigger character or literal string is included in output from a Skip Until operator and the first character in the template should accommodate this trigger Template Incoming data Output P1 PN AA999 123PN9876 PN9876 PN1234 PN1234 X PN3592 PN3592 Skip Until Not P0 P This operator allows skipping over characters until a specific character type or a literal s
243. escription M 99977 M followed by three digits and two optional digits TIN OOD ren X followed by two digits four optional digits and an X 9959775599 Two digits followed by any character a digit two optional digits any two characters and two digits A55 999 99 A letter followed by two characters a dash three digits a dash and two digits 33A 99 Two alphanumeric characters followed by a letter a period and two digits 999992991 Five digits followed by an optional alpha two digits and an optional alphanumeric PN98 Literal field PN98 OCR Check Digit Modulus Parameter Eih BOh This option sets OCR module check digit calculation The check digit is the last digit in the rightmost position in an OCR string and improves the accuracy of the collected data The check digit is the end product of a calculation made on the incoming data For check digit calculation for example Modulus 10 alpha and numeric characters are assigned numeric weights see OCR Check Digit Multiplier on page 14 26 The calculation is applied to the character weights and the resulting check digit is added to the end of the data If the incoming data does not match the check digit the data is considered corrupt The selected check digit option does not take effect until you set OCR Check Digit Validation To choose the Check Digit Modulus such as 10 for modulo 10 scan the following bar code then scan a three digit number from 001 to 099 represe
244. ese Windows ASCII keyboard type and can not be disabled Do Not Override Caps Lock Key Disable Long Delay 40 msec Override Caps Lock Key Enable Radio Communications 4 11 HID Ignore Unknown Characters Unknown characters are characters the host does not recognize When Send Bar Codes With Unknown Characters is scanned all bar code data is sent except for unknown characters and no error beeps sound When Do Not Send Bar Codes With Unknown Characters is scanned bar codes containing at least one unknown character are not sent to the host and an error beep sounds Send Bar Codes With Unknown Characters Enable Do Not Send Bar Codes With Unknown Characters Disable Emulate Keypad When enabled all characters are sent as ASCII sequences over the numeric keypad For example ASCII A is sent as ALT make 065 ALT Break Disable Keypad Emulation Enable Keypad Emulation 4 12 DS6878 Product Reference Guide HID Keyboard ENT Substitution When enabled this parameter allows replacement of any FN1 character in an EAN128 bar code with a Key Category and value chosen by the user See ENT Substitution Val
245. eter Defaults Table 6 1 lists the defaults for imaging preferences parameters To change the default values scan the appropriate bar codes in this guide These new values replace the standard default values in memory To recall the default parameter values scan the Default Parameters on page 5 5 lt J NOTE See Appendix A Standard Default Parameters for all user preferences hosts symbologies and miscellaneous default parameters Table 6 1 maging Preferences Parameter Defaults Parameter alee Default Deet Imaging Preferences Operational Modes N A N A 6 4 Image Capture Illumination FOh 69h Enable 6 5 Gain Exposure Priority for Snapshot Mode Fih 32h Autodetect 6 6 Snapshot Mode Timeout FOh 43h 0 30 seconds 6 7 Snapshot Aiming Pattern FOh 2Ch Enable 6 7 Image Cropping FOh 2Dh Disable 6 8 Crop to Pixel Addresses F4h FOh 3Bh 0 top 6 9 F4h FOh 3Ch 0 left F4h FOh 3Dh 479 bottom F4h FOh 3Eh 751 right Image Size Number of Pixels FOh 2Eh Full 6 10 Image Brightness Target White FOh 86h 180 6 11 JPEG Image Options FOh 2Bh Quality 6 11 JPEG Target File Size F1h 31h 160 kB 6 12 Imaging Preferences 6 3 Table 6 1 maging Preferences Parameter Defaults Continued Parameter EE Default oi ae JPEG Quality and Size Value FOh 31h 65 6 12 Image Enhancement F1h 34h Off 0 6 13 Image File Format Selection FOh 30h JPEG 6 14 Image Rotation Fih 99h 0 6 15 Bits per
246. eyboard Wedge host by scanning one of the bar codes below IBM PC AT amp IBM PC Compatibles IBM AT Notebook Keyboard Wedge Interface 9 5 Keyboard Wedge Country Types Country Codes Scan the bar code corresponding to the keyboard type If the keyboard type is not listed see Alternate Numeric Keypad Emulation on page 9 9 North American German Windows French Windows French Canadian Windows 95 98 French Canadian Windows XP 2000 Spanish Windows French International 9 6 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Keyboard Wedge Country Types Country Codes continued Swedish Windows Japanese Windows Italian Windows UK English Windows Portuguese Brazilian Windows Keyboard Wedge Interface 9 7 Ignore Unknown Characters Unknown characters are characters the host does not recognize When Send Bar Codes With Unknown Characters
247. f a 16 30 selected character For example if the selected character is A then the cursor moves past A AA AAA etc Scan the Move Cursor Past Character on page 16 30 then select a character from the Alphanumeric Keyboard on page 16 90 lf the character is not there the cursor does not move i e has no effect Move Cursor Past Specific String This action moves the cursor past the first occurrence of a selected 16 30 string Move Cursor to Specific String This action moves the cursor to the start of the first occurrence of a 16 30 and Replace selected string and replaces that string with another user defined string Move Cursor to Last Occurrence This action replaces all occurrences of a specific string with a 16 30 of String and Replace All user defined string and moves the cursor to the beginning of the last such occurrence Skip to End This action moves the cursor to the end of the bar code 16 30 Skip Ahead N Characters Scan one of these bar codes to select the number of positions ahead 16 32 to move the cursor Skip Back N Characters Scan one of these bar codes to select the number of positions back to 16 33 move the cursor Send Preset Value Send Values 1 through 6 by scanning the appropriate bar code Set 16 33 these values using the prefix suffix values in Table 8 4 on page 8 20 Value 1 Scan Suffix Value 2 Scan Prefix Values 3 6 are not applicable 16 30 DS6878 Product Referen
248. f the Function Key Mapping is enabled Otherwise the unbolded keystroke is sent USB Interface 7 25 Table 7 3 USB ALT Key Character Set ALT Keys Keystroke 2064 ALT 2 2065 ALTA 2066 ALT B 2067 ALT C 2068 ALT D 2069 ALTE 2070 ALT F 2071 ALT G 2072 ALT H 2073 ALT 2074 ALT J 2075 ALT K 2076 ALT L 2077 ALT M 2078 ALT N 2079 ALT O 2080 ALT P 2081 ALT Q 2082 ALT R 2083 ALT S 2084 ALT T 2085 ALT U 2086 ALT V 2087 ALT W 2088 ALT X 2089 ALT Y 2090 ALT Z 7 26 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Table 7 4 USB GUI Key Character Set GUI Key Keystroke 3000 Right Control Key 3048 GUI 0 3049 GUI 1 3050 GUI 2 3051 GUI 3 3052 GUI 4 3053 GUI5 3054 GUI 6 3055 GUI 7 3056 GUI 8 3057 GUI 9 3065 GUIA 3066 GUI B 3067 GUI C 3068 GUI D 3069 GUIE 3070 GUI F 3071 GUI G 3072 GUI H 3073 GUI I 3074 GUI J 3075 GUI K 3076 GUI L 3077 GUI M 3078 GUI N 3079 GUI O 3080 GUI P Note GUI Shift Keys The Apple iMac keyboard has an apple key on either side of the space bar Windows based systems have a GUI key to the left of the left ALT key and to the right of the right ALT key USB Interface 7 27 Table 7 4 USB GUI Key Character Set Continued GUI Key Keystroke 3081 GUI Q 3082 GUI R 3083 GUI S 3084 GUI T 308
249. ferent from those illustrated but the steps to connect the cradle remain the same Getting Started 1 9 Supplying Power to the CR0078 S CR0008 S Cradle The CR0078 S CRO008 S cradle receives power from one of two sources e An external power supply e When connected to the host through a host cable that supplies power CR0078 S only The cradle detects whether the host or the external supply is supplying power It always draws power from the external supply when available regardless of the presence of power from a host IMPORTANT For healthcare environments use cradle p n CRO078 SC1009BWR and place the ferrite core A included in box with cradle on the power supply refer to the Power Supply Ferrite Installation instructions included in the box Using the USB Interface to Supply Power When the CR0078 S cradle is connected to the host via the USB interface it can be powered by the USB port instead of an external power supply Powering from a USB host limits charging The digital scanner charges at a slower rate than when charging from an external power supply V NOTE The radio link functions normally when the cradle draws power from a USB host 1 10 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Connecting the CR0078 P Series Cradle Connect the interface cable and power supply if necessary in the following order to ensure proper operation of the digital scanner and cradle 1 2 Insert the interface cable into the cradle s host po
250. gital scanner s capability Symbologies 15 39 Set Lengths for Code 93 continued Code 93 One Discrete Length Code 93 Two Discrete Lengths Code 93 Length Within Range Code 93 Any Length 15 40 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Code 11 Code 11 To enable or disable Code 11 scan the appropriate bar code below Enable Code 11 01h Disable Code 11 00h Set Lengths for Code 11 The length of a code refers to the number of characters i e human readable characters including check digit s the code contains Set lengths for Code 11 to any length one or two discrete lengths or lengths within a specific range e One Discrete Length Select this option to decode only Code 11 symbols containing a selected length Select the length using the numeric bar codes in Appendix D Numeric Bar Codes For example to decode only Code 11 symbols with 14 characters scan Code 11 One Discrete Length then scan 1 followed by 4 To correct an error or to change the selection scan Cancel on page D 3 e Two Discrete Lengths Select this option to decode only Code 11 symbols containing either of two selected lengths Select lengths using the numeric bar codes in Appendix D Numeric Bar Codes
251. gital scanner and move the digital scanner to a location within normal operating temperature The digital scanner can remain in the cradle while the battery warms or cools to normal operating temperature Note For appropriate charging temperatures see Table 3 3 on page 3 10 J NOTE f the scanner was previously unpowered and the LED indicator light is solid red the scanner is in pre charge mode It is normal for pre charge mode to last several seconds while the scanner powers up however it can last several minutes if the battery has significantly discharged due to excessive use or storage If the solid red LED condition persists there may be a problem with the battery or the scanner in which case discontinue use of the scanner and contact Motorola Solutions support Table 2 3 Scanner LED Definitions with CR0078 P Cradle Green Solid LED Indication Blinks off for a decode then turns solid green until the next decode Red Solid Communication error with cradle Table 2 4 CR0078 S CRO008 S Cradle LED Definitions Green Solid LED Indication Cradle is powered Green Flash Cradle is externally powered with a USB host interface that suspended the cradle The cradle is no longer connected to the digital scanner but charges the digital scanner Scan the pairing bar code to pair the scanner and cradle see Pairing on page 4 19 Red Flash Transmission error Scanning 2 5 Table 2 5 CR0078 P C
252. he buffer holds 200 bytes of information To disable Code 39 buffering when there is data in the transmission buffer first force the buffer transmission see Transmit Buffer on page 15 37 or clear the buffer Buffer Data To buffer data enable Code 39 buffering and scan a Code 39 symbol with a space immediately following the start pattern e Unless the data overflows the transmission buffer the digital scanner issues a low high beep to indicate successful decode and buffering For overflow conditions see Overfilling Transmission Buffer on page 15 37 e The digital scanner adds the decoded data excluding the leading space to the transmission buffer e No transmission occurs Clear Transmission Buffer To clear the transmission buffer scan the Clear Buffer bar code below which contains only a start character a dash minus and a stop character e The digital scanner issues a short high low high beep e The digital scanner erases the transmission buffer e No transmission occurs Clear Buffer J NOTE The Clear Buffer contains only the dash minus character In order to scan this command set Code 39 lengths to include length 1 Symbologies 15 37 Transmit Buffer There are two methods to transmit the Code 39 buffer 1 Scan the Transmit Buffer bar code below which includes only a start character a plus and a stop character 2 The digital scanner transmits and clears the buffer e The dig
253. he code contains Set lengths for Code 93 to any length one or two discrete lengths or lengths within a specific range e One Discrete Length Select this option to decode only Code 93 symbols containing a selected length Select the length using the numeric bar codes in Appendix D Numeric Bar Codes For example to decode only Code 93 symbols with 14 characters scan Code 93 One Discrete Length then scan 1 followed by 4 To correct an error or to change the selection scan Cancel on page D 3 e Two Discrete Lengths Select this option to decode only Code 93 symbols containing either of two selected lengths Select lengths using the numeric bar codes in Appendix D Numeric Bar Codes For example to decode only Code 93 symbols containing either 2 or 14 characters select Code 93 Two Discrete Lengths then scan 0 2 1 and then 4 To correct an error or to change the selection scan Cancel on page D 3 e Length Within Range Select this option to decode a Code 93 symbol with a specific length range Select lengths using the numeric bar codes in Appendix D Numeric Bar Codes For example to decode Code 93 symbols containing between 4 and 12 characters first scan Code 93 Length Within Range Then scan 0 4 1 and 2 enter a leading zero for single digit numbers To correct an error or change the selection scan Cancel on page D 3 e Any Length Scan this option to decode Code 93 symbols containing any number of characters within the di
254. he keyboard type North American Standard Keyboards French Windows French Canadian Windows 98 French International German Windows Radio Communications 4 9 HID Country Keyboard Types continued Spanish Windows Italian Windows Swedish Windows UK English Windows Japanese Windows French Canadian Windows 2000 XP Portuguese Brazilian Windows 4 10 DS6878 Product Reference Guide HID Keyboard Keystroke Delay This parameter sets the delay in milliseconds between emulated keystrokes Scan a bar code below to increase the delay when the HID host requires a slower transmission of data No Delay 0 msec Medium Delay 20 msec HID CAPS Lock Override When enabled the case of the data is preserved regardless of the state of the caps lock key This setting is always enabled for the Japan
255. he same whether or not this parameter is enabled Enable Function Key Mapping Disable Function Key Mapping FN1 Substitution When enabled the digital scanner replaces FN1 characters in an EAN128 bar code with a keystroke chosen by the user see ENT Substitution Values on page 5 50 Enable FN1 Substitution Disable FN1 Substitution 9 12 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Send Make and Break When enabled the scan codes for releasing a key are not sent Send Make and Break Scan Codes Send Make Scan Code Only Keyboard Wedge Interface 9 13 Keyboard Maps Refer to the following keyboard map for prefix suffix keystroke parameters To program the prefix suffix values see the bar codes on page 5 48 a S P Els EEEE ez EIS g GE LL LEIILLILILL ees CT BEER J J UOL L CL IC L JO JOE lee CJL Ne SS Figure 9 2 BM PS2 Type Keyboard 9 14 DS6878 Product Reference Guide ASCII Character Set for Keyboard Wedge J NOTE Code 39 Full ASCII interprets the bar code special
256. hen scanning a bar code of length 15 send the next 2 characters send the class key send the next 8 characters send the stock key To switch between the two sets of rules program a switching rule that specifies what type of bar code to scan to switch between the rule sets For example in the case of the sale rule above the rule programmer wants the cashier to scan the bar code M before a sale To do this a rule can be entered as follows When scanning a bar code of length 1 that begins with M select rule set number 1 Program another rule to switch back When scanning a bar code of length 1 that begins with N turn off rule set number 1 Or include the switching back to normal rules in the sale rule When scanning a bar code of length 15 send the next 2 characters send the class key send the next 8 characters send the stock key turn off rule set 1 For optimal results scan the Disable AU Rule Sets bar code on page 16 10 after programming a rule belonging to an alternate rule set In addition to enabling and disabling rule sets within the rules enable or disable them by scanning the appropriate bar codes on page 16 10 Rules Hierarchy in Bar Codes The order of programming individual rules is important Program the most general rule first All programmed rules are stored in a buffer As they are programmed they are stored at the top of a rules list If you create three rules the list is
257. his interface and this is the most common selection Table A 1 Standard Default Parameters Table Continued Standard Default Parameters Parameter Default Ra PDF Prioritization Timeout 200ms 5 28 Continuous Bar Code Read Disable 5 29 Unique Bar Code Reporting Disable 5 29 Decode Session Timeout 9 9 Sec 5 30 Timeout Between Decodes Same Symbol 0 5 Sec 5 31 Timeout Between Decodes Different Symbols 0 2 Sec 5 31 Fuzzy 1D Processing Enable 5 32 Hand Held Decode Aiming Pattern Enable 5 33 Hands Free Decode Aiming Pattern Enable on PDF 5 34 Presentation Mode Field of View Full 5 35 Decoding lllumination Enable 5 36 Multicode Mode Disable 5 36 Multicode Expression 1 5 37 Multicode Mode Concatenation Disable 5 43 Multicode Concatenation Symbology Concatenate as PDF417 5 44 Miscellaneous Options Transmit Code ID Character None 5 47 Prefix Value 7013 lt CR gt lt LF gt 5 48 Suffix 1 Value 7013 lt CR gt lt LF gt 5 48 Suffix 2 Value Scan Data Transmission Format Data as is 5 49 FN1 Substitution Values Set 5 50 Transmit No Read Message Disable 5 51 Imaging Preferences Operational Modes N A 6 4 Image Capture Illumination Enable 6 5 Gain Exposure Priority for Snapshot Mode Autodetect 6 6 Snapshot Mode Timeout 0 30 seconds 6 7 1User selection is required to configure this interface and this is the most common selection A 3 A 4 DS68
258. i DS6878 Product Reference Guide Charging the Digital Scanner Battery Charging LED Shutting Off the Digital Scanner Battery cccceceieeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesnaeeeeeeaes 1 16 Reconditioning the Digital Scanner Battery ccccceececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeetenaeeeeeees 1 17 Battery Reconditioning LED Definitions 1 17 Wall Mount Bracket Template eege deeg 1 18 Radio eut e EE 1 20 Configuring the Digital Scanner E 1 20 EE 1 20 LIV ANG EE 1 20 Chapter 2 Scanning Det Le WEE 2 1 Beeper Re e 2 1 LEDDETINIUONS eeh 2 3 Eege E 2 6 Hand Held Scanning RE 2 6 Hands Free Scanning EE 2 7 AMINO WEE 2 7 Decode Ranges secarnersesiieni anaa A A R a a 2 9 Chapter 3 Maintenance Troubleshooting amp Technical Specifications Introduction EE 3 1 Eet e 3 1 Ter 3 1 Digital Scanner Cradle EE 3 2 Known Harmful Ingredients ecccceceeeeeeeseceeeeeeeeeeseeaeeeseneeseesseeaeeeeeeeeees 3 2 Daily Cleaning and Disinfecting AAA 3 2 Monthly Deep Cleaning Maintenance ssssesesseneeesneeestrrserrrnrertnnrrrerressrrrnsrrn nne 3 3 Battery MOER eege EE 3 4 TEE sss pina a a a ea AN EE 3 4 Technical Specifications E 3 9 Cradle Signal Descriptions AANEREN 3 12 Chapter 4 Radio Communications ETON TOD asses Staats et ceed ose tse A E A eee 4 1 Scanning Sequence Examples AA 4 1 Errors While Scanning EE 4 1 Radio Communications Parameter Defaults cceeccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeennaeeee
259. if it were processed Disable Enable 10 6 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Ignore Bar Code Configuration The host has the ability to enable disable code types When this parameter is enabled the request is not sent to the attached digital scanner All directives are still acknowledged to the IBM RS485 host as if it were processed Disable Enable Chapter 11 Wand Emulation Interface Introduction This chapter provides instructions for programming the cradle to interface with a wand emulation host This mode is used whenever wand emulation communication is needed The digital scanner cradle connects either to an external wand decoder or to a decoder integrated in a portable terminal or Point of Sale POS terminal In this mode the digital scanner emulates the signal of a digital wand to make it readable by a wand decoder Throughout the programming bar code menus default values are indicated with asterisks wi Indicates Defaut Transmit Unknown Characters __ Feature Option 11 2 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Connecting Using Wand Emulation J NOTE See Chapter 4 Radio Communications for information about digital scanner cradle pairing and wireless communication The digital scanner must be connected to the cradle for the host parameter setting to take effect When the digital scanner is not connected to a cradle and a host parameter bar code is scann
260. igital scanner and cradle to pair connect when the pairing bar code on the cradle is scanned A second method pairs the digital scanner and cradle when the digital scanner is inserted in the cradle To enable this feature scan Enable Pair On Contacts below With this feature enabled it is not necessary to scan the pairing bar code on the cradle If the pairing is successful a low high connection beep sequence sounds a few seconds after the digital scanner is placed in the cradle See Wireless Beeper Definitions on page 4 3 for other beep sequences To enable or disable pairing on contacts scan the appropriate bar code below Enable Pair On Contacts Disable Pair on Contacts Unpairing Unpair the digital scanner from the cradle or PC host to make the cradle available for pairing with another digital scanner Scan the bar code below to disconnect the digital scanner from its cradle PC host An unpairing bar code is also included in the DS6878 Quick Reference Guide Unpairing 4 22 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Pairing Bar Code Format When the digital scanner is configured as an SPP Master you must create a pairing bar code for the remote Bluetooth device to which the digital scanner can connect The Bluetooth address of the remote device must be known Pairing bar codes are Code 128 bar codes and are formatted as follows lt Fnc 3 gt BXXXXXXXXXXXX where e
261. ing external power and up to five hours using non external cable power CAUTION To avoid a battery temperature fault always charge the battery in the digital scanner within the recommended temperature of 32 to 104 F 0 to 40 C nominal 41 to 95 F 5 to 35 C ideal Charging LED When powered up the cradle LED is always green The digital scanner LED flashes green during charging See Table 2 2 on page 2 3 for all charging LED indications Shutting Off the Digital Scanner Battery To shut off the NiMH battery for long term storage or shipping Battery Off 2 To turn the battery back on place the digital scanner in the cradle 1 Scan Battery Off below J NOTE Always scan the Battery Off bar code in handheld mode Getting Started 1 17 Reconditioning the Digital Scanner Battery To maintain optimal performance of the digital scanner NiMH battery perform a battery recondition approximately once a year To begin the battery recondition cycle 1 Scan Battery Recondition below Battery Recondition 2 Place the digital scanner into the cradle J NOTE f the scanner is removed from the cradle during the battery reconditioning cycle the scanner exits the battery reconditioning mode of operation and returns to the normal mode of battery charging see Charging the Digital Scanner Battery on page 1 16 To restart the battery reconditioning cycle re scan the Battery Recondition parameter and pl
262. inimum reflective difference A measurement of print contrast N Nominal The exact or ideal intended value for a specified parameter Tolerances are specified as positive and negative deviations from this value Nominal Size Standard size for a bar code symbol Most UPC EAN codes are used over a range of magnifications e g from 0 80 to 2 00 of nominal ODI See Open Data Link Interface Open Data Link Interface ODI Novell s driver specification for an interface between network hardware and higher level protocols It supports multiple protocols on a single NIC Network Interface Controller It is capable of understanding and translating any network information or request sent by any other ODI compatible protocol into something a NetWare client can understand and process Open System Authentication Open System authentication is a null authentication algorithm P PAN Personal area network Using Bluetooth wireless technology PANs enable devices to communicate wirelessly Generally a wireless PAN consists of a dynamic group of less than 255 devices that communicate within about a 33 foot range Only devices within this limited area typically participate in the network Parameter A variable that can have different values assigned to it Percent Decode The average probability that a single scan of a bar code would result in a successful decode In a well designed bar code scanning system that probability should a
263. is selected all bar code data is sent except for unknown characters and no error beeps sound on the digital scanner When Do Not Send Bar Codes With Unknown Characters is selected bar code data is sent up to the first unknown character then the digital scanner issues an error beep Send Bar Codes with Unknown Characters Do Not Send Bar Codes with Unknown Characters 9 8 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Keystroke Delay This is the delay in milliseconds between emulated keystrokes Scan a bar code below to increase the delay when hosts require a slower transmission of data No Delay Medium Delay 20 msec Long Delay 40 msec Intra Keystroke Delay When enabled an additional delay is inserted between each emulated key depression and release This sets the Keystroke Delay parameter to a minimum of 5 msec as well Enable Intra Keystroke Delay Disable Intra Keystroke Delay Keyboard Wedge Interface 9 9 Alternate Numeric Keypad Emulation This allows emulation of most other country keyboard types not listed in Keyboard Wedge Country Types Country Codes on page 9 5 in a Microsoft operating system environment Enable Alternate Numeric Keypad Disable Alternate Numeric Keypad
264. iscellaneous digital scanner defaults About This Guide xxi e Appendix B Programming Reference provides a table of AIM code identifiers ASCII character conversions and keyboard maps e Appendix C Sample Bar Codes includes sample bar codes e Appendix D Numeric Bar Codes includes the numeric bar codes to scan for parameters requiring specific numeric values e Appendix E Alphanumeric Bar Codes includes the bar codes representing the alphanumeric keyboard used when setting ADF rules e Appendix E ASCII Character Sets provides ASCII character value tables e Appendix G Signature Capture Code provides information on CapCode a signature capture code that encloses a signature area on a document and allows a scanner to capture a signature Notational Conventions The following conventions are used in this document e Italics are used to highlight chapters and sections in this and related documents e Bold text is used to highlight parameter names and options e bullets indicate e Action items e Lists of alternatives e Lists of required steps that are not necessarily sequential e Sequential lists e g those that describe step by step procedures appear as numbered lists e Throughout the programming bar code menus asterisks are used to denote default parameter settings _ Baud Rate 9600 Indicates Default Feature Option J NOTE This symbol indicates something of special interest or importance to the rea
265. it window Wipe the scanner exit window with a lens tissue or other material suitable for cleaning optical material such as eyeglasses 3 Scanner connector a b Dip the cotton portion of a cotton tipped applicator in isopropyl alcohol Rub the cotton portion of the cotton tipped applicator back and forth across the connector on the Motorola scanner Do not leave any cotton residue on the connector Repeat at least 3 times Use the cotton tipped applicator dipped in alcohol to remove any grease and dirt near the connector area Use a dry cotton tipped applicator and repeat steps c d and e do not apply alcohol as directed in any of these steps 4 Cradle connector Remove the DC power cable from the cradle Dip the cotton portion of a cotton tipped applicator in isopropyl alcohol Rub the cotton portion of the cotton tipped applicator along the pins of the connector Slowly move the applicator back and forth from one side of the connector to the other Do not let any cotton residue remain on the connector Rub all sides of the connector with the cotton tipped applicator Spray compressed air in the connector area by pointing the tube nozzle approximately 1 2 inch 1 cm away from the surface CAUTION When using compressed air always wear eye protection do not point nozzle at yourself or others make sure the nozzle or tube is pointing away from your face read warning label on compressed air product Ensure that there is
266. ital scanner or up to three digital scanners for the CROO78 S and up to seven digital scanners for the CR0078 P in Multipoint to Point mode any attempt to connect a different digital scanner by either scanning the PAIR bar code on the cradle or by inserting it into the cradle with the pairing on contacts feature enabled page 4 27 is rejected The currently connected digital scanner s maintain connection In this mode you must set a Connection Maintenance Interval on page 4 23 e Unlocked Pairing Mode Pair connect a new digital scanner to a cradle at any time by either scanning the PAIR bar code on the cradle or by inserting it into the cradle with the pairing on contacts feature enabled This unpairs the previous digital scanner from the cradle Point to Point mode only To set the cradle pairing mode scan the appropriate bar code below Unlocked Pairing Mode Locked Pairing Mode Lock Override Lock Override overrides a locked digital scanner base pairing and connects a new digital scanner In Multipoint to Point mode this unpairs any disconnected out of range digital scanner first in order to connect the new digital scanner To use Lock Override scan the bar code below followed by the pairing bar code on the cradle LockOverride Radio Communications 4 21 Pairing Methods There are two pairing methods The default method allows the d
267. ital scanner issues a low high beep Transmit Buffer 3 Scan a Code 39 bar code with a leading character other than a space e The digital scanner appends new decode data to buffered data e The digital scanner transmits and clears the buffer e The digital scanner signals that it transmitted the buffer with a low high beep e The digital scanner transmits and clears the buffer J NOTE The Transmit Buffer contains only a plus character In order to scan this command set Code 39 lengths to include length 1 Overfilling Transmission Buffer The Code 39 buffer holds 200 characters If the symbol just read overflows the transmission buffer e The digital scanner indicates that it rejected the symbol by issuing three long high beeps e No transmission occurs The data in the buffer is not affected Attempt to Transmit an Empty Buffer If you scan the Transmit Buffer symbol and the Code 39 buffer is empty e A short low high low beep signals that the buffer is empty e No transmission occurs e The buffer remains empty 15 38 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Code 93 Enable Disable Code 93 To enable or disable Code 93 scan the appropriate bar code below Enable Code 93 01h Disable Code 93 00h Set Lengths for Code 93 The length of a code refers to the number of characters i e human readable characters including check digit s t
268. ld Send Keypad 1 Advanced Data Formatting 16 71 Send Keypad Characters continued Send Keypad 2 Send Keypad 3 Send Keypad 4 Send Keypad 5 Send Keypad 6 Send Keypad 7 Send Keypad 8 16 72 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Send Keypad Characters continued Send Keypad 9 Send Keypad Enter Send Keypad Numlock Send Break Key Send Delete Key Send Page Up Key Send End Key Advanced Data Formatting 16 73 Send Keypad Characters continued Send Page Down Key Send Pause Key Send Scroll Lock Key Send Backspace Key Send Tab Key Send Print Screen Key Send Insert Key
269. le to decode only Code 39 symbols with 14 characters scan Code 39 One Discrete Length then scan 1 followed by 4 To correct an error or change the selection scan Cancel on page D 3 e Two Discrete Lengths Select this option to decode only Code 39 symbols containing either of two selected lengths Select lengths using the numeric bar codes in Appendix D Numeric Bar Codes For example to decode only Code 39 symbols containing either 2 or 14 characters select Code 39 Two Discrete Lengths then scan 0 2 1 and then 4 To correct an error or change the selection scan Cancel on page D 3 e Length Within Range Select this option to decode a Code 39 symbol with a specific length range Select lengths using numeric bar codes in Appendix D Numeric Bar Codes For example to decode Code 39 symbols containing between 4 and 12 characters first scan Code 39 Length Within Range Then scan 0 4 1 and 2 enter a leading zero for single digit numbers To correct an error or change the selection scan Cancel on page D 3 e Any Length Select this option to decode Code 39 symbols containing any number of characters within the digital scanner s capability Code 39 One Discrete Length Code 39 Two Discrete Lengths Code 39 Length Within Range
270. le 978 979 Supplemental Mode in Decode UPC EAN JAN Supplementals on page 15 11 Symbologies 15 23 UCC Coupon Extended Code Parameter 55h Enable this parameter to decode UPC A bar codes starting with digit 5 EAN 13 bar codes starting with digit 99 and UPC A GS1 128 Coupon Codes UPCA EAN 13 and GS1 128 must be enabled to scan all types of Coupon Codes Enable UCC Coupon Extended Code 01h Disable UCC Coupon Extended Code 00h J NOTE See UPC EAN JAN Supplemental Redundancy on page 15 14 to control autodiscrimination of the GS1 128 right half of a coupon code 15 24 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Coupon Report Parameter F1h DAh Select an option to determine which type of coupon format to support Select Old Coupon Format to support UPC A GS1 128 and EAN 13 GS1 128 e Select New Coupon Format as an interim format to support UPC A GS1 DataBar and EAN 13 GS1 DataBar e If you select Autodiscriminate Format the digital scanner supports both Old Coupon Format and New Coupon Format Old Coupon Format 00h New Coupon Format 01h Autodiscriminate Coupon Format 02h Symbologies 15 25 ISSN EAN Parameter F1h 69h
271. le Back View Getting Started 1 7 Digital Scanner Cradle The digital scanner cradles CR0078 S and CR0078 P serve as a stand charger and host interface for the digital scanner The cradle sits on a desktop The CR0078 S cradle can also be mounted on a vertical surface Such as a wall For more information about mounting options and procedures refer to the documentation included with the cradle The CR0078 S cradle is available as a charging cradle with a radio and as a charge only cradle The CRO078 P cradle is only available as a charging cradle with a radio The differences between the two versions are as follows e Charging cradle with radio When the cordless digital scanner is paired to the cradle all communication between the digital scanner and the host computer is accomplished through the cradle Each bar code contains programming instructions or other data unique to the bar code pattern The digital scanner is paired to the cradle and transmits bar code data to the cradle via Bluetooth Technology Profile Support The cradle then sends that information via an interface cable to the host computer for interpretation e Charge only cradle This cradle serves as a stand and battery charger It does not contain a radio and has no communication capability J NOTE For more information about communication between the digital scanner cradle and host see Chapter 4 Radio Communications The following table outlines several main difference
272. le Codabar 00h Set Lengths for Codabar The length of a code refers to the number of characters i e human readable characters including check digit s the code contains Set lengths for Codabar to any length one or two discrete lengths or lengths within a specific range e One Discrete Length Select this option to decode only Codabar symbols containing a selected length Select the length using the numeric bar codes in Appendix D Numeric Bar Codes For example to decode only Codabar symbols with 14 characters scan Codabar One Discrete Length then scan 1 followed by 4 To correct an error or to change the selection scan Cancel on page D 3 e Two Discrete Lengths Select this option to decode only Codabar symbols containing either of two selected lengths Select lengths using the numeric bar codes in Appendix D Numeric Bar Codes For example to decode only Codabar symbols containing either 2 or 14 characters select Codabar Two Discrete Lengths then scan 0 2 1 and then 4 To correct an error or to change the selection scan Cancel on page D 3 e Length Within Range Select this option to decode a Codabar symbol with a specific length range Select lengths using numeric bar codes in Appendix D Numeric Bar Codes For example to decode Codabar symbols containing between 4 and 12 characters first scan Codabar Length Within Range Then scan 0 4 1 and 2 enter a leading zero for single digit numbers To correct an error or
273. lidator accepts a special character if present Optional characters are not allowed as the first character s in a field of like characters Small special characters are and Template Valid data Valid data Invalid data AA 99 MN 35 XY98 XYZ12 Other Template Operators These template operators assist in capturing delimiting and formatting scanned OCR data Literal String and DI Use either of these delimiting characters surrounding characters from the alphanumeric keyboard in Chapter 16 Advanced Data Formatting to define a literal string within a template that must be present in scanned OCR data There are two characters used to delimit required literal strings if one of the delimiter characters is present in the desired literal string use the other delimiter Template Valid data Invalid data 35 BC 35 BC AB 22 OCR Programming 14 21 New Line E To create a template of multiple lines add E between the template of each single line E Template Valid data Valid data Invalid data 999FAAAA 321 987 XYZW BCAD ZXYW 12 String Extract C This operator combined with others defines a string of characters to extract from the scanned data The string extract is structured as follows Cc CbPe Where e cis the string extract operator e bis the string begin delimiter e pP is the category one or more numeric or alpha characters describing the string representation e eis the string end delimiter Valu
274. light black DS6878 HD20007WR DS6878 digital scanner high density twilight black XX DS6878 Product Reference Guide Chapter Descriptions Topics covered in this guide are as follows e Chapter 1 Getting Started provides a product overview unpacking instructions and cable connection information e Chapter 2 Scanning describes parts of the digital scanner beeper and LED definitions and how to use the digital scanner e Chapter 3 Maintenance Troubleshooting amp Technical Specifications provides information on how to care for the digital scanner and cradle troubleshooting and technical specifications e Chapter 4 Radio Communications provides information about the modes of operation and features available for wireless communication This chapter also includes programming bar codes to configure the digital scanner e Chapter 5 User Preferences amp Miscellaneous Digital Scanner Options provides programming bar codes for selecting user preference features for the digital scanner and commonly used bar codes to customize how the data is transmitted to the host device e Chapter 6 Imaging Preferences provide imaging preference features and programming bar codes for selecting these items e Chapter 7 USB Interface provides information for setting up the digital scanner and cradle for USB operation e Chapter 8 RS 232 Interface provides information for setting up the digital scanner and cradle for RS 232 operation e Chap
275. low power consumption mode after Sleep Mode has expired in which the LEDs turn off in order to conserve energy and prolong the life of the scanner The digital scanner wakes when it is lifted senses a trigger pull or when the host attempts to communicate If disabled power remains on after each decode attempt Disable Low Power Mode 00h Enable Low Power Mode 01h User Preferences amp Miscellaneous Digital Scanner Options 5 17 Time Delay to Reduced Power Mode Parameter 92h This parameter sets the time it takes the digital scanner to enter reduced power mode after any scanning activity Scan the appropriate bar code below to set the time 5 00 1 100 1 sec 2 secs 3 secs 4 secs 5 secs 5 18 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Digital Scanner Activity Modes The digital scanner is capable of four modes of activity e Active Mode The digital scanner uses full illumination for active scanning e Idle Mode In presentation mode only the digital scanner s illumination dims after a programmable time period See Time Delay to Presentation Idle Mode on page 5 19 The digital scanner wakes when it is lifted or senses motion upon presentation of a bar code or upon a trigger pull e Sleep Mode In presentation mode only the
276. lowing bar codes Standard RS 232 ICL RS 232 Wincor Nixdorf RS 232 Mode A Wincor Nixdorf RS 232 Mode B Olivetti ORS4500 RS 232 Interface RS 232 Host Types continued Omron OPOS JPOS Fujitsu RS 232 SITA CUTE J NOTE The SITA CUTE host disables all parameter scanning including set defaults If the SITA CUTE parameter is inadvertently selected scan Enable Parameter Bar Code Scanning 01h on page 5 6 then change the host selection 8 7 8 8 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Baud Rate Baud rate is the number of bits of data transmitted per second Set the digital scanner s baud rate to match the baud rate setting of the host device Otherwise data may not reach the host device or may reach it in distorted form Baud Rate 9600 Baud Rate 19 200 Baud Rate 38 400 RS 232 Interface 8 9 Baud Rate continued The following Baud Rate parameters Baud Rate 57 600 and Baud Rate 115 200 apply to the CR0078 P cradle only Baud Rate 57 600 Baud Rate 115 200 8 10 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Parity
277. lue to two bytes by adding 00 before the parameter number Defining Multicode Expression Notes When defining multicode expressions consider the following e Use the Code Type specifier if there are bar codes of more than one code type in view e Always use the Region specifier when there are multiple bar codes of the same code type e When transmission order is important the first element in the expression transmits first use either type to define the order e When there are unwanted bar codes in view filter them out in one of two ways e Use Code Type to specify only the target bar codes e Use Region to identify only the target bar codes e Ifthe expression does not contain a Region specifier scanning angle and distance do not matter If you specify a region you must scan in a fixed orientation and at a fixed distance Because of this it is preferable to use the Code Type specifier rather than the Region specifier e When defining regions e Defining a region much larger than the bar code improves tolerance to scan distance and angle but can cause a decode of a nearby bar code instead of the target bar code Therefore for best performance define larger regions when only a few bar codes are in view and those in view are widely separated e Defining a region close to or smaller than the target bar code improves the probability of decoding this bar code rather than one nearby but scan distance and angle must be more accurate Therefor
278. mation about beeper and LED definitions see Table 2 1 and Table 2 2 Scanning 2 7 Hands Free Scanning The digital scanner is in hands free presentation mode when it sits in the CR0078 P cradle In this mode the digital scanner operates in continuous constant on mode where it automatically decodes a bar code presented in the field of view To scan 1 Ensure all connections are secure See appropriate host chapter 2 Present the bar code in the digital scanner field of view Figure 2 2 Scanning 3 Upon successful decode the digital scanner beeps and the LED flashes green For more information about beeper and LED definitions see Table 2 1 and Table 2 2 Aiming When scanning the digital scanner projects a red laser aiming pattern which allows positioning the bar code within its field of view See Decode Ranges on page 2 9 for the proper distance to achieve between the digital scanner and a bar code Figure 2 3 Imager Aiming Pattern 2 8 DS6878 Product Reference Guide To scan a bar code center the symbol in any orientation within the aiming pattern Ensure the entire symbol is within the rectangular area formed by the cross pattern 1D bar code 2D bar code 9 Figure 2 4 Scanning Orientation with Imager Aiming Pattern The digital scanner can also read a bar code presented within the aiming pattern but not centered The top examples in Figure 2 5 show acceptable aiming options while the bottom ex
279. me on any authorized copies it makes in whole or in part The user agrees not to decompile disassemble decode or reverse engineer any licensed program delivered to the user or any portion thereof Motorola reserves the right to make changes to any software or product to improve reliability function or design Motorola does not assume any product liability arising out of or in connection with the application or use of any product circuit or application described herein No license is granted either expressly or by implication estoppel or otherwise under any Motorola Inc intellectual property rights An implied license only exists for equipment circuits and subsystems contained in Motorola products MOTOROLA MOTO MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS and the Stylized M Logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Motorola Trademark Holding LLC and are used under license All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners This media or Motorola Product may include Motorola Software Commercial Third Party Software and Publicly Available Software The Motorola Software that may be included on this media or included in the Motorola Product is Copyright c by Motorola Inc and its use is subject to the licenses terms and conditions of the agreement in force between the purchaser of the Motorola Product and Motorola Inc The Commercial Third Party Software that may be included on this media or included in the Motorola Produc
280. mented 3 Model 2 symbol ECI protocol not implemented FNC1 implied in first position 4 Model 2 symbol ECI protocol implemented FNC1 implied in first position 5 Model 2 symbol ECI protocol not implemented FNC1 implied in second position 6 Model 2 symbol ECI protocol implemented FNC1 implied in second position Aztec 0 Aztec symbol C Aztec Rune symbol B 8 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Appendix C Sample Bar Codes Code 39 3ABC UPC EAN UPC A 100 Dr C 2 DS6878 Product Reference Guide EAN 13 100 456789 012340 3 Code 128 12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234 Interleaved 2 of 5 12345678901231 Sample Bar Codes C 3 GS1 DataBar J NOTE GS1 DataBar variants must be enabled to read the bar codes below see GS1 DataBar on page 15 68 102938475601 92837465019283746029478450366523 GS1 DataBar Expanded Stacked 1234890hjio9900mnb GS1 DataBar Expanded 08672345650916 GS1 DataBar Limited C 4 DS6878 Product Reference Guide GS1 DataBar 14 UI MIA 55432198673467 GS1 DataBar 14 Truncated DN OK 90876523412674 GS1 DataBar 14 Stacked N 78123465709811 GS1 DataBar 14 Stacked Omni Directional PDF417 W U i Data Matrix AT Si d Sample Bar Codes C 5 Maxicode of x2 fee out Hane OR Code US Postnet lun lala lb ralla lakal
281. meter to 1 then set the 3 digit decimal value See Table E on page E 1 for the four digit codes To correct an error or change a selection scan Cancel on page D 3 J NOTE To use Prefix Suffix values first set the Scan Data Transmission Format on page 5 49 Scan Prefix 07h Scan Suffix 1 06h Scan Suffix 2 08h Data Format Cancel User Preferences amp Miscellaneous Digital Scanner Options 5 49 Scan Data Transmission Format Parameter EBh To change the scan data format scan one of the following eight bar codes corresponding to the desired format J NOTE f using this parameter do not use ADF rules to set the prefix suffix To set values for the prefix and or suffix see Prefix Suffix Values on page 5 48 Data As Is 00h lt DATA gt lt SUFFIX 1 gt 01h lt DATA gt lt SUFFIX 2 gt 02h lt DATA gt lt SUFFIX 1 gt lt SUFFIX 2 gt 03h lt PREFIX gt lt DATA gt 04h 5 50 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Scan Data Transmission Format continued lt PREFIX gt lt DATA gt lt SUFFIX 1 gt 05h
282. ming bar codes Additionally 123Scan can upgrade scanner firmware check online to enable support for newly released products generate a collection of multi setting bar codes if the number of settings is very large stage large number of scanners simultaneously generate reports with asset tracking information and create custom products Communication with 123Scan2 To communicate with the 123Scan program which runs on a host computer running a Windows XP SP2 or Windows Vista operating system use a USB cable to connect the scanner cradle to the host computer see USB Connection on page 7 2 123Scan Requirements e Host computer with Windows XP SP2 or Windows Vista e Scanner e Cradle e USB cable J NOTE When exiting 123Scan 123Scan will command the device to reset If the scanner is outside of the cradle when it receives the reset command the scanner will turn off To power up the scanner simply place the scanner into the cradle 13 2 DS6878 Product Reference Guide For more information on123Scan go to http www motorola com 123Scan2 To download 123Scan software and access the Help file integrated in the utility go to http support symbol com support product 123Scan2 html Chapter 14 OCR Programming Introduction This chapter describes how to set up the digital scanner for OCR programming The digital scanner can read 6 to 60 point OCR typeface It supports font types OCR A OCR B MICR E13B and US Cu
283. n 02 C 02 00 OF R 04 00 32 64 64 C 02 00 08 R 04 00 00 64 32 End Of Message To program the expression via host command SSI SNAPI the sequence is 0x02 0x43 0x02 0x00 OxOF 0x52 0x04 0x00 0x32 0x64 0x64 0x3B 0x43 0x02 0x00 0x08 0x52 0x04 0x00 0x00 0x64 0x32 0x3B J NOTE The CR0078 S cradle supports SSI The CR0078 P cradle supports SNAPI User Preferences amp Miscellaneous Digital Scanner Options 5 41 0 50 100 0 0 0 Code 128 Code 100 50 50 0 50 PDF417 Code I a l IRANIE 160 100 100 Figure 5 3 Multicode Expression Example 2 5 42 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Example 3 To decode the set of three bar codes while excluding the center Code 128 bar code as in Figure 5 4 the expression is The expression in decimal is formatted for readability 3C2015R40050 50 C 2 FO 24 R 470 0 100 40 C208R465 60 100 100 To program the expression via scanning parameters the sequence is MultiCode Expression 03 C 02 00 OF R 04 00 00 32 32 C 02 FO 24 R 04 46 00 64 28 C 02 00 08 R 04 41 3C 64 64 End Of Message To program the expression via host command SSI SNAPI the sequence is 0x03 0x43 0x02 0x00 OxOF 0x52 0x04 0x00 0x00 0x32 0x32 0x3B 0x43 0x02 OxFO 0x24 0x52 0x04 0x46 0x00 0x64 0x28 0x3B 0x43 0x02 0x00 0x08 0x52 0x04 0x41 Ox3C 0x64 0x64 0x3B y NOTE The CR0078 S cradle supports SSI The CR0078 P cradle s
284. n Polling Interval French Belgian to USB and KBW chapters GS1 DataBar Limited Security Level Move Cursor parameters PDF417 AZTEC Micro QR Micro PDF Maxicode Data Matrix USPS 4CB and UPU FICS Postal Appendix G Signature Capture Correct 5 Secs parameter in Chapter 5 Timeout to Low Power Mode from Auto Aim Send Alt 2 and add Send Alt parameters in ADF chapter Remove Baud Rates 600 1200 2400 and 4800 Stop Bit Select section 03 RevA 1 2012 Add French International Timeout Between Decodes Different Symbols Presentation Mode Field of View Australia Post Format USB Convert Unknown to Code 39 Emulate Keypad with Leading Zero USB Static CDC Update LED indicator definitions battery specification Beeper Tone description Beep on Insertion parameter number Batch Mode parameter number Add note to indicate that the default is Enable for HC Configurations and Disable for Non HC Configurations for the following parameters GS1 Databar Limited Composite A B Composite C Datamatrix and Beep on Decoding Correct Disable Page Button bar code Set Pin Code parameter Remove Matrix 2 of 5 Redundancy parameter Table of Contents Revision HISTON EE iv About This Guide eidele ee EE xix ee lege E xix Chapter Descriptions XX Notational Conventions EE xxi Related Documents cceccscccseecneeceeececececeecececececeeeceececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeteeeneness xxii S tvice MTNA d
285. n Swedish UK English Brazilian Portuguese and Japanese Standard RS 232 connection to a host Scan bar code menus to set up proper communication of the cradle with the host Keyboard Wedge connection to a host The host interprets scanned data as keystrokes This interface supports the following international keyboards for Windows environment North America German French French Canadian Spanish Italian Swedish UK English Portuguese Brazilian and Japanese Connection to IBM 468X 469X hosts Scan bar code menus to set up communication of the cradle with the IBM terminal Wand Emulation connection to a host The cradle CRO078 S only CR0078 P does not support Wand Emulation is connected to a portable data terminal a controller or host which collects the data as wand data and decodes it Scanner Emulation connection to a host The cradle CRO078 S only CR0078 P does not support Scanner Emulation is connected to a portable data terminal a controller which collects the data and interprets it for the host Synapse capability which allows connection to a wide variety of host systems using a Synapse and Synapse adapter cable CRO078 S only CR0078 P does not support Synapse The cradle auto detects the host Configuration via 123Scan NOTE Only the Symbol Native API SNAPI interface supports image capture See USB Device Type on page 7 5 to enable this host Unpacking the Digital Scanner and Cradle Remove the digit
286. n Page Beep Indication 1 Begin New Rule 16 8 High High 2 UPC EAN 16 13 High High 3 Send all remaining data 16 25 High High 4 Send lt CTRL M gt 16 48 High High 5 Save Rule 16 8 High Low High Low To correct any errors made while entering this rule scan the Quit Entering Rules bar code on page 16 9 If you already saved the rule scan the Erase Previously Saved Rule bar code on page 16 9 Alternate Rule Sets You can group ADF rules into one of four alternate sets which you can turn on and off when needed This is useful to format the same message in different ways For example a Code 128 bar code contains the following information Class 2 digits Stock Number 8 digits Price 5 digits The bar code might look like this 245671243701500 where Class 24 Stock Number 56712437 Price 01500 Ordinarily data is sent as follows 24 class key 56712437 stock key 01500 enter key But when there is a sale send only the following 24 class key 56712437 stock key 16 4 DS6878 Product Reference Guide and the cashier keys the price manually To implement this first enter an ADF rule that applies to the normal situation such as Scan Rule Belongs to Set 1 When scanning a bar code of length 15 send the next 2 characters send the class key send the next 8 characters send the stock key send the data that remains send the Enter key The sale rule may look like this Scan Rule Belongs to Set 2 W
287. n Postal 00h 15 64 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Australian Postal To enable or disable Australian Postal scan the appropriate bar code below Enable Australian Postal 01h Disable Australian Postal 00h Symbologies 15 65 Australia Post Format To select one of the following formats for Australia Post scan the appropriate bar code below e Autodiscriminate or Smart mode Attempt to decode the Customer Information Field using the N and C Encoding Tables J NOTE This option increases the risk of misdecodes because the encoded data format does not specify the Encoding Table used for encoding Raw Format Output raw bar patterns as a series of numbers 0 through 3 Alphanumeric Encoding Decode the Customer Information Field using the C Encoding Table e Numeric Encoding Decode the Customer Information Field using the N Encoding Table For more information on Australia Post Encoding Tables refer to the Australia Post Customer Barcoding Technical Specifications available at http www auspost com au Autodiscriminate 00h Raw Format 01h Alphanumeric Encoding 02h Numeric Encoding 03h 15 66 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Netherlands KIX Code To enable or disable Netherlands KIX Code scan the appropriate bar code below Enable Netherlands KIX C
288. n of the ISBT data Enable ISBT 128 01h Disable ISBT 128 00h Symbologies 15 29 ISBT Concatenation Parameter F1h 41h Select an option for concatenating pairs of ISBT code types e If you select Disable ISBT Concatenation the digital scanner does not concatenate pairs of ISBT codes it encounters e lf you select Enable ISBT Concatenation there must be two ISBT codes in order for the digital scanner to decode and perform concatenation The digital scanner does not decode single ISBT symbols e lf you select Autodiscriminate ISBT Concatenation the digital scanner decodes and concatenates pairs of ISBT codes immediately If only a single ISBT symbol is present the digital scanner must decode the symbol the number of times set via ISBT Concatenation Redundancy on page 15 30 before transmitting its data to confirm that there is no additional ISBT symbol Disable ISBT Concatenation 00h Enable ISBT Concatenation O1h Autodiscriminate ISBT Concatenation 00h 15 30 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Check ISBT Table Parameter F1h 42h The ISBT specification includes a table that lists several types of ISBT bar codes that are commonly used in pairs If you set ISBT Concatenation to Enable enable Check ISBT Table to concatenate only those pairs found in this table Other types of ISBT codes are not concatenated Enable Check
289. n the PAIR bar code on the cradle J NOTE When the CR0078 S cradle supports the maximum three digital scanners and the CR0078 P supports the maximum seven digital scanners it stores the remote pairing address of each digital scanner in memory regardless of the digital scanner condition e g discharged battery When you want to change the digital scanners paired to the cradle unpair each digital scanner currently connected to the cradle by scanning the Unpairing bar code prior and reconnect each appropriate digital scanner by scanning the PAIR bar code on the cradle Connection Maintenance Interval options are e 15 minutes e 30 minutes e One hour e Two hours e Four hours e Eight hours e 24 hours e Indefinitely Considerations The system administrator determines the Connection Maintenance Interval A shorter interval allows new users to gain access to abandoned connections more quickly but causes problems if users leave the work area for extended periods A longer interval allows existing users to leave the work area for longer periods of time but ties up the system for new users To avoid this conflict users who are going off shift can scan the unpair bar code on page 4 27 to ignore the Connection Maintenance Interval and make the connection immediately available 4 24 DS6878 Product Reference Guide To set the Connection Maintenance Interval scan one of the bar codes below Set Interval to 15 Minutes Set Interval
290. nds with zeros to length 8 send all data up to X send a space Scanning a Code 39 bar code of 1299X1559828 transmits the following 00001299 lt space gt If you scan a Code 39 bar code of 1299X15598 this rule is ignored because the bar code did not meet the length criteria The rule specifies the editing conditions and requirements before data transmission occurs 16 2 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Using ADF Bar Codes When programming a rule make sure the rule is logically correct Plan ahead before scanning To program each data formatting rule e Start the Rule Scan the Begin New Rule bar code on page 16 8 e Specify Criteria Scan the bar codes for all pertinent criteria Criteria can include code type e g Code 128 code length or data that contains a specific character string e g the digits 129 See Criteria on page 16 11 e Select Actions Scan all actions related to or affecting these criteria The actions of a rule specify how to format the data for transmission See Actions on page 16 25 e Save the Rule Scan the Save Rule bar code on page 16 8 This places the rule in the top position in the rule buffer e To correct any errors see Erase on page 16 9 to erase criteria actions and entire rules ADF Bar Code Menu Example This section provides an example of how to enter and use ADF rules for scan data An auto parts distribution center wants to encode manufacturer ID part number and
291. neeisscctran tacinlins teeinorsdie Menepsiatrencterstieeg cian 14 12 OCR Maximum e 14 13 GF AE 14 13 EE eer ene ee Re eR eebe 14 14 Eed 14 14 OCR Bright Illumination giereg dee eege 14 15 OCR Ent e 14 16 Req ired Digit CC RE 14 16 Required Alph E WE 14 16 Optional Alphanumeric 1 eeeeeeeeeeeeeee cence ee eeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeesaaeeeeeeeaeeeeeeneees 14 17 Optional Alpha 2 geseis Edge 14 17 Alpha bie cacecssgercerss ca deatedantescndanteenesacideiasediinatdeie E RES 14 17 Any Including Space amp Reject 4 EE 14 18 Any except Space amp Reject 5 EE 14 18 Optional Digit E DE 14 18 EE ere 14 19 Alpha or ge Seene 14 19 Required SSCS EE 14 19 Optional Small Special secsevesereessined oo leaicciedtwalececidysateceseaselavhasectysasseceavecastads 14 20 Other Template EC HREEEREssteeteeegeteee EE 14 20 Repeat Previous R NEE 14 24 Template ul 14 25 OCR Check Digit Modulus scscncdicdercssctccrentacaceccdetavnanscnceraguacsdadensnmlavemoneernuedeestiventtte 14 25 OCR Check Digit It EE 14 26 OCR Check Digit Validation rggeshesegtategergege deeg eegne 14 27 NoOne aripii iaa ana aa aaa NA a Ea Ea A a N 14 27 Product Add Left to Re EE 14 27 Product Add Right to TEE 14 28 Digit Add Left to Right ssssssessseeneesneessernstrrrnnererntnrtenrrsrrrrnsrtrnnnetrnnnntnnnnsseerneet 14 28 Digit Add Right to Left E 14 29 Product Add Right to Left Simple Remainder AA 14 30 Digit Add Right To Left Simple Remainder cc ccccc
292. nly sent for ASCII characters not found on the keyboard The default value is Disable Enable Disable 7 14 DS6878 Product Reference Guide USB Keyboard FN 1 Substitution This option applies only to the USB HID Keyboard Emulation device When enabled this allows replacement of any FN 1 characters in an EAN 128 bar code with a Key Category and value chosen by the user see ENT Substitution Values on page 5 50 to set the Key Category and Key Value Enable FN1 Substitution Disable FN1 Substitution USB Static CDC When disabled each device connected consumes another COM port first device COM1 second device COM2 third device COMB etc When enabled each device connects to the same COM port Enable USB Static CDC Disable USB Static CDC USB Interface 7 15 Function Key Mapping ASCII values under 32 are normally sent as a control key sequences see Table 7 2 on page 7 20 When this parameter is enabled the keys in bold are sent in place of the standard key mapping Table entries that do not have a bold entry remain the same whether or not this parameter is enabled Disable Function Key Mapping Enable Function Key Mapping
293. nner Emulation host Undecoded Scanner Emulation Host 12 3 12 4 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Scanner Emulation Host Parameters Beep Style The Scanner Emulation host supports three beep styles e Beep On Successful Transmit The digital scanner beeps when the attached decoder issues the decode signal to the digital scanner so the digital scanner and the attached decoder beep at the same time e Beep At Decode Time The digital scanner beeps upon decode This results in a double beep sequence from most decoders since the digital scanner beeps and the decoder beeps at a different frequency when it successfully decodes the output e Do Not Beep Only the attached decoder issues the decode beep Beep On Successful Transmit Beep At Decode Time Do Not Beep Scanner Emulation Interface 12 5 Parameter Pass Through The Scanner Emulation host can process parameter bar code messages and send them to the attached decoder In this way customers using Symbol compliant decoders can control the behavior of the entire system by scanning the necessary parameters only once For example to enable D 2 of 5 scan the D 2 of 5 Enable parameter bar code The digital scanner and the attached decoder both process the parameter Parameter Process and Pass Through Parameter Process Only 12 6 DS6878 Product Reference Guide
294. nting the check digit using the numeric keypad in Chapter 16 Advanced Data Formatting The default is 1 OCR Check Digit 14 26 DS6878 Product Reference Guide OCR Check Digit Multiplier Parameter F1h BCh This option sets OCR check digit multipliers for the character positions For check digit validation each character in scanned data has an equivalent weight used in the check digit calculation DS6878 OCR ships with the following weight equivalents 0 0 A 10 K 20 U 30 1 B 11 L 21 V 31 2 2 C 12 M 22 W 32 3 3 D 13 N 23 X 33 4 4 E 14 O 24 Y 34 5 5 F 15 P 25 Z 35 6 6 G 16 Q 26 Space 0 7 7 H 17 R 27 8 8 18 S 28 9 9 J 19 T 29 All other characters are equivalent to one 1 You can define the multiplier string if it is different from the default 121212121212 default 123456789A for ISBN Product Add Right to Left See OCR Check Digit Validation on page 14 27 For example ISBN 0 2 0 1 1 8 3 9 9 4 Multiplier 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Product 0 18 0 7 6 40 12 27 18 4 Product add O 18 0 7 6 40 12 27 18 4 132 ISBN uses modulo 11 for its check digit In this case 132 is divisible by 11 so it passes the check digit To set the check digit multiplier scan the following bar code then scan numbers and letters to form the multiplier string from the alphanumeric keyboard in Chapter 16 Advanced Data Formatting Then scan End of Message in the Chapter
295. nued y z l 16 104 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Chapter 17 Driver s License Set Up DS6878 DL Introduction The DS6878 DL digital scanner is capable of parsing out information from standard US driver s licenses and certain other American Association of Motor Vehicle Administrators AAMVA compliant ID cards This is achieved using internally embedded algorithms where scanning bar codes activates algorithms internally embedded in the digital scanner to produce formatted data Use the formatted data for age verification credit card application information and more This chapter describes how to program the DS6878 DL digital scanner to read and use the data contained in the 2D bar codes on US driver s licenses and AAMVA compliant ID cards Table 17 1 DL Parsing Parameter Table DL Parsing Parameters Driver s License Parsing No Driver s License Parsing Driver s License Parse Field Bar Codes N A 17 4 AAMVA Parse Field Bar Codes N A Set Default Parameter N A Output Gender as M or F N A Date Format CCYYMMDD No Separator N A Send Keystroke N A Control Characters Keyboard Characters Parsing Rule Example N A Embedded Driver s License Parsing ADF Example N A 17 2 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Driver s License Parsing To enable driver s license parsing on the digital scanner scan the Embedded Driver s License Parsing bar code Thi
296. nvironment Operating Temperature 32 to 122 F 0 to 50 C Storage Temperature 40 to 158 F 40 to 70 C Charging Temperature 32 to 104 F 0 to 40 C nominal 41 to 95 F 5 to 35 C ideal Humidity 5 to 95 non condensing Drop Specifications Withstands multiple 6 ft 1 8 m drops to concrete at room temperature Withstands multiple 5 ft 1 5m drops to concrete at 0 to 50 C of Cradle Insertions 250 000 insertions 3 10 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Table 3 2 Technical Specifications DS6878 Digital Scanner Continued Item Ambient Light Immunity Description Incandescent 150 ft candles 1 600 Lux Sunlight 8 000 ft candles 86 000 Lux Flourescent 150 ft candles 1 600 Lux Mercury Vapor 150 ft candles 1 600 Lux Sodium Vapor 150 ft candles 1 600 Lux Immune to normal or artificial light Accessories Lanyard Lanyard attaches to the battery door Table 3 3 Technical Specifications CRO078 S CR0008 Cradle Item Description Physical Characteristics Dimensions 2 0 in H x 8 35 in L x 3 4 in W 5 cm H x 21 1 cm L x 8 6 cm W Weight Approximately 6 4 oz 183 gm Voltage amp Current Charging Cradle Voltage 5 10 VDC 5 10 VDC Current 700mA External power 475 mA Host power through cable 12 10 VDC 300 mA External power 12 10 VDC 220 mA Host power through
297. o options specified at this time Always transmit 0 Example A Code 93 bar code 012345678905 is transmitted as G0012345678905 MSI 0 Check digits are sent 1 No check digit is sent Example An MSI bar code 4123 with a single check digit checked is transmitted as 1M14123 Programming Reference B 5 Table B 3 Modifier Characters Continued Code Type Option Value Option D2o0f5 0 No options specified at this time Always transmit 0 Example A D 2 of 5 bar code 4123 is transmitted as S04123 UPC EAN 0 Standard data packet in full EAN format i e 13 digits for UPC A UPC E and EAN 13 not including supplemental data 1 Two digit supplemental data only 2 Five digit supplemental data only 3 Combined data packet comprising 13 digits from EAN 13 UPC A or UPC E symbol and 2 or 5 digits from supplemental symbol 4 EAN 8 data packet Example A UPC A bar code 012345678905 is transmitted as JE00012345678905 Bookland EAN 0 No options specified at this time Always transmit 0 Example A Bookland EAN bar code 123456789xX is transmitted as X0123456789X ISSN EAN 0 No options specified at this time Always transmit 0 Example An ISSN EAN bar code 123456789X is transmitted as X0123456789X Code 11 0 Single check digit 1 Two check digits 3 Check characters validated but not transmitted GS1 DataBar No option specified at this time Always transmit 0 GS1 Data
298. ode 01h Disable Netherlands KIX Code 00h USPS 4CB One Code Intelligent Mail To enable or disable USPS 4CB One Code Intelligent Mail scan the appropriate bar code below Enable USPS 4CB One Code Intelligent Mail 01h Disable USPS 4CB One Code Intelligent Mail 00h Symbologies 15 67 UPU FICS Postal To enable or disable UPU FICS Postal scan the appropriate bar code below Enable UPU FICS Postal 01h Disable UPU FICS Postal 00h 15 68 DS6878 Product Reference Guide GS1 DataBar The variants of GS1 DataBar are DataBar 14 DataBar Expanded and DataBar Limited The limited and expanded versions have stacked variants Scan the appropriate bar codes to enable or disable each variant of GS1 DataBar GS1 DataBar 14 Parameter FOh 52h Enable GS1 DataBar 14 01h Disable GS1 DataBar 14 00h GS1 DataBar Limited Parameter FOh 53h Enable GS1 DataBar Limited 01h Disable GS1 DataBar Limited 00h lt J NOTE For HC configurations the default is Enable GS1 DataBar Limited Symbologies 15
299. odes in Appendix D Numeric Bar Codes For example to decode only Matrix 2 of 5 symbols with 14 characters scan Matrix 2 of 5 One Discrete Length then scan 1 followed by 4 To correct an error or to change the selection scan Cancel on page D 3 e Two Discrete Lengths Select this option to decode only Matrix 2 of 5 symbols containing either of two selected lengths Select lengths using the numeric bar codes in Appendix D Numeric Bar Codes For example to decode only Matrix 2 of 5 symbols containing either 2 or 14 characters select Matrix 2 of 5 Two Discrete Lengths then scan 0 2 1 and then 4 To correct an error or to change the selection scan Cancel on page D 3 e Length Within Range Select this option to decode a Matrix 2 of 5 symbol with a specific length range Select lengths using the numeric bar codes in Appendix D Numeric Bar Codes For example to decode Matrix 2 of 5 symbols containing between 4 and 12 characters first scan Matrix 2 of 5 Length Within Range Then scan 0 4 1 and 2 enter a leading zero for single digit numbers To correct an error or change the selection scan Cancel on page D 3 e Any Length Scan this option to decode Matrix 2 of 5 symbols containing any number of characters within the digital scanner s capability Matrix 2 of 5 One Discrete Length Matrix 2 of 5 Two Discrete Lengths
300. oding 2D bar codes or in detecting a no decode Enable Fuzzy 1D Processing 01h Disable Fuzzy 1D Processing 00h User Preferences amp Miscellaneous Digital Scanner Options 5 33 Hand Held Decode Aiming Pattern Parameter FOh 32h Select Enable Hand Held Decode Aiming Pattern to project the aiming pattern during bar code capture Disable Hand Held Decode Aiming Pattern to turn the aiming pattern off or Enable Hand Held Decode Aiming Pattern on PDF to project the aiming pattern when the digital scanner detects a 2D bar code J NOTE With Picklist Mode on page 5 24 enabled the decode aiming pattern flashes even when the Hand Held Decode Aiming Pattern is disabled Enable Hand Held Decode Aiming Pattern 02h Disable Hand Held Decode Aiming Pattern 00h Enable Hand Held Decode Aiming Pattern on PDF 03h 5 34 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Hands Free Decode Aiming Pattern Parameter F1h 4Eh Select Enable Hands Free Decode Aiming Pattern to project the aiming pattern during bar code capture Disable Hands Free Decode Aiming Pattern to turn the aiming pattern off or Enable Hands Free Decode Aiming Pattern on PDF to project the aiming pattern when the digital scanner detects a 2D bar code This parameter does not apply to Snapshot Mode See Modes of Operation on page 5 11 J NOTE With Picklist Mode on page 5
301. oduct Reference Guide Redundancy Level The digital scanner offers four levels of decode redundancy Select higher redundancy levels for decreasing levels of bar code quality As redundancy levels increase the digital scanner s aggressiveness decreases Select the redundancy level appropriate for the bar code quality Redundancy Level 1 The following code types must be successfully read twice before being decoded Table 15 2 Redundancy Level 1 Codes Code Type Code Length Codabar 8 characters or less MSI 4 characters or less D2o0f5 8 characters or less l2of5 8 characters or less Redundancy Level 2 The following code types must be successfully read twice before being decoded Table 15 3 Redundancy Level 2 Codes Code Type Code Length All All Redundancy Level 3 Code types other than the following must be successfully read twice before being decoded The following codes must be read three times Table 15 4 Redundancy Level 3 Codes Code Type Code Length MSI 4 characters or less D2o0f5 8 characters or less 12 o0f5 8 characters or less Codabar 8 characters or less Symbologies 15 85 Redundancy Level 4 The following code types must be successfully read three times before being decoded Table 15 5 Redundancy Level 4 Codes Code Type Code Length All All Redundancy Level 1 01h Redundancy Level 2 02h
302. ofile Support or by pairing with a cradle For radio communication parameters detailed information about operational modes Bluetooth Technology Profile Support and pairing see Chapter 4 Radio Communications Configuring the Digital Scanner Use the bar codes in this manual or the 123Scan configuration program to configure the digital scanner See Chapter 5 User Preferences amp Miscellaneous Digital Scanner Options and Chapter 6 Imaging Preferences for information about programming the digital scanner using bar code menus Also see each host specific chapter to set up connection to a specific host type See Chapter 13 123Scan2 to configure the digital scanner using this configuration program Accessories The digital scanner and cradle accessories that are available separately include e Power supplies for applications that do not supply power over the host cable See each host interface chapter for set up information e Wall mount bracket for mounting the cradle vertically Refer to the CRO078 S CRO008 S Cradle Quick Reference Guide p n 72 135874 xx for a wall mounting template and installation instructions e Lanyard for wearing the digital scanner on a wrist Lanyard The lanyard attaches to the inside of the digital scanner battery door latch Figure 1 15 Attached Lanyard Getting Started 1 21 To attach the lanyard 1 Open the battery door latch as described in Replacing the Digital Scanner Battery on page 1 12 Do n
303. ogram this use MultiCode Expression 01 C 02 00 08 End Of Message User Preferences amp Miscellaneous Digital Scanner Options 5 47 Miscellaneous Scanner Parameters Transmit Code ID Character A Code ID character identifies the code type of a scanned bar code This is useful when decoding more than one code type In addition to any single character prefix already selected the Code ID character is inserted between the prefix and the decoded symbol Select no Code ID character a Symbol Code ID character or an AIM Code ID character For Code ID Characters see Symbol Code Characters on page B 1 and AIM Code Identifiers on page B 3 J NOTE f you enable Symbol Code ID Character or AIM Code ID Character and enable Transmit No Read Message on page 5 51 the digital scanner appends the code ID for Code 39 to the NR message Symbol Code ID Character 02h AIM Code ID Character 01h None 00h 5 48 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Prefix Suffix Values Key Category Parameter P 63h S1 62h S2 64h Decimal Value Parameter P 69h S1 68h S2 6Ah You can append a prefix and or one or two suffixes to scan data for use in data editing To set a value for a prefix or suffix scan a four digit number e four bar codes from Appendix D Numeric Bar Codes that corresponds to that value See Table E on page E 1 for the four digit codes When using host commands to set the prefix or suffix set the key category para
304. ol 123Scan Configuration None 13 1 OCR Programming Parameters OCR A Disable 14 3 OCR A Variant Full ASCII 14 3 OCR B Disable 14 5 OCR B Variant Full ASCII 14 6 MICR E13B Disable 14 9 US Currency Disable 14 10 OCR Orientation 0 14 10 OCR Lines 1 14 12 OCR Minimum Characters 3 14 12 OCR Maximum Characters 100 14 13 OCR Security Level 80 14 13 OCR Subset Selected font variant 14 14 OCR Quiet Zone 50 14 14 OCR Bright Illumination Disable 14 15 OCR Template 54R 14 16 OCR Check Digit Modulus 1 14 25 OCR Check Digit Multiplier 121212121212 14 26 1User selection is required to configure this interface and this is the most common selection A 8 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Table A 1 Standard Default Parameters Table Continued Parameter Default Ar Bs lel OCR Check Digit Validation None 14 27 UPC EAN UPC A Enable 15 8 UPC E Enable 15 8 UPC E1 Disable 15 9 EAN 8 JAN 8 Enable 15 9 EAN 13 JAN 13 Enable 15 10 Bookland EAN Disable 15 10 Decode UPC EAN JAN Supplementals 2 and 5 digits Ignore 15 11 User Programmable Supplementals None 15 14 Decode UPC EAN JAN Supplemental Redundancy 10 15 14 Decode UPC EAN JAN Supplemental AIM ID Combined 15 15 Transmit UPC A Check Digit Enable 15 15 Transmit UPC E Check Digit Enable 15 16 Transmit UPC E1 Check Digit Enable 15 16 UPC A Preamble System Character 15 17 UPC E Preamble System Character 15 18 U
305. oltage amp Current Charging Cradle Voltage Current 12 VDC 60mA no scanner 12 VDC 160mA idle scanner 12 VDC 335 mA charging scanner Color Twilight Black Healthcare White Power Requirements 12 10 VDC Performance Characteristics Interfaces Supported Features on board Multiple Interface with RS 232C Standard Nixdorf ICL amp Fujitsu CRO078 P only IBM 468x 469x Keyboard Wedge USB Standard IBM SurePOS Macintosh SNAPI 123Scan Remote Digital Scanner Management User Environment Operating Temperature 32 to 122 F 0 to 50 C Storage Temperature 40 to 158 F 40 to 70 C Charging Temperature 32 to 104 F 0 to 40 C nominal 41 to 95 F 5 to 35 C ideal Humidity 5 to 95 non condensing Accessories Power Supplies Power supply is required Cradle Signal Descriptions 3 12 DS6878 Product Reference Guide The signal descriptions in Table 3 5 apply to the connector on the digital scanner and are for reference only Table 3 5 Cradle Signal Pin outs Synapse eer 1 Reserved SynClock Reserved Reserved Reserved Jump to Pin 6 2 Power Power Power Power Power Power 3 Ground Ground Ground Ground Ground Ground 4 IBM_A Reserved TxD KeyClock DBP Reserved 5 Reserved Reserved RxD TermData CTS D 6 IBM_B SynData RTS KeyData RTS Jump to Pin 1 7 Reserved Reserved CTS TermClock Reserved D 8 Reser
306. ome 7013 Enter 7014 Escape 7015 Up Arrow 7016 Dn Arrow 7017 Left Arrow 7018 Right Arrow 9 24 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Chapter 10 IBM Interface Introduction This chapter provides instructions for programming the cradle to interface with an IBM 468X 469X host computer Throughout the programming bar code menus default values are indicated with asterisks an rar D l nvert t Indicates Daam IRADE Corvette CORRIS Sia Feature Option 10 2 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Connecting to an IBM 468X 469X Host J NOTE See Chapter 4 Radio Communications for information about digital scanner cradle pairing and wireless communication The digital scanner must be connected to the cradle for the host parameter setting to take effect When the digital scanner is not connected to a cradle and a host parameter bar code is scanned a long low long high beep sequence sounds This connection is made directly from the cradle to the host interface Interface Cable Host Port Connector Figure 10 1 BM Direct Connection To connect the IBM 46XX interface 1 Attach the modular connector of the IBM 46XX interface cable to the host port on the bottom of the digital scanner cradle see Connecting the Cables to the CR0078 S CR0008 S Cradle on page 1 8 or Connecting the CR0078 P Series Cradle on page 1 10 2 Connect the
307. ommunication The digital scanner must be connected to the cradle for the host parameter setting to take effect When the digital scanner is not connected to a cradle and a host parameter bar code is scanned a long low long high beep sequence sounds Interface Cable USB Series A Connector Figure 7 1 USB Connection The digital scanner cradle connects with USB capable hosts including e Desktop PCs and Notebooks e Apple iMac G4 iBooks North America only e IBM SurePOS terminals e Sun IBM and other network computers that support more than one keyboard The following operating systems support the digital scanner cradle through USB e Windows 98 2000 ME XP e MacOS 8 5 and above e IBM 4690 OS The digital scanner cradle also interfaces with other USB hosts which support USB Human Interface Devices HID To connect the USB interface USB Interface 7 3 1 Attach the modular connector of the USB interface cable to the host port on the bottom of the digital scanner cradle see Connecting the CRO078 S CRO008 S Series Cradle on page 1 8 or Connecting the CRO078 P Series Cradle on page 1 10 2 Plug the series A connector in the USB host or hub or plug the Plus Power connector in an available port of the IBM SurePOS terminal 3 Select the USB device type by scanning the appropriate bar code from USB Device Type on page 7 5 4 On first installation when using Windows the software prompts to select or inst
308. ond to column pixel addresses For example for a 4 row x 8 column image in the extreme bottom right section of the image set the following values Top 476 Bottom 479 Left 744 Right 751 To set the crop to pixel address scan each pixel address bar code below followed by three numeric bar codes representing the value Leading zeros are required For example to crop the top pixel address to 3 scan 0 0 3 See Appendix D Numeric Bar Codes for numeric bar codes NOTE The digital scanner has a cropping resolution of 4 pixels Setting the cropping area to less than 4 pixels v after resolution adjustment see Image Size Number of Pixels on page 6 10 transfers the entire image Top Pixel Address 0 479 Decimal Left Pixel Address 0 751 Decimal Bottom Pixel Address 0 479 Decimal Right Pixel Address 0 751 Decimal 6 10 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Image Size Number of Pixels Parameter FOh 2Eh This option alters image resolution before compression Multiple pixels are combined to one pixel resulting in a smaller image containing the original content with reduced resolution Select one of the following values errr Uncropped Image Size Full 752 x 480 1 2 376 x 240 1 4 180 x 120 Full Resolution 00h
309. ontrol Glossary 4 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Hz Hertz A unit of frequency equal to one cycle per second IEC International Electrotechnical Commission This international agency regulates laser safety by specifying various laser operation classes based on power output during operation IEC 825 Class 1 This is the lowest power IEC laser classification Conformity is ensured through a software restriction of 120 seconds of laser operation within any 1000 second window and an automatic laser shutdown if the scanner s oscillating mirror fails Intercharacter Gap The space between two adjacent bar code characters in a discrete code Interleaved 2 of 5 A binary bar code symbology representing character pairs in groups of five bars and five interleaved spaces Interleaving provides for greater information density The location of wide elements bar spaces within each group determines which characters are encoded This continuous code type uses no intercharacter spaces Only numeric 0 to 9 and START STOP characters may be encoded Interleaved Bar Code A bar code in which characters are paired together using bars to represent the first character and the intervening spaces to represent the second Input Output Ports UO ports are primarily dedicated to passing information into or out of the terminal s memory Series 9000 mobile computers include Serial and USB ports UO Ports interface The connection between two devices define
310. onvert UPC E to UPC sicsissnceacascanccetatsitedeniucrteeassucdeaueiotmaceansetesmaieieneaneeeieganeniees 15 20 Convert UPC E1 to UPC A sicacssescuisiousacne rch Ereegnes 15 20 BAN S JANES Extend E 15 21 Bookland ISBN Format dE 15 22 UCC Coupon Extended Code AEN 15 23 EE 15 24 el E 15 25 Code TE 15 26 Enable Disable Code 128 15 26 Set Lengths for Code Ee 15 26 Enable Disable GS1 128 formerly UCCEAN 1281 15 28 Gw EREECHEN 15 28 ISBT Concatenation EE 15 29 Check WEE 15 30 ISBT Concatenation Redundancy ccccccccesscceeeesceeeeeeseeeeseeneeseeteeaeeeeeeeneeeeeneees 15 30 COS BF eege een 15 31 Enable Disable OC CBOs fa atta reece rcs ee 15 31 Enable Disable Trioptic Code 39 AAA 15 31 Convert Code 39 to Code eegene 15 32 Code 32 ad 6 1 eege eebe 15 32 Set Lengths for Code 39 aches a eects eek ee eee eee ted 15 33 Code 39 Check Digit Verification EE 15 34 Transmit Code 39 Check Digit siscisiiinsciduscadasntiedssecerineaninidaledtensusasidecenssieltenaeieeannn 15 34 Code 39 Full ASCII Conversion REENEN 15 35 Code 39 Buffering Scan amp Store ecierecicasscieecaveciavensicnceingcatisecassetsiaancmessanaceeneviasitee 15 35 Buffer Data ceereersernesuoa ea AR A E i 15 36 Clear Transmission Buffer onseosseeeeeeeneeeeerrsrerrrreennrrserrserernnernnnrrnnnnesee ennet 15 36 Transmit Buffer ccssar dinna nnnna naaa i a AAA aaae EE nana EEEE EEE 15 37 XIV DS6878 Product Reference Guide Overfilling Transmission Buffer s cvici
311. ort ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeenee erences eeeeeeeeeeeesaaeeeeeeaeeeeneea 4 18 Modes of Operation eege Ee 4 18 Point to Point Communication ss sssssseeessenessserrrserrrrtertenrntnnetertrnsetrnnnrnnnnnnneee 4 18 Multipoint to Point Communication sssssssseeseeseeeeeeererssrrrsserrrrnerrrnrernnnnnsrerrsnet 4 18 Parameter Broadcast Cradle Host Only sssssssseeesssseessnerrserrrrnerrnnrsrerersserrnsrrrnn 4 19 PANNO EE 4 19 TING Ne 4 20 Lock OVEIIGS E 4 20 Pairing Methods E 4 21 UnpairiNg E 4 21 Pairing Bar Code Format E 4 22 Pairing Bar Code Example AAA 4 22 Connection Maintenance Interval EE 4 23 ConsideratiONS EE 4 23 PG es EE 4 25 Bluetooth Security eegene Eeer 4 26 EES eege 4 26 PN OCG gorse ds and a a a E e E 4 27 Variable PIN COJE siise aipeanna EA a R Ri 4 27 Lie le EE 4 28 Chapter 5 User Preferences amp Miscellaneous Digital Scanner Options ee e E 5 1 Scanning Sequence Examples ccccccseseccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeneeaeeeeeeessseeanaeeeeeesseeseee 5 2 Errors While Scanning EE 5 2 User Preferences Miscellaneous Option Parameter Defaults 5 2 User EE 5 5 Default Parameters erte eech 5 5 Parameter Bar Code Scanning sisstiacscccessadasisiedsintaninnceinndeivedtectenasiteasensiettenaseeniin 5 6 Beep After Good Decode emgeet ege Eege 5 6 Suppress Power Up Beeps ssisccccisecrenctenasacieecareciavenstceceingcatisedausnetsiaancnassasnaceseaviasinien 5 7 Beep r TONE eelere 5 8 Beeper Ve gc Eeer 5
312. ot remove the battery 2 Hook the loop of the lanyard around the screw container inside the battery door latch between the loop guides Loop Guides Screw Container Figure 1 16 Attaching Lanyard 3 Close the battery door latch 4 Tighten the screw 1 22 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Chapter 2 Scanning Introduction This chapter provides beeper and LED definitions scanning techniques general instructions and tips about scanning and decode ranges Beeper Definitions The digital scanner issues different beep sequences and patterns to indicate status Table 2 1 defines beep sequences that occur during both normal scanning and while programming the digital scanner For additional beeper definitions see Wireless Beeper Definitions on page 4 3 Table 2 1 Standard Beeper Definitions Beeper Sequence Indication Standard Use Low medium high beeps Power up High beep A bar code symbol was decoded if decode beeper is enabled Four long low beeps 1 A transmission error was detected in a scanned symbol The data is ignored This occurs if a unit is not properly configured Check option setting 2 When communicating with a cradle the cradle acknowledges receipt of data If the acknowledgment is not received this transmission error beep sequence sounds Data may still have been received by the host Check the host system for receipt of transmitted data If data was not received by the host re scan the
313. otorola responds to calls by E mail telephone or fax within the time limits set forth in support agreements If your problem cannot be solved by Motorola Solutions Support you may need to return your equipment for servicing and will be given specific directions Motorola is not responsible for any damages incurred during shipment if the approved shipping container is not used Shipping the units improperly can possibly void the warranty If you purchased your Motorola Solutions business product from a Motorola business partner contact that business partner for support Chapter 1 Getting Started Introduction The DS6878 combines superior 1D and 2D omnidirectional bar code scanning performance and advanced ergonomics in a light weight design The digital scanner ensures comfort and ease of use for extended periods of time Figure 1 1 DS6878 Digital Scanner 1 2 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Interfaces The CR0078 S cradle supports all of the following interfaces The CRO078 P cradle supports all of the interfaces listed below with the exception of Wand Emulation Scanner Emulation and Synapse vV USB connection to a host The cradle auto detects a USB host and defaults to the HID keyboard interface type Select other USB interface types by scanning programming bar code menus This interface supports the following international keyboards for Windows environment North America German French French Canadian Spanish Italia
314. ous Digital Scanner Options 5 31 Timeout Between Decodes Same Symbol Use this option in presentation mode and Continuous Bar Code Read to prevent the beeper from continuously beeping when a symbol is left in the digital scanner s field of view It is programmable in 0 1 second increments from 0 0 to 9 9 seconds The default interval is 0 5 seconds To select the timeout between decodes for the same symbol scan the bar code below then scan two numeric bar codes from Appendix D Numeric Bar Codes that correspond to the desired interval in 0 1 second increments Timeout Between Decodes Same Symbol Timeout Between Decodes Different Symbols Use this option in presentation mode and Continuous Bar Code Read to control the time the scanner is inactive between decoding different symbols It is programmable in 0 1 second increments from 0 1 to 9 9 seconds The default is 0 2 seconds To select the timeout between decodes for different symbols scan the bar code below then scan two numeric bar codes from Appendix D Numeric Bar Codes that correspond to the desired interval in 0 1 second increments Timeout Between Decodes Different Symbols 5 32 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Fuzzy 1D Processing This option is enabled by default to optimize decode performance on 1D bar codes including damaged and poor quality symbols Disable this only if you experience time delays when dec
315. piconet If disabled parameter bar codes are processed by the individual digital scanner only and the digital scanner ignores parameters broadcast from other digital scanners or from the cradle Enable Parameter Broadcast Disable Parameter Broadcast Pairing Pairing is the process by which a digital scanner initiates communication with a cradle Scanning Multipoint to Point activates multi digital scanner to cradle operation and allows up to three digital scanners to pair to one cradle for the CR0078 S and up to seven digital scanners for the CRO078 P To pair the digital scanner with the cradle scan the pairing bar code A high low high low beep sequence indicates that the pairing bar code was decoded When a connection between the cradle and digital scanner is established a low high beep sounds NOTE 1 The pairing bar code that connects the digital scanner to a cradle is unique to each cradle v 2 Do not scan data or parameters until pairing completes 3 When the digital scanner is paired to the cradle in SPP Master or Cradle Host mode the digital scanner automatically tries to reconnect to a remote device when a disconnection occurs that is due to the radio losing communication For more information see Auto reconnect Feature on page 4 14 4 20 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Pairing Modes When operating with the cradle two modes of pairing are supported e Locked Pairing Mode When a cradle is paired connected to the dig
316. pproach near 100 Glossary 6 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Print Contrast Signal PCS Measurement of the contrast brightness difference between the bars and spaces of a symbol A minimum PCS value is needed for a bar code symbol to be scannable PCS RL RD RL where RL is the reflectance factor of the background and RD the reflectance factor of the dark bars Programming Mode The state in which a scanner is configured for parameter values See Scanning Mode Q Quiet Zone A clear space containing no dark marks which precedes the start character of a bar code symbol and follows the stop character QWERTY A standard keyboard commonly used on North American and some European PC keyboards QWERTY refers to the arrangement of keys on the left side of the third row of keys R Reflectance Amount of light returned from an illuminated surface Resolution The narrowest element dimension which is distinguished by a particular reading device or printed with a particular device or method RF Radio Frequency RS 232 An Electronic Industries Association EIA standard that defines the connector connector pins and signals used to transfer data serially from one device to another S Scan Area Area intended to contain a symbol Scanner An electronic device used to scan bar code symbols and produce a digitized pattern that corresponds to the bars and spaces of the symbol Its three main components are 1
317. r Code Configuration The host has the ability to enable disable code types When this parameter is enabled the request is not sent to the attached digital scanner All directives are still acknowledged to the USB host as if it were processed Disable Enable 7 18 DS6878 Product Reference Guide USB Polling Interval Scan a bar code below to set the polling interval The polling interval determines the rate at which data can be sent between the scanner and host computer A lower number indicates a faster data rate J NOTE When changing USB Device Types the cradle automatically restarts The digital scanner issues a disconnect reconnect beep sequence 0 IMPORTANT Ensure your host machine can handle the selected data rate 1 msec 2 msec 3msec 4 msec USB Interface 7 19 USB Polling Interval continued Una 5 msec TT 6 msec UU 7 msec TA 8 msec VATA 9 msec 7 20 DS6878 Product Reference Guide ASCII Character Set for USB Table 7 2 ASCII Character Set for USB Full ASCII ASCII Value Code 39 Encode Keystroke Character 1000 U CTRL 2 1001 A CTRLA 1002 B CTRLB 1003 C CTRLC 1004 D CTRL D 1005 E CTRLE 1006 F CTRL F 1007 G CTRLG 1008 H CTRL H BACKSPACE 1009 d CTRL I HORIZONTAL TAB 10
318. r the default time interval of 30 seconds This time interval can be changed to one of the following options e 30 seconds e 30 minutes e 1 minute e 1 hour e 5 minutes e indefinitely To set the Reconnect Attempt Interval scan one of the bar codes below Attempt to Reconnect for 30 Seconds Attempt to Reconnect for 1 Minute Attempt to Reconnect for 5 Minutes Attempt to Reconnect for 30 Minutes Attempt to Reconnect for 1 Hour Attempt to Reconnect Indefinitely Radio Communications 4 17 Auto reconnect in Bluetooth Keyboard Emulation HID Slave Mode In Bluetooth Keyboard Emulation HID Slave mode select a re connect option for when the digital scanner loses its connection with a remote device e Auto reconnect on Bar Code Data The digital scanner auto reconnects when you scan a bar code With this option a delay can occur when transmitting the first characters The digital scanner sounds a decode beep upon bar code scan followed by a connection a page timeout a rejection beep or a transmission error beep Select this option to optimize battery life on the digital scanner and mobile device Note that auto reconnect does not occur on rejection and cable unplug commands e Auto reconnect Immediately When the digital scanner loses connection it attempts to reconnect If a page timeout occurs the digital scanner attempts reconnect on a trigger pull Select this option if the digital scanner s battery life is not an issue an
319. radle LED Definitions LED Indication Green Solid Cradle is powered scanner not in cradle Fully charged scanner scanner in cradle Green Flash Charging scanner scanner in cradle Red Flash Transmission error Red Solid Charge error scanner in cradle Blue Solid When Page Button is enabled and pressed see Page Button on page 4 25 the cradle LED turns blue when the scanner is out of the cradle Amber Flash Critical battery temperature fault Battery is above or below normal operating temperature If this occurs do not use the digital scanner and move the digital scanner to a location within normal operating temperature The digital scanner can remain in the cradle while the battery warms or cools to normal operating temperature Note For appropriate charging temperatures see Table 3 3 on page 3 10 2 6 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Scanning To program the digital scanner see the appropriate host chapter Chapter 4 Radio Communications and Chapter 15 Symbologies In addition to the parameters included in these chapters user preferences and miscellaneous digital scanner options are also available in this guide Hand Held Scanning To scan 1 Ensure all connections are secure see appropriate host chapter 2 Aim the digital scanner at the bar code 3 Press the trigger Figure 2 1 Scanning 4 Upon successful decode the digital scanner beeps and the LED flashes green For more infor
320. remote Bluetooth address for each Master mode SPP Cradle When switching between these modes the digital scanner automatically tries to reconnect to the last device it was connected to in that mode V NOTE Switching between Bluetooth host types by scanning a host type bar code page 4 4 causes the radio to be reset Scanning is disabled during this time It takes several seconds for the digital scanner to re initialize the radio at which time scanning is enabled Radio Communications 4 15 Reconnect Attempt Beep Feedback When a digital scanner disconnects as it goes out of range it immediately attempts to reconnect While the digital scanner attempts to reconnect the green LED continues to blink If the auto reconnect process fails the digital scanner emits a page timeout beep long low long high and stops blinking the LED The process can be restarted by pulling the trigger The Beep on Reconnect Attempt feature is disabled by default When enabled the digital scanner emits 5 short high beeps every 5 seconds while the reconnection attempt is in progress Scan a bar code below to enable or disable Beep on Reconnect Attempt Disable Beep on Reconnect Attempt Enable Beep on Reconnect Attempt 4 16 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Reconnect Attempt Interval When a digital scanner disconnects as it goes out of range it immediately attempts to reconnect fo
321. removal 20 0c eee eee eee 16 35 advanced data formatting 3 4 11 8 16 1 ACTIONS suis NS eGo Poe ee ae 16 1 16 25 alphanumeric keyboard 16 90 alternate rule set 16 3 bar code menu example 16 2 DOED ede da baes whee E Eiere Ee 16 46 code lengths 16 16 Index 2 DS6878 Product Reference Guide code typeS 6 eee ee 16 11 COMO TAS er oes aod dee PAS wr ene ase 16 1 16 11 default rules 0 0 eee eee eee 16 5 numeric keypad 00 16 22 16 23 pad spaces 16 37 pad ZOOS ue ee ENEE d 16 41 ULES eiert RGA eg eed alee ew E 16 1 rules hierarchy 0 0 eee eee ee eee 16 4 send control characters 16 46 send function key 16 75 send keyboard characters 16 51 send keypad characters 16 70 send preset value 00 eae 16 35 setup fields 16 29 skip ahead characters 16 32 skip back characters 16 33 space remoual eee eee eee 16 35 special commandS 20 00e 16 8 specific data string 16 20 turn off rule seis 16 88 16 89 zero removal 000 eee ee kenak 16 35 aiming options hand held decode aiming pattern 5 34 snapshot aiming pattern 6 7 snapshot mode timeout 6 7 aiming pattern 2 7 6 7 enabling e Dee d Ee EE des 5 34 Orientation 2 8 ASCII values keyboard wedge 9
322. ring Clear Buffer bar code or upon attempt to transmit an empty Code 39 buffer Table 3 1 Troubleshooting Continued Problem Digital Scanner emits a low high low high beep sequence while it is being programmed Maintenance Troubleshooting amp Technical Specifications Possible Causes Out of ADF parameter storage space Possible Solutions Erase all rules and re program with shorter rules Digital Scanner emits long low long high beeps Input error incorrect bar code or Cancel bar code was scanned Scan the correct numeric bar codes within range for the parameter programmed Page timeout remote device is out of range not powered Move the digital scanner back into range of the remote device try to re connect check remote device configuration Digital Scanner emits long low long high long low long high beeps Out of host parameter storage space Scan Default Parameters on page 5 5 Out of memory for ADF rules Reduce the number of ADF rules or the number of steps in the ADF rules Connection attempt was rejected by remote device Free up remote device resources Digital Scanner emits high high high low beeps RS 232 receive error Normal during host reset Otherwise set the digital scanner s RS 232 parity to match the host setting Digital Scanner emits high low beeps The digital scanner is buffering Code 39 data Or Keyboard parameter select
323. rminals Table 8 3 Terminal Specific Code ID Characters Wincor Wincor Nixdorf Code Type ICL Fujitsu Nixdorf Mode B Olivetti Omron CUTE Mode A OPOS JPOS UPC A A A A A A A A UPC E CG CG CG None EAN 8 JAN 8 FF FF B B B FF None EAN 13 JAN 13 F F A A A F A Code 39 C lt len gt None M M M lt len gt C lt len gt 3 Code 39 Full ASCII None None M M None None 3 Codabar N lt len gt None N N N lt len gt N lt len gt None Code 128 L lt len gt None K K K lt len gt L lt len gt 5 12 of 5 lt len gt None l l lt len gt lt len gt 1 Code 93 None None L L L lt len gt None None D2of5 H lt len gt None H H H lt len gt H lt len gt 2 GS1 128 L lt len gt None P P P lt len gt L lt len gt 5 MSI None None O O O lt len gt None None Bookland EAN F F A A A F None Trioptic None None None None None None None Code 11 None None None None None None None IATA H lt len gt None H H H lt len gt H lt len gt 2 Code 32 None None None None None None None GS1 Databar None None E E None None None Variants PDF417 None None Q Q None None 6 Datamatrix None None R R None None 4 QR Codes None None U U None None 7 Aztec Aztec Rune None None V V None None 8 Micro PDF None None S S None None 6 Maxicode None None T T None None None 8 6 DS6878 Product Reference Guide RS 232 Host Types To select an RS 232 host interface scan one of the fol
324. rrency Serial Number OCR is not as secure as a bar code To decrease OCR misdecodes and speed OCR reading set an accurate OCR template and character subset and use a check digit All OCR fonts are disabled by default Enabling OCR can slow bar code decoding Enabling more than one OCR font could also slow OCR decoding and impact OCR decoding accuracy Throughout the programming bar code menus asterisks indicate default values r Indicates Default Disable OCR A Feature Option J NOTE Most computer monitors allow scanning the bar codes directly on the screen When scanning from the screen be sure to set the document magnification to a level where you can see the bar code clearly and bars and or spaces are not merging 14 2 DS6878 Product Reference Guide OCR Parameter Defaults Table 14 1 lists the defaults for OCR parameters To change any option scan the appropriate bar code s provided in the Parameter Descriptions section beginning on page 14 3 J NOTE See Appendix A Standard Default Parameters for all user preferences hosts symbologies and miscellaneous default parameters Table 14 1 OCR Programming Default Table Parameter Number Default Page Number Parameter OCR Programming Parameters OCR A Fih A8h Disable 14 3 OCR A Variant Fih ACh Full ASCII 14 3 OCR B Fih A9h Disable 14 5 O
325. rsatile and widely used alphanumeric bar code symbology with a set of 43 character types including all uppercase letters numerals from 0 to 9 and 7 special characters and space The code name is derived from the fact that 3 of 9 elements representing a character are wide while the remaining 6 are narrow Code 93 An industrial symbology compatible with Code 39 but offering a full character ASCII set and a higher coding density than Code 39 Code Length Number of data characters in a bar code between the start and stop characters not including those characters Cold Boot A cold boot restarts a computer and closes all running programs COM Port Communication port ports are identified by number e g COM1 COM2 Glossary 3 Continuous Code A bar code or symbol in which all spaces within the symbol are parts of characters There are no intercharacter gaps in a continuous code The absence of gaps allows for greater information density Cradle A cradle is used for charging the terminal battery and for communicating with a host computer and provides a storage place for the terminal when not in use D Dead Zone An area within a scanner s field of view in which specular reflection may prevent a successful decode Decode To recognize a bar code symbology e g UPC EAN and then analyze the content of the specific bar code scanned Decode Algorithm A decoding scheme that converts pulse widths into data represent
326. rsed in order Each value representing a character in the scanned data is multiplied by its corresponding digit in the reversed multiplier resulting in a product for each character in the scanned data The sum of these products is computed The check digit passes if this sum modulo Check Digit Modulus is zero Example Scanned data numeric value is 132459 check digit is 9 Check digit multiplier string is 123456 Digit 1 3 2 4 5 9 Multiplier 6 5 4 3 2 1 Product 6 15 8 12 10 9 Product add 6 15 8 12 10 9 60 The Check Digit Modulus is 10 It passes because 60 is divisible by 10 the remainder is 0 Product Add Right to Left Digit Add Left to Right 01h Each character in the scanned data is assigned a numeric value see OCR Check Digit Multiplier on page 14 26 Each value representing a character in the scanned data is multiplied by its corresponding digit in the multiplier resulting in a product for each character in the scanned data The sum of each individual digit in all of the products is then calculated The check digit passes if this sum modulo Check Digit Modulus is zero Example Scanned data numeric value is 132456 check digit is 6 Check digit multiplier string is 123456 Digit 1 3 2 4 5 6 Multiplier 1 2 3 4 5 6 Product 1 6 6 16 25 36 Digit add 1 6 6 146 245 3 6 36 The Check Digit Modulus is 12 It passes because 36 is divisible by 12 the remainder is
327. rt Connect the other end of the interface cable to the host Connect the power supply to the cradle s power port Connect the appropriate cable to the power supply and AC power source Thread the interface cable over the cable support hook see Figure 1 6 on page 1 6 and run the host and power cables into their respective cable grooves If necessary for non autodetected interfaces scan the appropriate host bar code refer to the CR0078 S CR0008 S Cradle Quick Reference Guide for more information Power Port Power Connect to appropriate host Alternate Host Groove O Ir oc Power Port S Alternate Power Groove Host Port Host Port D O C Figure 1 8 Connecting the Cables to the CR0078 P Cradle Getting Started 1 11 Supplying Power to the CR0078 P Cradle The CR0078 P cradle receives power from an external power supply of NOTE The CROO78 S cradle has the ability to be powered by the USB port instead of an external power supply The CR0078 P can only receive power via an external power supply Lost Connection to Host If scanned data does not transmit to the cradle s host ensure that all cables are firmly inserted and the power supply is connected to an appropriate AC outlet If scanned data still does not transmit to the host reestablish a connection with the host 1 Disconnect the power supply from the cradle 2 Disconnect the host interface cable from the cradle 3 Wait three s
328. s 4 27 pinouts cradle signal descriptions 3 12 point to point communication 4 18 postal codes esses ariani E aa eee eee 15 61 Australia post Tomat 15 65 Australian postal 15 64 Japan postal 15 63 Netherlands KIX code 15 66 transmit UK postal check digit 15 63 transmit US postal check digit 15 62 UK postal ss rreri rerni ceria N IER eae sae 15 62 UPU FICS postal 15 67 US planet 0 2 eee 15 61 US poste 15 61 USPS 4CB One Code Intelligent Mail 15 66 POWE EE NEE EIN sae eee ee eee 1 9 1 11 Via USB seid eke ctvene eke bead pees 1 9 presentation mode field of view 5 35 Q QR code barcodes 0000 eee eeae 15 81 quiet zone leading margin 11 6 R radio communication Bluetooth Technology Profile support 1 7 1 20 Gefaults gek ONSE baw ee aed eae 4 2 Index 8 DS6878 Product Reference Guide multipoint to point 4 18 paining EE 1 20 parameters 4 4 4 5 point to point 0 2 eee eee 4 18 reconnect attempt 4 16 reconnect attempt beep 4 15 range indicator 0 cee eee eee 4 17 reconditioning battery barcode 1 16 1 17 reconnect attempt 4 16 reconnect attempt been 4 15 removing battery 1 12 replacing battery 1 12 RS 232 connection 8 2 RS 232 defaults 0 0 ees 8 3 RS 232 parameters 8 4 S sample bar codes
329. s LED after a decode Normal Operation Beep LED immediately after decode Beep LED After Transmission Ignore Unknown Characters Beep LED After CTS Pulse Unknown characters are characters the host does not recognize When Send Bar Codes with Unknown Characters is selected all bar code data is sent except for unknown characters and no error beeps sound on the digital scanner When Do Not Send Bar Codes With Unknown Characters is selected bar code data is sent up to the first unknown character and then an error beep sounds on the digital scanner Send Bar Code with Unknown Characters Do Not Send Bar Codes with Unknown Characters 8 20 DS6878 Product Reference Guide ASCII Character Set for RS 232 The values in Table 8 4 can be assigned as prefixes or suffixes for ASCII character data transmission Table 8 4 ASCII Character Set for RS 232 Full ASCII ASCII Value Code 39 Encode Character ASCII Character 1000 U NUL 1001 A SOH 1002 B STX 1003 C ETX 1004 D EOT 1005 E ENQ 1006 F ACK 1007 G BELL 1008 H BCKSPC 1009 l HORIZ TAB 1010 J LF NW LN 1011 K VT 1012 L FF 1013 M CR E
330. s between the CR0078 S and CR0078 P cradles Table 1 1 Cradle Features Feature CR0078 S CR0078 P Scanning Hand Held scanning Hands Free or Hand Held scanning Bluetooth Bluetooth or Charge Only CR0008 S Bluetooth Pairing Pair up to 3 scanners per cradle Pair up to 7 scanners per cradle Paging Not available Ability to page misplaced scanner s Charges via USB with no power supply Charging required requires ferrite if used with a 5V Requires 12V power supply power supply in a healthcare environment Supports most commonly used interfaces Supports most commonly used interfaces Interfaces see Technical Specifications on page 3 9 with the exception of Wand Emulation for detailed list Scanner Emulation and Synapse FIPS Not available FIPS140 2 wireless security USB Cable Standard universal USB cable Requires universal cables with shielded modular plugs Image Capture Not available Supported via SNAPI OCR MICR Not available Supported via SNAPI 1 8 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Connecting the CR0078 S CRO0008 S Series Cradle Connect the interface cable and power supply if necessary in the following order to ensure proper operation of the digital scanner and cradle Power Port J NOTE The CROO78 S cradle has the ability to be powered by the USB port instead of an external power supply The CR0078 P can only receive power via an external power supply If a power supply is connected to the
331. s does not require Motorola software DLL Scan the bar codes on the following pages in the order indicating the sequence of data fields that the digital scanner outputs See Parsing Driver s License Data Fields Embedded Driver s License Parsing on page 17 3 for more information As jurisdictional updates become available Motorola updates a series of bar codes on the Motorola Web site http www motorola com enterprisemobility support These bar codes contain embedded software Scanning these in conjunction with the bar codes on page 17 4 download jurisdictional software updates to the digital scanner The updates reside in the digital scanner s flash memory and apply when the digital scanner is next used BEE e No Driver s License Parsing Embedded Driver s License Parsing Driver s License Set Up DS6878 DL 17 3 Parsing Driver s License Data Fields Embedded Driver s License Parsing To begin programming a parsing rule 1 Scan Begin New Drivers License Parse Rule on page 17 4 2 Scan any of the field bar codes on the following pages or Send Keystroke Control Characters and Keyboard Characters on page 17 20 to complete the parsing rule 3 After entering the entire rule scan Save Driver s License Parse Rule on page 17 4 to save the rule J NOTE Only ONE driver s license parsing rule may be stored in memory at any time Saving a new rule replaces the prior rule To abort the programming sequence at any tim
332. s option to decode a D 2 of 5 symbol with a specific length range Select lengths using numeric bar codes in Appendix D Numeric Bar Codes For example to decode D 2 of 5 symbols containing between 4 and 12 characters first scan D 2 of 5 Length Within Range Then scan 0 4 1 and 2 enter a leading zero for single digit numbers To correct an error or change the selection scan Cancel on page D 3 Any Length Scan this option to decode D 2 of 5 symbols containing any number of characters within the digital scanner s capability NOTE Due to the construction of the D 2 of 5 symbology it is possible for a scan line covering only a portion of the code to transmit as a complete scan yielding less data than is encoded in the bar code To prevent this select specific lengths D 2 of 5 One Discrete Length Two Discrete Lengths for D 2 of 5 applications Symbologies 15 49 Set Lengths for Discrete 2 of 5 continued D 2 of 5 One Discrete Length D 2 of 5 Two Discrete Lengths D 2 of 5 Length Within Range D 2 of 5 Any Length 15 50 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Codabar NW 7 Enable Disable Codabar To enable or disable Codabar scan the appropriate bar code below Enable Codabar 01h Disab
333. sconnect beep sequence sounds immediately after a bar code is scanned check the host device for receipt of transmitted data It is possible that an attempt was made to transmit the last bar code scanned after the connection was lost Long low long high beeps Page timeout remote device is out of range not powered Long low long high long low long high beeps Connection attempt was rejected by remote device Code 39 Buffering High low beeps New Code 39 data was entered into the buffer Three long high beeps Code 39 buffer is full High low high beeps The Code 39 buffer was erased Low high low beeps The Code 39 buffer was erased or there was an attempt to clear or transmit an empty buffer Low high beeps A successful transmission of buffered data Scanning 2 3 Table 2 1 Standard Beeper Definitions Continued Beeper Sequence Indication Host Specific USB only Four high beeps Digital scanner has not completed initialization Wait several seconds and scan again Digital scanner gives a power up beep after Communication with the bus must be established before the digital scanning a USB Device Type scanner can operate at the highest power level This power up beep occurs more than once The USB bus may put the digital scanner in a state where power to the digital scanner is cycled on and off more than once This is normal and usually happens when the hos
334. screte 20f5 0 200 15 47 driver s license ADF parsing sample 17 45 date format 17 18 no separator 0 000000 17 19 field parsing barcodes 17 4 17 5 17 6 gender format 17 17 parsing barcodes 17 2 parsing rule example 000 17 41 E encryption 4 2 4 28 error indications aknak 2 sacs eG une ne AR Ru dE Aer ead ees 8 14 ADF dss dod mane KENE Pee ee oe 3 4 CNG WEE 8 14 TOMA ses sakes a bese eee ha ea Gea oh 3 7 IDDOE cece tue eee eae ee ee eee Se eee 3 5 Index 6 DS6878 Product Reference Guide EE 3 5 RS 232 transmission 0200000 8 12 transmission 3 6 8 16 unknown characters 7 11 8 19 9 7 XON XOff 8 14 exposure options gain exposure priority for snapshot mode 6 6 illumination 5 36 6 5 presentation mode field of view 5 35 G gain exposure priority for snapshot mode 6 6 GS1 DataBar po pesenna ai 00020 c eee eee 15 68 GS1 databar convert GS1 databar to UPC EAN 15 71 H HID Profile eu acces EUREN Dae Sede 4 6 HID SAVE ic coogi ee eke ER ERA Oo Ree bee oe 4 4 host types IBM port address 10 4 keyboard wedge 9 4 RS 232 EERSTEN doe ee ee ted det abd 8 6 8 7 scanner emulation 200 000 12 3 USB is eben steep de dun eben 7 5 wand emulation 000 e eee eee 11 5 l IBM 468X 469X connection 10 2 IBM 468X 469X parameters 10 4 IB
335. sent data in a consistent format the following nine bar codes return data that may be calculated from the actual data contained within the ID bar code First Name Middle Name Initial L ast Name Name Suffix Name Prefix Expiration Date Birth Date 17 6 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Driver s License Parse Field Bar Codes continued Issue Date ID Number Formatted Driver s License Set Up DS6878 DL 17 7 AAMVA Parse Field Bar Codes UUM MIM AAMVA Issuer ID UD Full Name UN MICU Last Name TULL First Name WU MAM Middle Name Initial PUM ANA Name Suffix I NAMA Name Prefix 17 8 DS6878 Product Reference Guide AAMVA Parse Field Bar Codes continued Mailing Address Line 1 Mailing Address Line 2 Mailing Address City Mailing Address State Mailing Address Postal Code Home Address Line 1 Home Address Line 2 Driver s License Set Up DS6878 DL 17 9 AAMVA Parse Field Bar Codes continued Home Address City Home Address State Home Address Postal Code License ID Number License Class License Restrictions License Endorsements 17 10 DS6878 Product Reference Guide AAMVA Parse Field Bar Codes continued Height Feet and or Inches
336. ser product safety This agency specifies various laser operation classes based on power output during operation CDRH Class 1 This is the lowest power CDRH laser classification This class is considered intrinsically safe even if all laser output were directed into the eye s pupil There are no special operating procedures for this class CDRH Class 2 No additional software mechanisms are needed to conform to this limit Laser operation in this class poses no danger for unintentional direct human exposure Character A pattern of bars and spaces which either directly represents data or indicates a control function such as a number letter punctuation mark or communications control contained in a message Character Set Those characters available for encoding in a particular bar code symbology Check Digit A digit used to verify a correct symbol decode The scanner inserts the decoded data into an arithmetic formula and checks that the resulting number matches the encoded check digit Check digits are required for UPC but are optional for other symbologies Using check digits decreases the chance of substitution errors when a symbol is decoded Codabar A discrete self checking code with a character set consisting of digits 0 to 9 and six additional characters Code 128 A high density symbology which allows the controller to encode all 128 ASCII characters without adding extra symbol elements Code 3 of 9 Code 39 A ve
337. sseictsniscnteeacteneenseiaesnceasdeernteaeniedenseceaenneatice 15 37 Attempt to Transmit an Empty Buffer eesseeseeeeeeeeiretrreerirrrrrrtessrrrinrnnsssrrrrenna 15 37 Coda I Ehe 15 38 bleu Ee eege 15 38 Set Lengths for KEE eee ne eee ere eer 15 38 Coded Mierer na a cae e 15 40 Cod KEE 15 40 Set Lengths for Code EE 15 40 Code 11 Check Digit Verification 2 0 0 cence ee eenneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeetaaeeeeneeieeeeeeneees 15 42 Transmit Code 11 Check Digits siniciisscccuisedecseoedssicdeincacheaiaavidensnialeiteasatielacdaceceamaes 15 43 Interleaved 2 of 5 ITF ccienrecebsssonndycdiaciuredsemtededarebaesganeneectbteananecedanadraseesadnameteocetcaet 15 44 Enable Disable Interleaved 2 Of bp 15 44 Set Lengths for Interleaved 2 Of bp 15 44 2 of 5 Check Digit Verification scenctideicecciusdetieceinsatartacaoinndb ia eactesasidadeamilelteiadeecaine 15 46 Transmit 2 of 5 Check Digit EE 15 46 Convert 2 of 5 to EAN 13 EE 15 47 Discrete EE KE 15 47 Enable Disable Discrete 2 of 5 cccerscsccsescctaesasicecevsdenttancestesabssetensesusnbacdscesnsnnaaneeneniase 15 47 Set Lengths for Discrete 2 of 5 ebe cg eee wee 15 48 G dabar NW 7 E 15 50 Enable Disable Codabar passscsccediciaceauiecoeentsdeidedeunteentacanimetatidecetsieatincnemaccbiuasactelenten 15 50 E e De EE 15 50 CESI GUNG E 15 52 NOTIS EdItNO EE E 15 52 NS E E deeg 15 53 Enable Disable MSI E 15 53 Set Lengths for MSI WE 15 53 MSI Check Re 15 55 Transmit MSI Check Digit S E 1
338. symbol and include Country Code and System Character There are three options for transmitting a UPC A preamble to the host device transmit System Character only transmit System Character and Country Code CO for USA and transmit no preamble Select the appropriate option to match the host system No Preamble lt DATA gt 00h System Character lt SYSTEM CHARACTER gt lt DATA gt 01h System Character amp Country Code lt COUNTRY CODE gt lt SYSTEM CHARACTER gt lt DATA gt 02h 15 18 DS6878 Product Reference Guide UPC E Preamble Parameter 23h Preamble characters are part of the UPC symbol and include Country Code and System Character There are three options for transmitting a UPC E preamble to the host device transmit System Character only transmit System Character and Country Code CO for USA and transmit no preamble Select the appropriate option to match the host system No Preamble lt DATA gt 00h System Character lt SYSTEM CHARACTER gt lt DATA gt 01h System Character amp Country Code lt COUNTRY CODE gt lt SYSTEM CHARACTER gt lt DATA gt 02h Symbologies 15 19 UPC E1 Preamble Parameter 24h Preamble characters are part of the UPC symbol and include Country Code and
339. t is subject to the licenses terms and conditions of the agreement in force between the purchaser of the Motorola Product and Motorola Inc unless a separate Commercial Third Party Software License is included in which case your use of the Commercial Third Party Software will then be governed by the separate Commercial Third Party License The Publicly Available Software that may be included on this media or in the Motorola Product is listed below The use of the listed Publicly Available Software is subject to the licenses terms and conditions of the agreement in force between the purchaser of the Motorola Product and Motorola Inc as well as the terms and conditions of the license of each Publicly Available Software package Copies of the licenses for the listed Publicly Available Software as well as all attributions acknowledgements and software information details are included below Motorola is required to reproduce the software licenses acknowledgments and copyright notices as provided by the Authors and Owners thus all such information is provided in its native language form without modification or translation The Publicly Available Software in the list below is limited to the Publicly Available Software included by Motorola The Publicly Available Software included by Commercial Third Party Software or Products that is used in the Motorola Product are disclosed in the Commercial Third Party Licenses or via the respective Commer
340. t PC cold boots RS 232 only High beep A lt BEL gt character is received and Beep on lt BEL gt is enabled Point to Point mode only LED Definitions In addition to beeper sequences the digital scanner communicates with the user using a two color LED display Table 2 2 defines LED colors that display during scanning Table 2 2 Scanner LED Definitions with CR0078 S Cradle LED Indication Scanning Green Flash A bar code was successfully decoded Red Solid Transmission error or digital scanner malfunction Charging Green Slow Continuous Flash Non critical battery temperature fault Battery is above or below normal operating temperature If this occurs do not use the digital scanner and move the digital scanner to a location within normal operating temperature The digital scanner can remain in the cradle while the battery warms or cools to normal operating temperature Note For appropriate charging temperatures see Table 3 3 on page 3 10 Green Fast Continuous Flash Digital scanner is charging 2 4 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Table 2 2 Scanner LED Definitions with CR0078 S Cradle Green Solid LED Indication Digital scanner is fully charged Red Solid Scanner is in pre charge charge error or communications error with cradle Amber Flash Critical battery temperature fault Battery is above or below normal operating temperature If this occurs do not use the di
341. taBar Limited Security Level 3 03h GS1 DataBar Limited Security Level 4 04h Symbologies 15 71 Convert GS1 DataBar to UPC EAN Parameter FOh 8Dh This parameter only applies to GS1 DataBar 14 and GS1 DataBar Limited symbols not decoded as part of a Composite symbol Enable this to strip the leading 010 from DataBar 14 and DataBar Limited symbols encoding a single zero as the first digit and report the bar code as EAN 13 For bar codes beginning with two or more zeros but not six zeros this parameter strips the leading 0100 and reports the bar code as UPC A The UPC A Preamble parameter that transmits the system character and country code applies to converted bar codes Note that neither the system character nor the check digit can be stripped Enable Convert GS1 DataBar to UPC EAN 01h Disable Convert GS1 DataBar to UPC EAN 00h 15 72 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Composite Composite CC C Parameter FOh 55h Scan a bar code below to enable or disable Composite bar codes of type CC C Enable CC C 01h Disable CC C 00h lt V NOTE For HC configurations the default is Enable CC C Composite CC A B Parameter FO0h 56h Scan a bar code below to enable or disable Composite bar codes of
342. taining at least one unknown character are not sent to the host and the digital scanner emits an error beep Send Bar Codes With Unknown Characters Do Not Send Bar Codes With Unknown Characters 11 8 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Convert All Bar Codes to Code 39 By default the Wand Emulation interface sends data to the attached host in the same symbology that was decoded This can be a problem for customers with older systems that do not recognize newer symbologies for example GS1 DataBar Enabling this parameter ignores the original symbology decoded and outputs the data as if it were a Code 39 bar code Any lowercase characters in the original data stream are transmitted as uppercase characters This also allows ADF rules If Ignore Unknown Characters is enabled any characters that do not have a corresponding character in the Code 39 symbology set are replaced by a space If Ignore Unknown Characters is disabled if any characters that do not have a corresponding character are encountered the digital scanner emits an error beep and no data is transmitted lt J NOTE ADF Note By default the Wand Emulation interface does not allow scanned data to be processed by ADF rules Enabling this parameter has the side effect of allowing the scanned data to be processed by the ADF rules see Chapter 1
343. tals 2 and 5 digits 10h Ignore 15 11 User Programmable Supplementals 15 14 Supplemental 1 Fih 43h Supplemental 2 Fih 44h UPC EAN JAN Supplemental Redundancy 50h 10 15 14 Decode UPC EAN JAN Supplemental AIM ID Fih AOh Combined 15 15 Transmit UPC A Check Digit 28h Enable 15 15 Transmit UPC E Check Digit 29h Enable 15 16 Transmit UPC E1 Check Digit 2Ah Enable 15 16 UPC A Preamble 22h System Character 15 17 UPC E Preamble 23h System Character 15 18 UPC E1 Preamble 24h System Character 15 19 Convert UPC E to A 25h Disable 15 20 Table 15 1 Parameter Defaults Continued Symbologies DES Parameter jii Default De Convert UPC E1 to A 26h Disable 15 20 EAN 8 JAN 8 Extend 27h Disable 15 21 Bookland ISBN Format Fih 40h ISBN 10 15 22 UCC Coupon Extended Code 55h Disable 15 23 Coupon Report F1h DAh New Coupon 15 24 Format ISSN EAN Fih 69h Disable 15 25 Code 128 Code 128 08h Enable 15 26 Set Length s for Code 128 D1h D2h Any Length 15 26 GS1 128 formerly UCC EAN 128 OEh Enable 15 28 ISBT 128 54h Enable 15 28 ISBT Concatenation Fih 41h Disable 15 29 Check ISBT Table Fih 42h Enable 15 30 ISBT Concatenation Redundancy DFh 10 15 30 Code 39 Code 39 00h Enable 15 31 Trioptic Code 39 ODh Disable 15 31 Convert Code 39 to Code 32 Italian Pharmacy Code 56h Disable 15 32 Code 32 Prefix E7h Disable 15 32 Set Length s for Code 39 12h 13h 2 to 55 15 33 Co
344. tely following the date format bar code To select no date separator scan the No Separator DL parsing rule immediately following the date format bar code CCYYMMDD CCYYDDMM MMDDCCYY MMCCYYDD DDMMCCYY DDCCYYMM Driver s License Set Up DS6878 DL 17 19 Date Format continued YYMMDD YYDDMM MMDDYY MMYYDD DDMMYY DDYYMM No Separator Scan this bar code immediately following a date format bar code to use no separator character between the date fields No Separator 17 20 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Send Keystroke Control Characters and Keyboard Characters Control Characters Scan a Send bar code for the keystroke to send Send Control A Send Control B Send Control C Send Control D Send Control E Send Control F Send Control G Drivers License Set Up DS6878 DL 17 21 Send Control H 17 22 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Control Characters continued Send Control J Send Control L Send Control N Send Con
345. ter J NOTE Interface cables vary depending on configuration The connectors illustrated in Figure 9 1 are examples only The connectors may be different than those illustrated but the steps to connect the cradle remain the same If a power supply is used disconnect the power supply before changing host cables or the cradle may not recognize the new host Keyboard Wedge Parameter Defaults Keyboard Wedge Interface 9 3 Table 9 1 lists the defaults for Keyboard Wedge host parameters To change any option scan the appropriate bar code s in the Keyboard Wedge Host Parameters section beginning on page 9 4 J NOTE See Appendix A Standard Default Parameters for all user preferences hosts symbologies and miscellaneous default parameters Table 9 1 Keyboard Wedge Host Default Table Parameter Default E Keyboard Wedge Host Parameters Keyboard Wedge Host Type IBM PC AT amp IBM PC Compatibles 9 4 Country Types Country Codes North American 9 5 Ignore Unknown Characters Send 9 7 Keystroke Delay No Delay 9 8 Intra Keystroke Delay Disable 9 8 Alternate Numeric Keypad Emulation Disable 9 9 Caps Lock On Disable 9 9 Caps Lock Override Disable 9 10 Convert Wedge Data No Convert 9 10 Function Key Mapping Disable 9 11 FN1 Substitution Disable 9 11 Send and Make Break Send 9 12 9 4 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Keyboard Wedge Host Parameters Keyboard Wedge Host Types Select the K
346. ter 9 Keyboard Wedge Interface provides information for setting up the digital scanner and cradle for Keyboard Wedge operation e Chapter 10 IBM Interface provides all information for setting up the digital scanner and cradle with IBM 468X 469X POS systems e Chapter 11 Wand Emulation Interface provides all information for setting up the digital scanner and cradle for Wand Emulation operation e Chapter 12 Scanner Emulation Interface provides information for setting up the digital scanner and cradle for Scanner Emulation operation e Chapter 13 123Scan2 PC based scanner configuration tool enables rapid and easy customized setup of Motorola Solutions scanners e Chapter 14 OCR Programming describes how to set up the digital scanner for OCR programming e Chapter 15 Symbologies describes all symbology features and provides the programming bar codes necessary for selecting these features for the digital scanner e Chapter 16 Advanced Data Formatting ADF describes how to customize scanned data before transmitting to the host This chapter also contains the bar codes for advanced data formatting e Chapter 17 Drivers License Set Up DS6878 DL describes how the DS6878 DL digital scanner can parse out information from the standard US driver s licenses and certain other American Association of Motor Vehicle Administrators AAMVA compliant ID cards e Appendix A Standard Default Parameters provides a table of all host devices and m
347. the bar code data with or without the UPC A check digit It is always verified to guarantee the integrity of the data Transmit UPC A Check Digit 01h Do Not Transmit UPC A Check Digit 00h 15 16 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Transmit UPC E Check Digit Parameter 29h The check digit is the last character of the symbol used to verify the integrity of the data Scan the appropriate bar code below to transmit the bar code data with or without the UPC E check digit It is always verified to guarantee the integrity of the data Transmit UPC E Check Digit 01h Do Not Transmit UPC E Check Digit 00h Transmit UPC E1 Check Digit Parameter 2Ah The check digit is the last character of the symbol used to verify the integrity of the data Scan the appropriate bar code below to transmit the bar code data with or without the UPC E1 check digit It is always verified to guarantee the integrity of the data Transmit UPC E1 Check Digit 01h Do Not Transmit UPC E1 Check Digit 00h Symbologies 15 17 UPC A Preamble Parameter 22h Preamble characters are part of the UPC
348. the digital scanner in place See Figure 1 3 on page 1 4 for the location of the convertible mount hook 3 Ensure the desk wall mount converter knob is in the position shown in Figure 1 11 Converter Knob Figure 1 11 Vertical Mount Inserting the Digital Scanner in the Cradle Getting Started 1 15 Inserting Removing Digital Scanner in the CR0078 P Cradle To insert the scanner in the cradle 1 Insert the scanner by placing the bottom of the scanner at a slight forward angle into the CR0078 P cradle 2 Push the handle back and down until it clicks engaging the contacts of the scanner and cradle Figure 1 12 nserting the Digital Scanner in the Cradle To remove the scanner from the cradle 1 Remove the scanner by pushing the scanner slightly forward and up out of the CR0078 P cradle Figure 1 13 Removing the Digital Scanner in the Cradle 1 16 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Charging the Digital Scanner Battery Fully charge the digital scanner battery before using the digital scanner for the first time To charge the digital scanner battery place the digital scanner in the cradle ensuring that the metal contacts on the bottom of the digital scanner touch the contacts on the cradle The battery begins charging when the digital scanner LED indicator starts flashing green for the CR0078 S cradle and turns solid green for the CR0078 P cradle A complete charge of a fully discharged battery can take up to three hours us
349. the following representative characters Y outputs as f F outputs as c f outputs as h J NOTE Enable OCR A before setting this parameter If disabling OCR A set the variant to its default OCR A Full ASCIl 14 4 DS6878 Product Reference Guide OCR A Variant continued OCR A Full ASCII 00h OCR A Reserved 1 01h OCR A Reserved 2 02h OCR A Banking 03h OCR Programming 14 5 Enable Disable OCR B Parameter Eih A9h To enable or disable OCR B scan one of the following bar codes Enable OCR B Disable OCR B 14 6 DS6878 Product Reference Guide OCR B Variant Parameter F1 ADh OCR B has the following variants Selecting the most appropriate font variant affects performance and accuracy e OCR B Full ASCII 1 0123456789 lt gt ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZAIN e OCR B Banking 0123456789 lt gt JNPI e OCR B Limited 0123456789 lt gt ACENPSTVX e OCR B Travel Document Version 1 TD1 3 Line ID Cards 0123456789 lt ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ e OCR B Passport 0123456789 lt ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZN e OCR B ISBN 10 Digit Book Numbers 0123456789 gt BCEINPSXz e OCR B ISBN 10 or 13 Digit Book Numbers 012345678
350. time is detected Batteries must be charged within the 32 F to 104 F 0 C to 40 C temperature range The standard warranty period for all Symbol batteries is 30 days regardless if the battery was purchased separately or included as part of the digital scanner For more information on Symbol batteries please visit http support symbol com support product manuals do Troubleshooting Table 3 1 Troubleshooting Problem Battery Possible Causes Possible Solutions Digital Scanner battery requires frequent charging Battery may need reconditioning Restore the battery by performing a battery reconditioning cycle See Reconditioning the Digital Scanner Battery on page 1 17 for more information Digital Scanner displays solid red LED longer than 3 seconds when placed in cradle Battery may require pre charge due to excessive discharge Wait for the red LED to turn green indicating that the scanner has begun normal charging Recommend allowing battery to fully recharge Beeper Indications Digital Scanner emits low high low beeps ADF transmit error See Chapter 16 Advanced Data Formatting for information about ADF programming Invalid ADF rule is detected See Chapter 16 Advanced Data Formatting for information about ADF programming The Code 39 buffer was erased or there was an attempt to clear or transmit an empty buffer Normal when scanning the Code 39 Buffe
351. tion about scanner cradle pairing and wireless communication The digital scanner must be connected to the cradle for the host parameter setting to take effect When the digital scanner is not connected to a cradle and a host parameter bar code is scanned a long low long high beep sequence sounds To perform Scanner Emulation connect the cradle to a mobile computer or a controller which collects the data and interprets it for the host IMPORTANT The CR0078 S cradle model STB4278 supports Scanner Emulation The CR0078 P cradle model A CR0078 does not support Scanner Emulation Host Port Connector Figure 12 1 Scanner Emulation Connection To connect the Scanner Emulation interface 1 Attach the modular connector of the Scanner Emulation interface cable to the host port on the bottom of the digital scanner cradle see Connecting the Cables to the CR0078 S CR0008 S Cradle on page 1 8 2 Connect the other end of the Scanner Emulation interface cable to the digital scanner port on the mobile computer or controller 3 Scan the Scanner Emulation host bar code from Scanner Emulation Host on page 12 3 to enable the Scanner Emulation host interface 4 To modify any other parameter options scan the appropriate bar codes in this chapter of NOTE Interface cables vary depending on configuration The connectors illustrated in Figure 12 1 are examples only The connectors may be different than those illustrated but the steps to
352. to transmit the characters NR when a successful decode does not occur before trigger release or the Decode Session Timeout expires See Decode Session Timeout on page 5 30 Disable this to send nothing to the host if a symbol does not decode J NOTE f you enable Transmit No Read and also enable Symbol Code ID Character or AIM Code ID Character for Transmit Code ID Character on page 5 47 the digital scanner appends the code ID for Code 39 to the NR message Enable No Read 01h Disable No Read 00h 5 52 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Chapter 6 Imaging Preferences Introduction You can program the digital scanner to perform various functions or activate different features This chapter describes imaging preference features and provides programming bar codes for selecting these features J NOTE Only the Symbol Native API SNAPI with Imaging interface supports image capture See USB Device Type on page 7 5 to enable this host The digital scanner ships with the settings in Imaging Preferences Parameter Defaults on page 6 2 also see Appendix A Standard Default Parameters for all host device and miscellaneous defaults If the default values suit requirements programming is not necessary To set feature values scan a single bar code or a short bar code sequence The settings are stored in non volatile memory and are preserved even wh
353. tor or contact Motorola Solutions Support See page xxii for contact information Technical Specifications Maintenance Troubleshooting amp Technical Specifications 3 9 Table 3 2 Technical Specifications DS6878 Digital Scanner Item Description Physical Characteristics Dimensions 7 3 in H x 3 85 in L x 2 7 in W 18 5 cm H x 9 7 cm L x 6 9 cm W Weight with battery Approximately 8 4 oz 238 g Color Cash Register White or Twilight Black HC Configuration Healthcare White Performance Characteristics Light Source Aiming Pattern 650 nm laser diode Illumination 630 nm LED Frame Rate Decode Mode Up to 60 fps Radio Range Minimum 33 ft 10m Typical warehouse environment 50 ft 15m Battery Specifications 750mAH NiMH 3 AAA number of scans per full charge typically 15 000 1 scan second Charge Time Fully discharged battery lt 3 hours via external power approximately 5 5 hours via host power through cable Roll Tolerance 360 Pitch Tolerance 60 Yaw Tolerance 60 Nominal Working Distance See Decode Ranges on page 2 9 Decode Capability UPC EAN and with supplementals Code 39 Code 39 Full ASCII Tri optic Code 39 GS1 DataBar Variants GS1 128 Code 128 Code 128 Full ASCII Code 93 Codabar NW1 Interleaved 2 of 5 Discrete 2 of 5 MSI Codell IATA Bookland EAN Code 32 Interfaces Supported See Table 3 3 User E
354. tring is not matched in the output stream It can be used in two ways 0 POct Where e PO is the Skip Until Not operator e cis the type of character that triggers the start of output e tis one or more template characters PO S t Where e PO is the Skip Until Not operator e s is one or more literal string characters see Literal String and on page 14 20 that trigger the start of output e tis one or more template characters 14 24 DS6878 Product Reference Guide The trigger character or literal string is not included in output from a Skip Until Not operator Template Incoming data Output P0A9999 BPN3456 3456 PN1234 PN1234 5341 5341 Template Incoming data Output PO PN 9999 PN3456 3456 5341 5341 PNPN7654 7654 Repeat Previous R R This operator allows a template character to repeat one or more times allowing the capture of variable length scanned data The following examples capture two required alpha characters followed by one or more required digits Template Incoming data Output AA9R AB3 AB3 PN12345 PN12345 32RM52700 No output Scroll Until Match S This operator steps through scanned data one character at a time until the data matches the template S Template Incoming data Output 99999 AB3 No Output PN12345 12345 32RM52700 52700 OCR Programming 14 25 Template Examples Following are sample templates with descriptions of valid data for each definition Field Definition D
355. trol I Send Control K Send Control M Send Control O Driver s License Set Up DS6878 DL 17 23 Send Control P 17 24 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Control Characters continued Send Control Q Send Control R Send Control S Send Control T Send Control U Send Control V Send Control W Driver s License Set Up DS6878 DL 17 25 Control Characters continued VATA Send Control X III Send Control Y UA AAT Send Control Z AA Send Conirol VATA Send Control A3 84 Send Control 17 26 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Control Characters continued Send Control 6 Send Control Keyboard Characters Scan a Send bar code for the keyboard characters to send Send Space Send Send
356. ttings are stored in non volatile memory and are preserved even when you power down the digital scanner vi NOTE Most computer monitors allow scanning the bar codes directly on the screen When scanning from the screen be sure to set the document magnification to a level where you can see the bar code clearly and bars and or spaces are not merging If not using a USB cable select a host type see each host chapter for specific host information after the power up beeps sound This is only necessary upon the first power up when connecting to a new host To return all features to default values scan the Default Parameters on page 5 5 Throughout the programming bar code menus asterisks indicate default values A Feature Option Indicates Default Enable Decode Aiming Pattern 02h Option Hex Value for programming via SSI command 5 2 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Scanning Sequence Examples In most cases scanning one bar code sets the parameter value For example to set the beeper tone to high scan the High Frequency beeper tone bar code listed under Beeper Tone on page 5 8 The digital scanner issues a fast warble beep and the LED turns green signifying a successful parameter entry Other parameters require scanning several bar codes See these parameter descriptions for this procedure Errors While Scanning Unless otherwise specified to correct an error during a scanning sequence just re scan the correct parameter
357. type CC A B Enable CC A B 01h Disable CC A B 00h P NOTE For HC configurations the default is Enable CC A B Symbologies 15 73 Composite TLC 39 Scan a bar code below to enable or disable Composite bar codes of type TLC 39 Enable TLC39 01h Disable TLC39 00h 15 74 DS6878 Product Reference Guide UPC Composite Mode Select an option for linking UPC symbols with a 2D symbol during transmission as if they were one symbol e Select UPC Never Linked to transmit UPC bar codes regardless of whether a 2D symbol is detected e Select UPC Always Linked to transmit UPC bar codes and the 2D portion If 2D is not present the UPC bar code does not transmit e If you select Autodiscriminate UPC Composites the digital scanner determines if there is a 2D portion then transmits the UPC as well as the 2D portion if present UPC Never Linked 00h UPC Always Linked 01h Autodiscriminate UPC Composites 02h Symbologies 15 75 Composite Beep Mode To select the number of decode beeps when a composite bar code is decoded scan the appropriate bar code Single Beep After Both are Decoded 00h
358. u release the trigger or the Decode Session Timeout occurs e Auto Aim If the primary trigger trigger A is set to imager this trigger mode turns on the laser aiming pattern when you lift the digital scanner A trigger pull activates decode processing After 2 seconds of inactivity the aiming pattern shuts off Standard Level 00h Auto Aim 09h 5 14 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Hands Free Mode Parameter F1h 76h In hands free mode the digital scanner automatically triggers when presented with a bar code Lifting the digital scanner causes it to behave according to the setting of the Hand Held Trigger Mode on page 5 13 J NOTE The CR0078 P cradle is required for Hands Free mode If you select Disable Hands Free Mode the digital scanner behaves according to the setting of the Hand Held Trigger Mode regardless of whether it is hand held or on a countertop Enable Hands Free Mode 01h Disable Hands Free Mode 00h User Preferences amp Miscellaneous Digital Scanner Options 5 15 Presentation Performance Mode Parameter F1h 8Ah Select one of the following Presentation Performance Mode options e Standard Presentation Mode is optimized for general purpose scanning i e reading bar codes from standard surfaces such as paper labels or hang tags This mode
359. ues on page 5 50 to set the Key Category and Key Value Disable Keyboard FN1 Substitution Enable Keyboard FN1 Substitution HID Function Key Mapping ASCII values under 32 are normally sent as control key sequences When this parameter is enabled the keys in bold are sent in place of the standard key mapping see Table 7 2 on page 7 20 Table entries that do not have a bold entry remain the same whether or not this parameter is enabled Disable Function Key Mapping Enable Function Key Mapping Radio Communications 4 13 Simulated Caps Lock When enabled the digital scanner inverts upper and lower case characters on the digital scanner bar code as if the Caps Lock state is enabled on the keyboard This inversion is done regardless of the current state of the keyboard Caps Lock state Disable Simulated Caps Lock Enable Simulated Caps Lock Convert Case When enabled the digital scanner converts all bar code data to the selected case a No Case Conversion Convert All to Upper Case Convert All to LowerCase 4 14 DS68
360. ults Write to Custom Defaults 5 6 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Parameter Bar Code Scanning Parameter ECh To disable the decoding of parameter bar codes including the Set Defaults parameter bar codes scan the Disable Parameter Scanning bar code below To enable decoding of parameter bar codes scan Enable Parameter Scanning Enable Parameter Bar Code Scanning 01h Disable Parameter Bar Code Scanning 00h Beep After Good Decode Parameter 38h Scan a bar code below to select whether or not the digital scanner beeps after a good decode If selecting Do Not Beep After Good Decode the beeper still operates during parameter menu scanning and to indicate error conditions Beep After Good Decode Enable 01h Do Not Beep After Good Decode Disable 00h User Preferences amp Miscellaneous Digital Scanner Options 5 7 Suppress Power Up Beeps Parameter F1h D1h Scan a bar code below to select whether or not to suppress digital scanner beeps upon power up Do Not Suppress Power Up Beeps 00h Suppress Power Up Beeps 01h 5 8 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Beeper Tone Parameter 91h To select a decode beep fr
361. upports SNAPI 0 40 50 0 40 50 70 100 0 0 70 0 A A i d PDF417 Code 40 40 Data Matrix Code 10 40 40 Code 128 Code 5 65 60 60 Code 128 Code 100 100 65 100 Figure 5 4 Multicode Expression Example 3 User Preferences amp Miscellaneous Digital Scanner Options 5 43 Multicode Mode Concatenation Enable this parameter to transmit multiple decoded bar codes as specified by the Multicode Expression as one bar code Use the Multicode Concatenation Symbology parameter to specify how the concatenated bar codes transmit Disable this to transmit decoded bar codes separately NOTE When using Multicode Mode Concatenation disable Transmit Code ID Character on page 5 47 and check v digits Enable Multicode Mode Concatenation 01h Disable Multicode Mode Concatenation 00h 5 44 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Multicode Concatenation Symbology Use this parameter to specify how to transmit the concatenated bar codes decoded as specified by the Multicode Expression Multicode Mode Concatenation must be enabled to use this option Concatenation as Code 128 01h Concatenation as PDF417 02h Concatenation as Data Matrix 03h Concatenation as Maxicode 04h User Preferences amp Miscellaneous Digital Scanner Options 5 45 Multicode Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Multicode Expression Progr
362. ved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved 9 N A N A N A N A N A N A 10 N A N A N A N A N A N A Figure 3 1 illustrates the positions of the cradle pins Dim A Pin3 Pin2 Pin Figure 3 1 Cradle Pin Assignments The signal descriptions in Table 3 6 apply to the connector from the digital scanner to the digital scanner cradle and are for reference only Table 3 6 Cradle Pin outs Pin Description 1 CRADLE_TXD 2 VCC 3 GND 4 CRADLE_RXD Chapter 4 Radio Communications Introduction This chapter provides information about the modes of operation and features available for wireless communication between digital scanners cradles and hosts The chapter also includes the parameters necessary to configure the digital scanner The digital scanner ships with the settings shown in the Radio Communication Default Table on page 4 2 also see Appendix A Standard Default Parameters for all host device and miscellaneous digital scanner defaults If the default values suit requirements programming is not necessary To set feature values scan a single bar code or a short bar code sequence The settings are stored in non volatile memory and are preserved even when the digital scanner is powered down If not using a Synapse or USB cable with the cradle select a host type See each host chapter for specific host information after the power up beeps sound This is only necessary upon the first power up when
363. ver s License Set Up DS6878 DL ett eete HL EE 17 1 Drivers enee Parsing aerisire ienna KE EE EEGEN 17 2 Parsing Drivers License Data Fields Embedded Driver s License Parsing 17 3 Table of Contents xvii Embedded Driver s License Parsing Criteria Code Type cceceeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeee 17 3 Drivers License Parse Field Bar Codes AE 17 4 AAMVA Parse Field Bar Codes aisccscceiecccsaes cc sisetedi ene cincsadsdenstaventa dees lcenabaanbineecesixte 17 7 User E 17 17 Set Default Parameter eessen eege 17 17 Output Gender as M or F eege 17 17 Date Formal EE 17 18 No SON eebe E E a 17 19 Send Keystroke Control Characters and Keyboard Characters cseeeeee 17 20 Control Etage eege gust See 17 20 Keyboard Characters gegen geed eEeatee 17 26 Parsing Rule Example ccccssesciscindesscoesd ienaa aAa Ra aE 17 41 Embedded Driver s License Parsing ADF Example eesseseseeeeeerieesrrrrrrrsessrren 17 45 Appendix A Standard Default Parameters Appendix B Programming Reference unsere EE B 1 AIM Code LEE B 3 Appendix C Sample Bar Codes L ele Le EE C 1 URPCEAN tee ee C 1 KIEM nn ed C 1 EAN 13 1009 C 2 elen EEN C 2 Interleaved 2 0l D sxc scten eege C 2 ELE EE C 3 GS1 DataBar 14 EEN ENEE ENEE C 4 PDAS be eege EE hee C 4 Pata MANIX EE C 4 MAXICOD OS ccena dederazoun dena taaacs see dando sdoonsdeeansdecaumeelsideontaaadverdeaioen ieee C 5 QR C d eee eet Ce C 5 US POS Ebert ne deea A E E A E ts C 5 U
364. when hosts require a slower transmission of data No Delay Medium Delay 20 msec Long Delay 40 msec USB CAPS Lock Override This option applies only to the HID Keyboard Emulation device When enabled the case of the data is preserved regardless of the state of the caps lock key This setting is always enabled for the Japanese Windows ASCII keyboard type and can not be disabled Override Caps Lock Key Enable Do Not Override Caps Lock Key Disable USB Interface 7 11 USB Ignore Unknown Characters This option applies only to the HID Keyboard Emulation device and IBM device Unknown characters are characters the host does not recognize When Send Bar Codes With Unknown Characters is selected all bar code data is sent except for unknown characters and no error beeps sound When Do Not Send Bar Codes With Unknown Characters is selected bar code data is sent up to the first unknown character then the digital scanner issues an error beep Send Bar Codes with Unknown Characters Do Not Send Bar Codes with Unknown Characters USB Convert Unknown
365. xcept for the check digit s product is computed The check digit passes if this sum modulo Check Digit Modulus is equal to the check digit s product Example Scanned data numeric value is 122456 check digit is 6 Check digit multiplier string is 123456 Digit 1 2 2 4 5 6 Multiplier 6 5 4 3 2 1 Product 6 10 8 12 10 6 Product add 6 10 8 12 10 46 6 The Check Digit Modulus is 10 It passes because 46 divided by 10 leaves a remainder of 6 Product Add Right to Left Simple Remainder 05h OCR Programming 14 31 Digit Add Right To Left Simple Remainder Each character in the scanned data is assigned a numeric value see OCR Check Digit Multiplier on page 14 26 The check digit multiplier is reversed in order Each value representing a character in the scanned data is multiplied by its corresponding digit in the reversed multiplier resulting in a product for each character in the scanned data The sum of each individual digit in all of the products except for the check digit s product is then calculated The check digit passes if this sum modulo Check Digit Modulus is equal to the check digit s product Example Scanned data numeric value is 122459 check digit is 6 Check digit multiplier string is 123456 Digit 1 2 2 4 5 9 Multiplier 6 5 4 3 2 1 Product 6 10 8 12 10 9 Digit add 6 140 8 142 1 0 19 9 The Check Digit Modulus is 10 It passes because 19 divided by 10 le
366. zable symbology uses its own unique format See Symbology Bar Code Density The number of characters represented per unit of measurement e g characters per inch Bar Height The dimension of a bar measured perpendicular to the bar width Bar Width Thickness of a bar measured from the edge closest to the symbol start character to the trailing edge of the same bar Bit Binary digit One bit is the basic unit of binary information Generally eight consecutive bits compose one byte of data The pattern of 0 and 1 values within the byte determines its meaning Bits per Second bps Bits transmitted or received Bluetooth A technology that provides a way to connect and exchange information between devices such as scanners mobile phones laptops PCs and printers over a secure globally unlicensed short range radio frequency Glossary 2 DS6878 Product Reference Guide Boot or Boot up The process a computer goes through when it starts During boot up the computer can run self diagnostic tests and configure hardware and software bps See Bits Per Second Byte On an addressable boundary eight adjacent binary digits 0 and 1 combined in a pattern to represent a specific character or numeric value Bits are numbered from the right O through 7 with bit O the low order bit One byte in memory is used to store one ASCII character C CDRH Center for Devices and Radiological Health A federal agency responsible for regulating la
367. ze in terms 1 Kilobytes 1024 bytes The default value is 160 kB which represents 160 Kilobytes CAUTION JPEG compress may take 10 to 15 seconds based on the amount of information in the target image Scanning JPEG Quality Selector default setting on page 6 11 produces a compressed image that is consistent in quality and compression time To set the JPEG Target File Size parameter scan JPEG Target File Size below followed by three numeric bar codes representing the value Leading zeros are required For example to set a JPEG target file size value of 99 scan 0 9 9 in Appendix D Numeric Bar Codes JPEG Target File Size 3 digits JPEG Quality and Size Value JPEG Quality Parameter FOh 31h If you selected JPEG Quality Selector scan the JPEG Quality Value bar code followed by 3 bar codes from Appendix D Numeric Bar Codes corresponding to a value from 5 to 100 where 100 represents the highest quality image JPEG Quality Value Default 065 5 100 Decimal Imaging Preferences 6 13 Image Enhancement Parameter Fth 34h This parameter configures the digital scanner s Image Enhance feature This feature uses a combination of edge sharpening and contrast enhancement to produce an image that is visually pleasing The levels of image enhancement are Off 0 Default e Low 1 Med 2 e High 3 on 0 Low 1

Alphanumeric Keyboard (continued)

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents